- No category
advertisement
GE
Industrial Solutions
Evolution Series E9000
™
Motor Control Centers
Application Guide
DET291F_Section_A:Layout 1 7/7/15 1:02 PM Page 1
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
Section A: General
Product Design & Features ............................................................................................1
Bus Features ........................................................................................................................2
Unit Features ....................................................................................................................3-5
IP20 and Incidental Contact Barrier Features ......................................................6
Wire, Cable, and Nameplates ......................................................................................6
NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring ........................................................................7
Codes and Standards........................................................................................................8
Short Circuit Considerations..........................................................................................9
Fuse Classification ..........................................................................................................10
Environmental Considerations ..................................................................................10
Section B: Structure
Enclosure Types ..................................................................................................................1
Indoor Enclosures........................................................................................................2-13
Outdoor Enclosures ........................................................................................................14
Enclosure Options ....................................................................................................15-16
Bus Selection ......................................................................................................................17
Section C: Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Mains- General ....................................................................................................................1
Fused Switch Mains ..........................................................................................................1
Circuit Breaker Mains ........................................................................................................2
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and Feeder Units..............................................3
Feeders-General..................................................................................................................4
Fused Switch Feeders ......................................................................................................4
AFM Fused Switch Feeders ............................................................................................4
Circuit Breaker Feeders....................................................................................................5
AFM Circuit Breaker Feeders ........................................................................................5
Accessories for Mains & Feeders ................................................................................5
Options for Mains & Feeders ........................................................................................6
Incoming Line Terminations ..........................................................................................7
Automatic Transfer Switches ........................................................................................8
Transitions..............................................................................................................................8
Section D: Starters
General ....................................................................................................................................1
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Starter Units ..................................................................2
Circuit Breaker Type Selection Tables ..................................................................3-6
Fused Switch Type Selection Tables ..................................................................7-10
Starter Options ..........................................................................................................11-12
Product Information ................................................................................................13-15
Section E: Miscellaneous Units
Operator and Metering Panels ....................................................................................1
Mounting Plates ..............................................................................................................2-3
Lighting and Distribution Panels..................................................................................4
Distribution Transformers ..........................................................................................5-6
Power Factor Correction Capacitors ....................................................................7-8
Section F: Intelligent MCC
General ....................................................................................................................................1
Intelligent MCC Configurations ....................................................................................2
Programmable Logic Controllers............................................................................3-7
Programmable Automation Controllers ..........................................................8-11
Example PLC Connections ..........................................................................................12
Distributed I/O & Remote I/O ..............................................................................13-16
Human Machine Interface (HMI)........................................................................17-18 envisage- Energy Management System ..............................................................19
Section G: Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Frequency AC Drives ................................................................................1
Adjustable Speed Drives - General ............................................................................2
Adjustable Speed Drives - Specifications............................................................3-5
Adjustable Speed Drives - Space Height & Assembly ..................................6-7
Six Pulse VFD Generic Block Diagram ......................................................................7
Adjustable Speed Drives - Configurations ..............................................................8
Adjustable Speed Drives - Harmonic Filters ..........................................................9
Adjustable Speed Drives - Motor Application Data..........................................10
How to Select Drives................................................................................................10-11
Solid-State Starters - ASTAT XT ..........................................................................12-16
Solid-State Starters - ASTAT BP ..........................................................................17-19
Solid-State Starters - Selection Tables............................................................20-27
Solid-State Starters - Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect ..................28
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Solid State Drives & Starters................................29
Section H: Components
Spectra RMS* Mag-Break* Motor Circuit Protectors ....................................1-2
Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches..........................................................................3
Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects ................................................................................4
New Generation High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switches ................................5
Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit Breakers ..................................................6
Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers ..................................................................................7-8
Ground Fault Current Detection Systems - Model BGFL..................................9
Ground Fault Current Detection Systems - Model GFM ................................10
C2000 Line Motor Starters ..........................................................................................11
300-Line Motor Starters ........................................................................................12-13
Overload Relays................................................................................................................14
Industrial Relays ..............................................................................................................15
Accessories for C2000 Contactor and Control Relay......................................15
CR104P Pilot Devices ......................................................................................................16
C2000 Pilot Devices ........................................................................................................17
Solid-State Motor Winding Heater ..........................................................................18
EPM 6000 Power Meter ................................................................................................19
EPM 6010 Automation Power Meter ......................................................................20
EPM 7000 Power Meter ................................................................................................21
PQM II Power Quality Meter ........................................................................................22
Three-Phase Voltage Monitors - Model SPVRB ..................................................23
High-Resistance Ground ..............................................................................................24
MM200 Motor Management System ..............................................................25-27
MM300 Motor Management System ..............................................................28-30
Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME - Surge Protective Device (SPD) ............31-32
Section J: Application Data
Approximate Motor Full-Load Current Ratings ....................................................1
Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Set Positions ..................................2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings for Motor Circuits..............................................3
Overload Heater Tables for Ther-Mag Controllers..............................................4
Overload Heater Tables for Mag-Break Controllers ......................................5-9
Overload Heater Tables for Overload Relays ....................................................10
Overload Heater Tables for Fused Controllers............................................11-12
Starter Fuse Selection ............................................................................................13-14
Control Transformer Fusing ........................................................................................15
Heat Loss Considerations ............................................................................................15
Motor Load ..........................................................................................................................16
Non-Motor Loads ......................................................................................................16-19
Publication References ..........................................................................................20-21
Electrical Data ............................................................................................................22-23
Section K: Drawings & Testing
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System ....................................................................1-3
Special Paint..........................................................................................................................4
Packing & Storing................................................................................................................4
Standard Commercial Tests & Inspection ..........................................................5-6
Section L: Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 1-4 ..................................................................................................................1-2
FVNR Size 5-6 ..................................................................................................................3-4
FVNR with Voltage Indicator Module ........................................................................5
FVR Size 1-4 ..........................................................................................................................6
RVAT Size 2-6 ........................................................................................................................7
2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4 ......................................................................................8-9
2S2W with MM200 ..........................................................................................................10
2S-PW Size 1-5 ..................................................................................................................11
Wye-Delta Open Transition ................................................................................12-13
Distribution Transformers ............................................................................................14
Single-Phase Panelboard ............................................................................................15
Three-Phase Panelboard ..............................................................................................16
FVNR with PLC....................................................................................................................17
RVNR-AT with PLC ............................................................................................................18
2S2W with PLC ..................................................................................................................19
ASTAT XT ..............................................................................................................................20
ASTAT XT Bypass ..............................................................................................................21
ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass ..........................................................................................22
ASTAT XT Bypass Emergency Bypass ....................................................................23
ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass Emergency Bypass ................................................24
ASTAT BP ..............................................................................................................................25
ASTAT BP Isolation............................................................................................................26
Adjustable Speed Drives ..............................................................................................27
High-Resistance Ground ..............................................................................................28
MM200 ..................................................................................................................................29
MM300 ..................................................................................................................................30
Section M: Specifications
MCC 600 Volts & Below................................................................................................1-3
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Evolution Series E9000: Safety and Flexibility are Standard
GE’s Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers (MCC) provide safe and flexible centralizing of motor starters and related control equipment. It combines motor control units, feeder units, distribution transformers, lighting panels, relays, remote and local control, sophisticated communications, metering and other miscellaneous devices to be contained in a single floor-mounted structural assembly fed from a common enclosed main bus.
Rugged and Reliable
GE motor control centers are constructed of standardized heavy gauge vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal buses, wiring channels and compartmented control units.
Shipping splits are bolted together to form a single line-up assembly. Units are mounted and wired in accordance with the wiring class specified. The motor control center may be powered by incoming line connection at a single point protected by an upstream disconnect or provided with a main protective device within the equipment. Where possible, motor control centers bear UL section and unit labels.
E9000 with AFM: Even More Protection
GE’s E9000 MCC with Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) units is a new offering for customers and specific applications where additional protection of personnel is essential. The AFM units were designed around lowering the potential for electrical shock hazards in motor control centers.
The AFM unit design includes optional IP20 devices and incidental contact safety barriers in an effort to prevent accidental contact with energized parts during maintenance.
New Level of Arc Flash Mitigation
The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occuring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence.
The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional
IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor.
Other IP20 protection options are available in starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.
E9000 MCC
E9000 MCC with Arc Flash Mitigation Units
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
Product Design and Features
Design flexibility, performance, personnel and equipment pro tection, ease of maintenance and installation are all contained in the Evolution Series E9000*. Evolution Series E9000 features, such as separate wiring troughs, split-type terminal boards, isolated bus, drawout starter units, operating mechanisms, and provisions for starter interchangeability, are designed for a high level of reliability, safety and convenience.
The new Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) units were added in order to provide additional safety features and flexibility for customers.
Easily removable plastic knock-outs are provided in the vertical wireway ladder assembly to allow routing of field wiring into units.
A
Enclosure Features
These steel-enclosed control centers can be joined together to centralize, protect and control the most complex systems of industrial auxiliary drives, or the simplest of loads such as fan or pump controls. As the need arises, additional sections can be added to an existing lineup in the field, often times without the need for a transition section.
An incoming-line terminal compartment can be located at the top or bottom of a vertical section to allow cable termination with minimum bending. The standard 600-ampere incoming line terminal compartment shown is furnished with mechanical type lugs. Other incoming line terminal compartments are available for main bus ampacities up to 2500 amperes.
A paint finish is applied to all un-plated steel parts. The powder coating process passes 1000 Hr. ASTM117B salt spray tests and provides lasting protection.
An optional snap-in steel barrier in the wireway provides added isolation for low voltage signal wiring between units.
All case side wireways are roll-formed to provide a 1/2" lip for cross wiring to rest on, thus preventing skinned insulation.
A1
A
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
Insulated and Isolated Vertical Bus
Bus Features
Splicing
E9000 MCC can be spliced onto existing 7700 Line, 8000 Line and
Spectra MCC for 1200A (supplied with 2" bars) and below without a transition section. Horizontal bus location in E9000 matches the existing bus location. Main bus amperage 1200A and greater with
4" bus bars can be spliced together but requires a transition section.
A polyester-reinforced “sandwich” insulates and isolates the vertical bus and helps prevent the spread of faults from starter and feeder units to vertical or horizontal bus. Small stab openings provide access to vertical bus and maintains effective isolation. 65kA short circuit bracing is standard for Evolution Series E9000 MCC.
Vertical Bus Shutters
Main Bus Barrier
Clear Lexan barriers located in front of the main horizontal bus isolate the bus from the top horizontal wireway. Maintenance personnel can easily gain entrance to the top horizontal wireway of the control center without danger of contact with a live bus.
Infrared Scanning
(Optional) For standard E9000 MCC’s, a vertical bus shutter mechanism can be supplied which covers the vertical bus stab area when a plug-in starter or feeder is withdrawn. Cap plugs are standard to close unused stab openings.
(Standard for AFM) For E9000 AFM, a vertical bus shutter mechanism is supplied as standard. The shutter will be mechanically closed when the stabs are retracted, isolating the bus and preventing contact. When the stab is extended and engaged with the bus, the shutter will reverse the operation.
Windows on the main bus are available when required.
Please contact the factory for further information.
Vertical Ground Bus and Unit Ground Stab
The vertical bus shutter for AFM design is different than the standard E9000 vertical bus shutter option. The AFM shutter and shutter guide are shown above.
(Optional) Vertical copper ground bus allows direct grounding of unit saddles to the equipment ground bus. A unit ground bus stab engages the vertical ground bus before the unit power stabs engage the vertical bus. A load ground lug is available for customer cable grounding. Termination points are located at the rear of the bucket, next to starter.
A2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
Stationary Stabs
Unit Features
Doors
New doors mounted on the case feature a removable hinge pin providing easy door removal and accurate alignment.
Combination starter and feeder units of plug-in construction utilize a positive guidance system. Plug-in stabs are rated 250A and 600A. The 250A stab connections shown are made with copper unit power stabs which are under double spring pressure and engage the vertical bus to provide positive contact.
Retractable Stabs
A
AFM doors have a visual stab and shutter indicator feature as well as a remote racking provision.
Extended Stabs
New oversized laser-engraved unit nameplates on 12" units and larger feature 1 to 9 lines of up to 20 characters 0.18" high or 4 lines of up to 10 characters 0.30" high. Nameplates use Microsoft ®
Windows
®
Arial font. Custom non-English characters are an option.
Retracted Stabs
AFM unit stabs are retractable while maintaining a closed-door unit. They move in a horizontal motion to engage and disengage from the bus when retracted (below) or extended (above).
Device bracket mounts 30mm for compact pilot devices and bracket swings open to allow easy access to unit components, wiring and terminal blocks. Fully insulated – does not require grounding.
The 600A stab shown uses a two-step engagement with vertical bus for low insertion/withdrawal force. Line side cables crimped directly into spring reinforced tin-plated copper stabs. No hidden line side cable in rear of units. Tapered glass polyester stab mounting base gives positive plug-in alignment with vertical bus.
A3
Disconnects
A
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
General
Unit Features
(continued)
Safety Interlocks
Lift up handle design to allow full access to fuses and
CB rating plug. Position indication ON-TRIP-OFF.
An interlock release system is provided so that – if it becomes necessary for maintenance purposes – the disconnect may be closed with the door open. A by-pass is provided to allow opening the door with the disconnect closed.
Note: Only qualified personnel familiar with the equipment should use the interlock release and by-pass features.
Horizontal handles are standard on 6" 150A and 12" 250A feeder breakers to optimize space. Optional vertical handles are available, but will increase the unit height. Horizontal handles are not available with AFM units.
AFM units utilize a mechanical stab interlock on the top of the unit to prevent inserting the unit into the enclosure while the unit stabs are extended.
Padlocks
Units can be withdrawn to a disconnected position and padlocked for maintenance
.
The vertically mounted integral handle can be locked in the OFF position. A drilling pattern is furnished, allowing the handle to be modified for locking in the ON position
with a single padlock.
This modification should only be made afterthe user determines it is desirable to lock the disconnect in the ON position. Padlock to have maximum 3/8" shackle.
A4
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
General
Unit Features
(continued)
Interchangeable Units
Unit Features
For flexibility, many units can be interchanged. This design allows quick, easy field changes when modifications are desired after installation. Front accessible quarter-turn latches provide for ease of securing and withdrawal of all plug-in units.
High density two-piece, pull-apart control terminal boards feature up to 18 points in 12” high units. External and internal unit connections are made on opposite sides, allowing the unit to be withdrawn without disconnecting control wiring. Accommodates up to (2) #12 AWG wires with ring, fork or bare terminations.
Rated 30 Amps, 600 Vac. Meets NEC Article 430.74.
A
AFM Retrofit Kit Unit Shelves
With the AFM unit, a different unit shelf is required to support the movement of the unit while it is being racked in or racked out.
When retrofitting an existing E9000 MCC, a Retrofit Kit will need to be ordered with the AFM Retrofit bucket. The Retrofit Kit will include this AFM shelf.
(Optional) Motor power terminal blocks can be supplied in Size
1 & 2 to allow disconnecting motor wires when removing a unit.
NEMA Type BT wiring.
The E9000 MCC unit is equipped with the CR305 contactor as standard configuration. The C2000 contactor is available for many configurations to obtain a compact footprint.
AFM units can be ordered to retrofit existing E9000 MCC by ordering the AFM Retrofit Kit along with the unit.
The E9000 AFM unit is equipped with the C2000 contactor as standard configuration. The CR305 contactor is available for most configurations. Please contact factory if the CR305 contactor is required in an AFM unit.
A5
A
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
IP20 and Incidental Contact Barrier Features
(Optional)
IP20 rated fuses are available.
Please contact factory.
Wire and Cable
Standard control and power wire includes flame-retardant,
(VW-1) moisture-heat-and oil-resistant thermoplastic insulation rated 600 volts, with stranded copper conductors, types MTW and THW.
Standard colors
① are:
Red – AC Control
Blue – DC Control
Black – AC/DC Power and CPT primary
Green – Ground
White – Neutral
Optional wiring available includes SIS heat-resistant synthetic rubber-covered switchboard wire and XHHW flame-retardant cross-linked synthetic polymer, both rated 600 volts with stranded copper conductors, and a VW-1 flame rating (no PVC).
① Note: Not all colors are available with optional wiring.
(Optional)
CR104P Lights and Push butons are available with optional IP20 accessory.
Please contact factory.
Nameplates
Unit service designation nameplates are furnished when specified. Nameplates can be supplied as blanks suitable for field engraving, or engraved at the factory.
The standard unit service designation nameplate is of
2-ply thermoplastic material, black face with white core,
2 5/32" x 3 1/2", or 1" x 3" depending on the unit configuration, fastened with non-corrosive nylon clips. Stainless steel screws are available as an option.
Nameplates are engraved with white letters on a black background.
(Optional)
C2000 Contactor is available with optional IP20 accessory.
Please contact factory.
(Optional) Clear Lexan incidental contact barriers are available for CR305 contactor.
A6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
NEMA Class of Diagrams and Wiring
Motor control centers are classified by NEMA as follows:
NEMA Class I Definition
①
Class I motor control centers consist essentially of a mechanical grouping of combination motor control units, feeder tap units and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly and connect to the horizontal and vertical common power bus to the units.
This class does not include interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices, nor does it include control system engineering. Diagrams of the individual units only are supplied.
NEMA Class II Definition
①
Class II motor control centers consist of a grouping of combination motor control units, feeder tap units and/or other units designed to form a complete control system.
They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices in addition to the connections from the horizontal and vertical common power bus to the units.
The control manufacturer shall provide a suitable diagram to illustrate operation of the control associated with the motor control center.
NEMA Class IS and IIS Definition
①
Class IS and IIS motor control centers shall be the same as
Class I and II motor control centers except custom drawings shall be provided in lieu of standard drawings.
① From NEMA Standard 18-2001.
Examples of custom drawings are:
• Special identifications for electrical devices
• Special terminal numbering designations
• Special sizes of drawings
The drawings supplied by the manufacturer shall convey the same information as drawings provided with Class I and II motor control centers, additionally modified as specified by the user.
When to Specify Class I
Specify NEMA Class I control centers for independently operated motors requiring no interlocking or other interconnection between units.
When to Specify Class II
When factory interconnections are desired to provide such functions as sequencing and other interlocking or interconnection, the control centers required are NEMA Class II.
When to Specify Class IS and IIS
When custom drawings are desired to show special device identification, special terminal numbering, or special diagram size, etc. the control centers required are Class IS or IIS.
Wiring Type
The NEMA classes are sub-divided into A, B and C depending on the type wiring furnished, with type B further having type
B-D for customer load wiring direct to the device and B-T for customer wiring to a load TB (size 1 and 2 starters).
Note: For feeders and large starters, customer must wire direct to unit device terminals.
Note: In addition to NEMA prescribed wiring types, GE offers a NEMA 1A Modified MCC.
This type of MCC will be supplied without wiring and without control diagrams. GE can mount low voltage control devices on the pilot device bracket and supply terminal boards. This would be considered on OEM product.
A
Wiring Features by NEMA Classification
Class I Class IS
Class II Class IIS
Type of Power or Control Termination Furnished A B C A B C B C B C
Pull-apart and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter–Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stationary and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter – Sizes 5, 6 and 7 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pull-apart and numbered power terminal boards on unit starter –Sizes 1 and 2.
(On Type A wiring: Same type of numbered terminals on starter itself for Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Numbered terminals on starter itself for power connection with no power terminal boards – Sizes, 5, 6 and 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stationary master terminal boards (Top, bottom or rear of section)
For control – Sizes 1 thru 5 / For power – Sizes 1 thru 3 (E9000 Sizes 1 and 2 only) No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Unit terminal boards for feeder tap units and distribution panels No No No No No No No No No No
Starter-unit-mounted pilot devices internally wired to starter – Sizes 1 thru 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Terminal board points for remote devices (Excluding extra tie points) No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Master terminal-board wiring connections No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Factory-wired interconnections between units in the same motor control center No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Type of Drawings Furnished
Outline and summary sheet (Schedule of units) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points (Terminal boards not furnished on Type A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points and interconnections to other units and/or to the first level of remote devices No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Schedule of wires to master terminal blocks No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Custom drawings as specified by user No No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
A computerized manufacturing process necessitates that the E9000 Line motor control center standard unit numbering system be followed to identify the section and location of each unit. This is explained in detail in application data (Section J). It greatly simplifies wire tracing of interconnection wires, and is beneficial to the application of programmable control. The Outline and Summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross references the unit numbers and customer unit designations when specified.
A7
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
A
Codes and Standards
Motor control centers are manufactured to NEMA standard ICS 18 and are eligible to receive the Underwriters Laboratories listing mark under standard UL 845. Vertical sections and units which have been listed with UL will bear the UL/cUL listing mark (see right for examples). Since vertical sections and units are listed independently, it is possible to have combinations of listed and non-listed sections and units within the same control center. Sections and units which will be shipped with the UL listing mark are identified in the appropriate sections of this publication.
Section Label
The National Electrical Code (NEC) covers installation of electric conductors and equipment for installations identified in the NEC
Article 90. The NEC is not intended as a design specification and acceptance of an installed motor control center by a local code authority relies on factors independent of the equipment as shipped from the factory. In general, equipment which bears the
UL listing mark can be installed to meet the NEC. Compliance to
NEC is the responsibility of the installer. Where 100 percent UL listed equipment is mandatory or there are other special code requirements refer to the factory for verification.
The NEC defines several types of control circuits and the over-current protection required for each type. The following paragraphs provide a general reference to the NEC Article applicable for the more common control circuits.
UL #E33752, Vol. 1, Sec. 5.
NEC Articles 430.72(a) and (b) cover motor control circuits tapped from the load side of a motor branch-circuit short-circuit protective device (unit disconnect). Control circuit conductors from such a tapped control circuit shall be protected in accordance with NEC
Table 430.72(b), which lists the maximum fuse or circuit breaker rating vs. conductor size.
Seismic Label
Motor control circuits other than such tapped control circuits (common control transformers or external power source) shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with Section 725.12 or 725.35, as applicable. This section of NEC also indicates the type power source and field wiring conductor sizes.
Where a motor control circuit transformer is provided, the transformer should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 430.72(c).
Transformers other than motor control circuit transformers should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 450.3(b).
A8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
Short Circuit Considerations
All ratings in this publication are RMS symmetrical amperes
Short-Circuit Current Ratings
The NEMA Motor Control Center Standard ICS 18-2001 defines the short-circuit rating of a motor control center as follows:
“The motor control center short-circuit rating shall be the maximum available rms symmetrical current in amperes permissible at its line terminals. It shall be computed as the sum of the short-circuit current contributions of the motors connected to the motor control center and the maximum available current, including all other short-circuit current contributions of the supply system at the point of connection to the motor control center.”
Motor Control Center Bus
control center and sized per NEC A or 240 for horizontal bus protection. Wherever located, it must have an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available short-circuit current at the point of its connection to the system. If located at the control center, this value would be the system available short-circuit current, I s
(Fig. 1).
A motor control center should be protected for all types of faults from low-level arcing ground faults to bolted threephase faults which can develop the full available short-circuit current. Line-to-line and line-to-ground arcing faults (often produced by contaminated atmospheres, foreign materials, etc.) can be appreciably lower in magnitude than the available short-circuit current and must be assumed not to be selfextinguishing. Even low-level arching faults are capable of releasing tremendous energy at the point of fault and can be highly destructive.
A Spectra (molded case switch) or a non-automatic insulated case circuit breaker must be properly coordinated with up stream protective devices.
Fig. 1
Figure 1 illustrates simply the basis of determining the available short-circuit current. The individual short-circuit current ratings of the main bus extensions, combination-controller units and feeder-tap units must equal or exceed available short-circuit current.
For full protection against all levels of arcing faults on grounded systems, a ground-fault relay is recommended.
The ground-fault system is a protective means that responds to phase-to-ground current, but is not affected by phase-tophase current. It is used to protect motor control centers from extensive damage, which can be caused by phase-toground arcing faults.
I s is the short-circuit current available from the system at the point where the motor control center is connected. I m is the short-circuit current contribution of the motors connected to the motor control center. If exact information is lacking, the motor contribution can be estimated at four times (4X) the continuous-current rating of the main horizontal bus. I sc is the available short-circuit current to be used as the basis for selection. Thus: I sc
= I s
+ I m
.
High available short-circuit currents of modern distribution systems require special consideration so that equipment may be operated within its rating. The cost and operational acceptability of the following should be carefully considered:
1. Use load-center distribution systems with smaller transformers which limit the available short-circuit current.
2. Use a current-limiting busway, reactors or higher-impedance transformers to reduce the available short-circuit current.
3. Use current-limiting fuses, current-limiting breakers, or breakers with limiters, in all combination starters and feeders in the control centers.
Main Protective Devices
A motor control center requires adequate overcurrent and short-circuit protection. This is the function of the main protective device. It may be located in or remote from the
Fuses are single-pole interrupters. An arcing fault may not necessarily be cleared by a single-pole interruption, as the fault can be back-fed from the other energized phases. This reduces the fault current, increasing the blowing time of the energized fuses. Because of this delay, severe equipment damage may occur. Single-phasing is eliminated with fastacting three-pole fused interrupter switches which open when a single fuse blows.
An electrically operated HPC switch with single-phase detector will meet the three-phase disconnection (single-phase protection) recommendations for a main protective device.
When switches without a three-phase trip are used, an ITI
BGFL ground-fault protection scheme is particularly recommended since damaging arcing faults almost always involve ground. It should operate the trip device on the closest line-side three-phase disconnect.
Main Horizontal Bus and Vertical Bus Extensions
The standard bus short-circuit withstand rating is 65 kAIC symmetrical amperes. Also available as an option is 100kAIC.
The bus rating must equal or exceed the available shortcircuit current. Refer to Structure (Section B) for ratings.
A
A9
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
General
A
Combination Motor Control Units
The short-circuit rating of a combination controller is based on tests with rated short-circuit current available at the line terminal of the control center and at rated voltage. The short-circuit rating must equal or exceed the available short-circuit current. Refer to Starters (Section D) for ratings.
Feeder Tap Units
All feeder tap units must have a short-circuit rating which equals or exceeds the available short-circuit current. Refer to Feeders (Section C) for ratings.
Fuse Classification
UL classifications are the most definitive method of determining fuse characteristics, and are used in this publication. Use UL fuse “Class” when specifying type of fuse.
UL classifications used in motor control centers are:
A. Class R – current-limiting type fuses with reject mounting features. Class R fuses are sub-divided into Classes RK-1 and
RK-5, depending on maximum peak let-through currents.
RK fuses are rated 600 amperes maximum and 250 volts or 600 volts.
B. Class J-TD – are more current limiting than RKs and due to their unique dimensions have an inherent rejection feature.
Ratings are 600 amperes maximum, 600 volts. (Time delay
Class J-TD fuse may limit component damage under fault.)
C. Class L – are current limiting and due to their unique mounting dimensions have an inherent rejection feature.
Ratings are 601 amperes minimum, 600 volts.
Fuses marked with “Time-Delay,” “Dual-Element” or similar designations are time-delay type fuses and will generally carry 500 percent rated amperes for 10 seconds, thus allowing a smaller rated fuse to be used in most starter applications.
Fuses that are mechanically interchangeable may not be electrically equivalent. Refer to the fuse manufacturer for interrupting rating and current-limiting characteristics.
Fuse Classifications
Characteristic
➀
Ampere Range
Voltage Ratings
UL Standard
Class J-TD Class R
0-600
600
0-600
250
600
Class L
601-6000
600
Interrupting
Rating RMS
Symmetrical Amperes
Current-Limiting
Rejection Type
200K
Yes
Yes
200K
Yes
Yes
200K
Yes
Yes
① Check fuse manufacturers for specific fuse characteristics
Environmental Considerations
The standard E9000 motor control center is designed for operation in a clean, indoor environment having a 40°C maximum ambient temperature.
The nominal minimum temperature for storage is -40°C and for operation, -20°C. Motor control center space heaters are recommended whenever temperature conditions below 0°C will exist. Where extreme cold temperatures are to be encountered for long periods of time. It is recommended that the motor control center be installed in heated rooms or enclosures.
For ambient temperatures above 40°C, special consideration must be given to the need for ventilation, ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays, special wire insulation and oversized control transformers. Ambient compensated overloads provide essentially constant trip setting as the control ambient varies.
For indoor environments subject to falling liquids, NEMA 2 dripproof enclosures are recommended. If water spray and splashing are to be encountered, NEMA 2 construction should also be used. Space heaters may be desirable to prevent condensation on internal parts.
For outdoor installations, NEMA 3R non-walk-in weatherproof enclosures are required. Thermostatically controlled space heaters and ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays should be considered for these applications. Provisions for heating and cooling the entire outdoor enclosure are also available. Standard NEMA 3R construction is suitable for wind velocities up to 75 mph. Beyond this, up to 130 mph, specially reinforced enclosures are available through
Strategic Equipment Packaging Services. This special design is also necessary if the NEMA 3R enclosure has to withstand seismic conditions, including seismic Zone 4 applications.
E9000 motor control center is available for earthquake conditions.
It is IBC rated. Please see DET-463.
For dusty atmospheres, see Section B.
The altitude limit for the standard electro-mechanical motor control center design is 6000 feet. Applications above this should be referred to the Company for recommendations.
Some solid-state components are only rated to 3300 feet and may reduce the altitude limit of the motor control center.
Fungus-proofing of organic materials is inherent. Keeping equipment dry and above the dew-point is the best way of avoiding fungus-growth, and the use of space heaters is recommended for this purpose. Heaters should be energized if the motor control center is to be stored for any length of time. Where export crating is involved, provisions must be made on the outside of the crate for access to space heaters.
A10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Enclosure Types
GE motor control centers are made up of standardized vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal bus, wiring channels and compartmented control units. Sections may be bolted together to form a single panel assembly powered by line connection at a single point. Normal shipping split is three sections maximum.
NEMA Type 1 – Gasketed – Semi Dust-tight, Indoor
Intended to cushion doors and mitigate vibration. Standard finish is light-gray ANSI 61 over a phosphate rust inhibitor.
All unpainted parts are zinc-chromate electroplated or galvanized. Enclosures are furnished with bolt-on rear covers.
Hinged rear doors are available as an option. Pan-type doors utilize quarter-turn fasteners. Gasketed doors, cover plates, and operating handles are available as an option.
Two heavy-duty 3" by 1-1/2", 12-gauge floor sills and 1/4" structural lifting lugs are included. Open bottom is standard.
NEMA Type 2 – Drip-proof, Indoor
Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against falling noncorrosive liquids and falling dirt. Dripshields on top of the motor control center and neoprene closed-cell gasketing afford protection from falling and splashing liquids.
They are not water-tight. Similar to NEMA 12 gasketed construction except with catch pan-type dripshield on top and with open bottom. Dripshield extends four inches beyond front of motor control center. Standard finish: light gray ANSI
61. Furnished with removable conduit cover plates unless otherwise specified.
NEMA Type 3R – Rain-proof, Outdoor
Intended for use outdoors to protect the enclosed equipment against rain. They are not dust-proof, snow-proof nor sleet proof (ice-proof).
Type 12 – Industrial Use – Dust-tight and Drip-tight, Indoor
Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt, light splashing, seepage, dripping and external condensation of noncorrosive liquids.
1HG
Similar to NEMA 1 gasketed construction except that bottom plates are furnished and all removable plates are gasketed.
B
B1
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Front Elevation & Mounting Locations (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)
B2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 13" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus
B
Side Elevations 20" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus
B3
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1200A Main Bus
Side Elevations 22" Deep Section 1600A to 2500A Main Bus
B4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Side Elevations 25" Deep Back-to-Back Section 1600A to 2500A Main Bus
B
Top Conduit Entry (13", 20", 22" & 25" Deep Sections)
B5
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Bottom Conduit Entry 13" Deep Section
Bottom Conduit Entry 20" Deep Section
B6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Bottom Conduit Entry 22" Deep Section
B
Bottom Conduit Entry 25" Deep Section
B7
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Elevation and Mounting 30" Deep Section 600A to 1200A Main Bus
Top Conduit Entry 30" Deep Section
B8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Bottom Conduit Entry 30" Deep Section
Details for Auto Transformer
B
B9
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Drip Pan — Nema II 13" Deep Section
Drip Pan — Nema II 20", 22", 30" Deep Sections
Drip Pan — Nema II 25" Deep Section Back-to-Back
B10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Type C Master Terminal
B
Used for L and U Shaped Motor Control Center
Arrangements
Back-to-back Configuration with Wrap-Around
Corner Section
The wrap-around corner section is standard sections which accommodate plug-in units, therefore no space is lost in the transition.
B11
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
Incoming Line Terminations
B12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Indoor Enclosures
B
B13
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Outdoor Enclosures
UL Listed Type 3R Non-Walk-In Enclosure (Standard)
The standard NEMA 3R enclosure consists of a specially constructed MCC section with a mating framework which supports the roof and extended front. The basic design is similar to switchboard construction. The smaller footprint will permit a broader usage than the optional NEMA 3R construction. Meets Seismic Zone 4.
• Three-point door latch
• 90° door with wind stop
• Reinforced roof
• Crane lifting
• 2° roof pitch
• Shipped via flatbed truck
• 3" floor sills
B14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Enclosure Options
Space Heaters
Space heaters are used to prevent moisture condensation on the inside of the motor control center. One heater (62.5 watts at 120 volts AC) is installed in the bottom of each vertical section. UL requires space heaters be controlled by a thermostat. One thermostat can control up to 23 heaters and is located in the top horizontal wireway.
Extra Width Vertical Wireway
24" wide sections can be furnished with 8" wide vertical wireway and door.
A terminal board for connecting an external 120-volt power source is standard. The terminal board is located in the top horizontal wireway adjacent to the thermostat(s). This is recommended since it permits the space heaters to be energized even when the motor control center itself is deenergized. If export crating is involved, the space heater circuit can be wired to an external plug for energizing the heaters during shipment and storage.
When specified, space heater power can be provided from within the motor control center. Include the required distribution transformer with primary and secondary protection in the motor control center.
An enclosed foreign voltage disconnect switch is available as an option.
Bottom Plates
Plates bolt on to the bottom of each motor control center section. They may be removed to facilitate installing conduit.
Extended Height Pull Box (Top Hat)
A pull box can be mounted on top of a vertical section when specified. The standard height is 12 inches; 6-, 18-, and 24" heights are also available. Top, front, and end covers are removable for access.
Special transitions to 8000 line and low-voltage switchboards are available upon request. Please consult factory.
Rodent Barriers
Metal plates bolted to the bottom of each end section to close the opening between the front and rear floor sills. Not required if the floor sills will be removed or imbedded in concrete.
Motor Control Center Construction
Major Structural Components Side Sheets,
L-H & R-H 0.075"
Vertical Bus Mounting Channels 0.090"
Case Sills, Front/Rear, Top/Bottom (13 Gauge)
Top Horizontal Channel
Lifting Channel (Top) 0.187"
Channel Sills, Front/Rear 0.105" (12 Gauge)
Enclosing Covers/Panels
Rear Covers, 13" & 30" Deep 0.075" (14 Gauge)
Rear Covers, 20" & 22" Deep 0.060" (16 Gauge)
Endplates 0.060" (16 Gauge)
Top Conduit Covers 0.060"
Bottomplates 0.060"
Vertical Wiretrough Door 0.060"
Other Steel
Unit Barrier Shelves 0.063"
Unit Cover Doors 0.075"
Unit Saddles 0.090"
B
B15
B
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Enclosure Options
Center of Gravity
20"
Note that bolt down locations for sections with seismic bracing change from center of structure (left to right), to four corners with .635 clearance holes for 1/2" bolts.
91.5"
Mounting Requirements for Seismic NEMA 3R with
Optional Heavy Base
Y
Z
X
ARC
WELD
NEMA 3R
END VIEW
ARC WELD ALL FOUR
CORNERS (3/16" BEAD)
FRONT VIEW
NEMA 3R
FRONT VIEW
6" MIN.
WELD
40" OR LESS
10" MIN.
WELD
6" CHANNEL
ANCHORED
10" MIN.
WELD
MIN. 8" H BEAM
ANCHORED FRONT
AND REAR
CEMENT PAD
ARC WELD DOWN LENGTH OF NEMA 3R EVERY 40" OR LESS
FOR 130MPH WINDS AND 2.25G SHOCK (LENGTH & DEPTH PER OUTLINE)
Note:
Seismic Zone 4 testing was performed using 1/2"-13 Grade 5 bolts, torqued to
70 foot-pounds, located in each of the four corners in each section.
For a uniformly loaded 90" high x 20" deep lineup, center of gravity is:
X = center of lineup
Y = 46 1/2" above bottom of floor sill
Z = 8" in from front (front-mounted devices 20" deep)
OR: 10" in from front (back-to-back construction)
Z = 5" in from front (13" deep)
Z = 8 1/2" in from front (22" deep)
Z = 11" in from front (25" NEMA 3R)
Typical variations due to uneven loads:
X = ± 5"
Y = ± 1"
Z = ± .5"
Estimated shipping weights per section
Sections
90"H x 20"W Indoor Type 1 & 12
90"H x 20"W Indoor Back-to-Back Type 1 & 13
90"H x 20"W Outdoor Type 3R
Lbs
500
700
725
Kg
272
318
329
B16
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Structure
Bus Selection
All continuous-current rating selections or recommendations are based on the motor control center being located in a maximum 40° C (104°F) ambient. Refer to General (Section A) for other environmental considerations.
Vertical Bus Extensions
Vertical bus is available in 30" wide enclosures maximum.
The maximum vertical bus loading is calculated as follows:
80 percent of the feeder trip or fuse clip rating, plus 100 percent of the starter full load amps, plus 25 percent of the largest motor full load amps. This total cannot exceed the vertical bus rating. Tin plated copper vertical bus is standard, with silver plating as an option.
Main Horizontal Bus
The size of motor control center main bus and cables feeding the main bus is based on the current-carrying capacity required for motors plus other connected loads.
Neutral Bus
Neutral lugs will be provided as applicable. Neutral bus is normally sized at 50 percent of the main bus ampacity.
The capacity required for motors can be taken as 125 percent of the full-load rating of the largest motor plus 100 percent of the full-load rating of all other motors to be operated at the same time. Modified requirements resulting from duty-cycle or demand factor can be taken into account.
The current-carrying capacity required for other connected loads should be computed on the basis of 100 percent of the sum of individual loads except where a demand factor can properly be applied to reduce this total. Consideration should be given to future requirements.
Ground Bus
NEC requires a ground bus in multisection motor control centers. 300 ampere Cu ground bus will meet minimum size requirements for main busses rated through 2000 amperes.
A clearance hole for 3/8" hardware is provided in each section.
The default for incoming ground termination is (3) #2-1/0 for
300A ground bus and (3) 1/0-500 kcmil for 600A ground bus.
Ground bar comes with 6 predrilled holes for ground connectors.
Options
The following UL listed options are available:
• Shutter mechanism for vertical bus stab openings.
• Fully-insulated main horizontal bus.
• Silver plated horizontal and vertical bus.
• Silver plated ground bus.
B
Bus Systems/Selection
➅
MCC Bus
Main Horizontal
Vertical
Neutral
Horizontal Ground
Vertical Grounds
Continuous Current
➄
Rating Amperes
600
800
1200
1600
➀
2000
➀
2500
➀➂
300
➁
600/850
➃
300
600
800
1200
1250
300
600
150
Material
Cu
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Short-Circuit Rating in RMS
Symmetrical Amperes–(kA)
65 100
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
1/4" x 2" Bus
3/8" x 2" Bus
1/2" x 2" Bus
(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
(2) 1/2" x 2" Bus
3/8" x 3/4"
3/8" x 1 1/2"
All values shown based on 1200A/sq.in. density rating. Alternate density ratings are available; if required, consult factory.
➀ Requires a 22" deep section.
➁ Will not except 600A stabs.
➂ Provided with fans.
➃ 1200A horizontal or higher.
➄ Bus ratings based on UL Temperature Rise testing.
➅ When greater than 1000A, a main breaker with service entrance must have a ground fault.
1/4" x 1"
1/4" X 2"
1/8" x 1"
B17
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Mains
General
Main units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Sizes by ampere rating, short-circuit rating, type construction and space units required are given in the accompanying lists.
Normally, thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fuses are necessary for main protection. The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a main unit for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.
For reverse-fed circuit breakers, refer to factory for details.
Refer to specific breaker publications for time-current characteristics and programmable options for the various types of circuit breakers. A list of these publications is given in Application Data (Section J).
Service Entrance
UL listed main units containing only circuit breakers or fused switches may be UL classified as suitable for service entrance.
If a single disconnect is furnished as a disconnect for all load circuits the unit will be marked “Main”.
UL Listed Fused Switch Mains
Interrupting Rating
RMS Amps (In thousands)➀
Amperes
Volts
240 480 600
Fusible Switches
200
400 MCS
100
100
100
100
100
100
600 MCS 100 100 100
High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switch
800 100 100 100
1200
1600
100
100
100
100
100
100
Construction
Stab-In
X
Bolt-In
X
X
X
X
X
Space
Units
2
4
4
6
6
6
Notes
➃
➃
➁
➁
➂
➂
2500 100 100 100 X 6
➀ With Class J, R and L fuses.
➁ Requires a 24" wide by 20” deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
➂ Requires 30" wide by 30" deep section. Must be NEMA 1 Construction, 80% rated only.
➃ Class J fuse is 3X.
In order for the units to be classified as suitable for service entrance, the incoming phase conductors must connect directly to the disconnect device line terminals or to a UL listed main line terminal assembly.
A grounding electrode conductor terminal connector sized in accordance with the circuit ampacity is furnished in one section. Three-phase, four-wire systems include a neutral bonding jumper for grounding the neutral conductor during installation. Ground fault protection is required for disconnects
1000A and above for solidly grounded wye services, where phase-to-ground is more than 150 volts (NEC 230.95).
Main Metering/Lugs
Current transformers (CTs) can be provided in the main compartment for use with a metering unit. This option may increase space requirement.
If crimp type lugs are required, a bus assembly is fabricated to provide a landing pad for these terminals. This extends the space required for the main and must be factory installed.
Size will be the same as NEMA lug option.
C
C1
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
C
Mains
Circuit Breaker Mains – Standard Selection
1200
1600
2000
2500
800
1600
2000
Amperes CB Type
240V
IC (kA)
480V 600V
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
150
250
600
1200
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL/SGP
SKL
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
25/25
25/25
65/65
42
Power Break II* Insulated-Case with EntelliGuard TU Trip Unit
800 SSF/SHF 65 65 42
Stab-In
X
X
X
SSF/SHF
SSF/SHF
SSF/SHF
SSF/SHF
SSD
SSD
SSD
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
65
65
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
65
65
42
42/65
42/65
42/65
42
42
42
X
X
X
Bolt-In
X
X
X
X
X
X
Space
Units
1
1 ⁄ 1
2
2
3.5
6 (24W)
6 (24W)
6 (30W)
6 (30W)
6 (36W)
6 (30W)
6 (30W)
6 (30W)
UL (X)
Listed
X
X
X
X
—
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
Notes
➀➃
➁
➁
➂
➂➄
➂➄
➄➅➆
➂➄➅➆
➂➄➅➆
Entry
Top/Bot
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
➀ When a size 6 or 7 starter is in the motor control center lineup, use a 1200 ampere microEntelliguard Trip Unit circuit breaker as a main.
➁ Requires special section 90" high, 24" wide, 20" deep.
➂ Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep.
➃ Main breaker must be mounted at top of the section and requires full 20" depth of enclosure.
➄ Requires special section 90" high, 30" wide, 30" deep. When section is on the left, allow for a 5" spacer to permit unit doors on the right to open.
➅ For UL or service entrance labels provide main breaker in switchboard construction.
➆ Consult factory for availability.
Data subject to change without notice
Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment per NEC
Each main or feeder disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more and installed on a solidly grounded wye electrical system of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, will be provided with ground-fault protection of equipment.
Exception No 1: The above is not required if the disconnect is for a continuous industrial process where a non-orderly shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards.
Exception No 2: The above is not required for fire pumps.
Exception No 3: The above is not required if ground-fault protection is provided ahead of the equipment.
Note: The above is paraphrased from NEC section 215.10, 215.95 and 240.13.
C2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and
Feeder Units
The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence. The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor. The 300-Line Legacy NEMA contactor is remain available with this new design. Other IP20 protection options are available in all starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.
For more information see page D2 and GE Publication DEA-593.
AFM Circuit Breaker Mains — Standard Selection
Circuit
Amperes
Breaker
(Up To)
Type
Interrupting Rating
RMS Amps (In thousands)
480
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
150 SEL/SEP 100
Volts
600
65
150
250
600
SELT-L/SEPT-L
SFL/SFP
SGL/SGP
—
100
100
65
65
65
Construction
Retractable
Stab-In Bolt-In
X
X
X
X
Space
Units
1
1
1.5
2
C
C3
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
C
Feeders
Feeder units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are required unless the feeder supplies a critical circuit, such as a fire pump controller.
Select the fuse or circuit breaker trip rating based on the feeder circuit continuous current rating in accordance with the NEC. Feeder unit short-circuit interruption ratings must equal or exceed the available short-circuit currents.
Fused Switch Feeders
Interrupting Rating
RMS Amps (In thousands)➀
Amperes
Volts
Construction
Stab- In Bolt- In
240 480 600
Fusible Switches
30
30/30
60
60/60
100
100/30
100/60
100/100
200
600 MCS
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
400 MCS 100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switch
800
1200
100
100
100
100
100
100
1600➃
100 100 100
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Space
Units
➀
6
6
6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
UL (X)
Listed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
➀ Top/bottom entry.
➁ Dual or twin feeder units.
➂ Requires a 24" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
➃ Requires a 30" wide by 20" deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required.
Notes
➁
➁
➂
➂
➂
AFM Fused Switch Feeders – Standard Selection
Interrupting
Amperes Rating
(In thousands)
Construction
Retractable
Stab-In
Space
Units
Fusible Switches
30 100
60
100
200
100
100
100
X
X
X
X
1
2
1
1
C4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Feeders
Circuit Breaker Feeders – Standard Selection
Amperes
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
240V
IC (in thousands)
480V 600V
100
100/100
150
150/150
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
25/25
25/25
25/25
25/25
250
250/250
600
1200
SFL/SFP
SFL/SFP
SGL/SGP
SKL
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65
25/25
25/25
65/65
42
Stab-In
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bolt-In
Space
Units
1
2
2
3.5
1/2
1
1/2
1 1/2
UL (X)
Listed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
➁
➁
Entry
Top/Bot
T/B
T/B
T/B
T
T/B
T/B
T/B
T/B
X
➂➃
➀ When feeder unit accessories are required such as shunt trip, Aux switch, UV release, etc., unit height must be a minimum of 1 space.
➁ 1X units are available with horizontal handle.
➂ Requires full depth of enclosure; (20" deep minimum).
➃ Feeder units 1000A and over should have ground fault sensing on three-phase, four-wire systems where line to ground voltage is more than 150V.
AFM Circuit Breaker Feeders – Standard Selection
Amperes
Circuit
Breaker
(Up To)
Type
Spectra Thermal Magnetic
150 SEL/SEP
150
250
600
SELT-L/SEPT-L
SFL/SFP
SGL/SGP
Interrupting Rating
RMS Amps (In thousands)
Volts
480 600
100
—
100
100
25/65
65
65
65
Construction
Retractable
Stab-In
X
X
X
X
Space
Units
1
1
1.5
2
Accessories
Accessories for Mains and Feeders
Circuit Breaker
Spectra
Power Break II
HPC
Bell Alarm
X
X➀
X
Auxiliary Switch
Up to 2➃
Up to 12➀
Up to 12➀
Accessories
Shunt Trip
X➂
X
X
Undervoltage Release
➀ 600VAC not UL Listed.
➁ G and K Frame only.
➂ Shunt trip requires aux switch (G&K) or bell alarm (E&F) for continuous operation.
➃ Aux switch available @ 240V max only.
X
X
X
RELT
X➁
X
X
C
C5
C
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Options for Mains and Feeders
Terminals for Field Wiring Mains and Feeders
Terminal Size
Will Accept Wire➁
AWG/kcmil➀
Material
Switches
30A QMW
60A QMW
100A QMW
200A QMW
400A MCS (Molded Case Switch)
600A MCS (Molded Case Switch)
14-8
14-2
12-2
14-1/0
12-1/0
(1) 6-250
(1) 2-350➂
(1) 8-600
(1) 8-600
(1) 4-500➂
(2) 6-500
300-750
300-800
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu
Al
Cu-Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
Cu-Al
HPC Switch
— 800-1600A
Circuit Breakers
SE150 15-150A
SF250 70-225A
SG600
125-600A
SK1200
300-1200A
1 lug
1 lug
1 lug
2 lugs
3 lugs (800A)
3 lugs
4 lugs
12-3/0
8-350
6-600
2/0-500
3/0-500
300-750
250-400
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
Cu-Al
➀ Conductor #1 and smaller may be noted 60/75°C. Conductors #0 and larger
must be rated 75°C.
➁ Conductor sizes based on 1/Ph unless otherwise indicated.
➂ Feeders.
Key Interlocking
Provisions for key interlocking can be provided on all circuit breakers over 250A and fusible switches over 100A. The standard key lock is by Superior Lock Corporation. However, coordination with Kirk key locking will be supplied if necessary.
The following information is required when lock coordination is to be provided with other up-stream or down-stream devices remote from the motor control center:
PURCHASED BY ________________________________
ULTIMATE USER ________________________________
DESTINATION __________________________________
LOCK MANUFACTURER __________________________
LOCK NUMBER _________________________________
PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER ______________________
Note: Minimum 24" high units are required for key interlocking. UL listed option.
Ground Fault Protection
Two types of UL listed ground fault protection can be provided as an option with feeder and main circuit breakers. A shunt trip device is required in the circuit breaker to trip the breaker if a ground fault should occur. ITI BGFL ground break protective relaying is recommended for main breaker application. Model #252 ground fault relaying is recommended for most feeder applications. See Components (Section H) for description of both ground fault relay types. A minimum of
12" additional space height is required in addition to the standard space height shown for each main feeder unit.
A separate 120-volt source for the shunt trip circuit will decrease the additional space required.
Refer to page J19 for application help.
Accessories for Fused Switches
Fused switches can be ordered with up to two auxiliary contacts which are available in the following UL listed configurations: 1 normally open, 1 normally closed,
1 normally open/1 normally closed, or 2 normally open.
Accessories for High Pressure Contact (HPC) Switches
• Motor Operator Mechanism
• Remote Close
• Undervoltage Release
• Shunt Trip with Lockout
• Bell Alarm–Alarm Only
• Bell Alarm with Lockout
• Auxiliary Switch Module
• Mechanical Counter
• Key Interlock Mounting Provision
• Push Button Cover
• Door Interlock
• Blown Fuse Protector
C6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
Incoming Line Terminations
The following cable terminal compartments are commonly specified for use in motor control center construction where the main AC power disconnect is located upstream of the motor control center.
For other custom cable termination arrangements refer to a
GE sales representative. The number of cables indicated must not be exceeded to maintain the short-circuit rating.
Incoming Line Cable
Assemblies
600A Std. Lug➃➄
600A NEMA Lug➁
800A/1200A
GE Std. Lug➀➃
800A/1200A NEMA
Lug
1600A NEMA Lug
2000A NEMA Lug➁➃
2500A NEMA Lug➁➃
MLO Space in inches /
Vertical Space Available Cables/lug➂ Cables/phase
Top Bottom
24/60
30/54
-
36/58
72/0
72/0
72/0
18/66
18/66
-
-
-
18/66
-
24/60
-
-
24/54
24/54
30/48
-
30/48
24/54
24/54
24/54
30/48➅
36/42
72/0
72/0
72/0
2
3
2
3
1
1
1
4
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
8
8
10
4
4
3
4
2
4
2
2
2
3
2
3
Cable Range Per
NEMA Bending➆
#2-350 kcmil
#6-300 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
#2-500 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
#2-350 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
#2-500 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
500-750kcmil
500-1000kcmil
500-1000kcmil
500-1000kcmil
500-1000kcmil
Minimum
Width &
Depth
Top Feed
Conduit Space
(Fig.1)
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
20"x13"
24"x13"
24"x13"
30"x30"
30"x30"
36"x30"
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
5"x13.7" A-B
13"x17.7" A-C
13"x27.6" A-C
13"x27.6" A-C
➀ Space shown above is for 20" deep design 800A to 1200A MLO.
➁ Burndy type YA crimp lugs is available as an option. Crimp Lugs require NEMA drilling and NEMA Lug spacing.
➂ Mechanical compression Cu/Al Lugs furnished for 75°C cable.
➃ Cu/Al standard. Copper only lugs are available as an option. These may affect number of cables per lug.
➄ NEMA wire bending rules reduce cable size if entry is from the side.
➅ 13" deep requires full section no vertical bus.
➆ Lug cable range may be larger than the NEMA bending allows above.
Fig. 1
A
B
C
Busway Entrances
GE motor control centers include provisions for connecting
GE busway. Busway must be braced for maximum available short circuit current. Minimum enclosure sizes for busway are shown in the adjacent table. Refer to the factory for other type busway. Include busway requisition number when ordering motor control center.
Spectra Series Busway
Entry
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Pull Box
12"
–
12"
–
12"
–
Enclosure Size
30"W x 22"D
30"W x 22"D
30"W x 22"D
30"W x 22"D
36"W x 22"D
36"W x 22"D
Std
1600
1600
2000
2000
2500
2500
Max. Busway Ampacity
Cu
1000A/IN 2 Std
Al
750A/IN 2
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
1350
1350
2000
2000
2500
2500
1000
1000
2000
2000
2500
2500
Note: Bus bars must be phased front-to-rear in 24" width enclosure. Bottom entry requires full section. For busway, refer to factory.
C7
C
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines
C
Automatic Transfer Switches
GE motor control centers may be furnished with GE Zenith transfer switches. The switch is mounted in a separate unit and cable-connected to the motor control center bus.
Manual control, pushbuttons, pilot lights and switches may be door-or bracket-mounted within the unit. Up-stream overcurrent protection must be provided for each power source. The unit can be UL listed if all components are listed for use in motor control center equipment.
The following features apply to ZTSD open-type switches which are UL listed through 480 volts and CSA listed through
600VAC. For specific ratings and additional optional features refer to GE Zenith.
GE Zenith ZTSD Utility to Generator time delay MX 250
Module Standard Features:
6P Microprocessor activated test switch (momentary)
A3 Aux Contact - closed in emergency (Source 2)
Additional available up to 10, must be specified
A4 Aux Contact - closed in normal (Source 1)
Additional available up to 10, must be specified
CDT Exerciser no load timer
DS Disconnect Switch for source voltage to transfer power panel, 600A to 1200A only
DT Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to
Source 1 on retransfer
DW Time Delay from Neutral Switch position to
Source 2 on retransfer
E Engine Start Relay
EL/P Event Log of last 16 events
K/P Frequency Indication on the controller
LNP Center-off position LCD-Indicator
L1,2,3,4 LED lights, Source 1&2 position, Source 1&2 available
P1 Engine Start Timer (adj. To 6 sec.)
R50 In Phase monitor between Normal (Source 1) and
Emergency (Source 2) to allow transfer
S13P Microprocessor activated commit/no commit on transferring to Emergency (Source 2) (with enable/ disable settings)
T Retransfer to Normal (Source1) adjustable time delay
U Engine stop / cool down timer
V1 Voltage imbalance between phases (3 phase only)
W Adjustable time delay on transfer to Emergency
(Source2)
YEN Bypass transfer timers function (soft key switch in microprocessor )
Withstand Current Ratings (WCR) for Automatic Transfer Switches
➀
Minimum MCC
Space Units➁
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
3
3
6
MCC Enclosure
Widths (In Inches)
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
30
30
30
Switch Rating
(Amps)➂
40
80
100
150
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
Available RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 480 Volts AC
When Used with Class J or L
Current-Limiting Fuses
WCR Max. Fuse Size (Amps)
When Used with Class RK-5 Fuses or
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
WCR Max. Breaker Size (Amps)
100,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
50
100
125
200
350
600
750
1200
1200
1200
22,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
150
150
150
400
400
400
800
1200
1200
1200
➀ 3-pole vs. 4-pole transfer switches: Typically, most MCCs do not have the neutral pulled, so a 3-pole switch will suffice. If the generator neutral is bonded to the frame of the generator and pulled to the MCC to provide a single-phase connection, a 4-pole transfer switch is required to facilitate transferring the neutral from the Utility to the Generator connection.
➁ Does not include space for protection; switches must be mounted at bottom of section in order to install vertical bus above switch.
➂ Larger sizes require special over-size enclosures. Refer to factory.
Transitions
Transitions for connecting control centers to GE transformers, low-voltage switchgear or switchboards are available and generally the same depth as the equipment to which they are to be connected. Appropriate overcurrent protection for the control center must be provided.
C8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
General
Combination motor control starter units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or circuit breaker, and a magnetic starter with an overload relay in the motor lines.
Unit NEMA sizes listed are based on continuous horsepower ratings. The maximum horsepower rating of each NEMA size controller is reduced for long accelerating times and for jogging or plugging duty. Jogging duty is defined as 5 or more contactor openings or closings per minute or over 10 in a 10-minute period. Plugging is rapidly stopping or reversing the motor by reversing the phase sequence of the power supplied to the motor. Refer to the factory anytime accelerating times exceed 10 seconds or jogging or plugging duty is required.
Refer to the factory when `Design E’ motors are used, not to be confused with Energy Policy Act (EPAC) motors.
The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a starter combination for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.
Basic combination motor starter units consist of:
1. Externally operable circuit disconnect.
2. Magnetic starter with a thermal-magnetic, or electronic overload relay.
3. External overload reset operator.
4. Tapped line voltage, 120-volt CPT control power or external control power.
5. Pull-apart control terminal boards through NEMA Size 5.
6. Pull-apart power terminal boards through NEMA Size 2
(when BT specified).
7. Extra CPT capacity for operating auxiliary relays and pilot devices (when specified).
8. Plug-in construction through NEMA Size 5 (FVNR) starters.
Bolt-in construction may require vertical bus modifications.
Basic starter units are provided in tables in this section.
Starters are listed by starter function, line voltage, HP, NEMA size, and combination short-circuit rating. Tables in this section also list control power options and other options including any additional space requirements for these options
Typical starter circuits are shown in (Section K). Starters can also be used for lighting or resistive heat loads (Section J).
D
D1
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
D
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM) Main and
Starter Units
E9000 AFM units are a new offering for customers and specific applications where additional protection of personnel is essential. The AFM units were designed around lowering the electrical shock hazards for motor control centers. The
AFM unit design includes optional IP20 devices and incidental contact safety barriers in an effort to prevent accidental contact with energized parts during maintenance.
Selection Tables
Circuit Breaker Type
FVNR AFM
NEMA
Size
3
4
5
1
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL/SGP
C2000
Standard
Space Units
1
1
1.5
2
–
300-Line
Standard
Space Units
1.5
1.5
2
2.5
4
The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence. The introduction of a compact NEMA contactor in these AFM units will allow a minimum of IP10 protection with optional IP20 terminal protection for starters using this contactor. The 300-Line
Legacy NEMA contactor remains available with this new design. Other IP20 protection options are available in all starter units including IP20 control power transformer fuses and pilot devices.
FVR AFM
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
4
Circuit Breaker
Type
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
C2000
Standard
Space Units
1.5
2
3
3
300-Line
Standard
Space Units
2
2.5
3.5
3.5
A safety interlock prevents customers from opening the unit door and racking out the stab when the unit is energized. The visual indicators on the front of the units provide personnel with a clear view of the status of the stab and vertical bus isolation shutter.
AFM Features:
• Two-position closed-door retractable unit stabs
• Automatic operation vertical bus isolation shutter
• Stab and Shutter position indicators on unit doors
• Padlock for racking screw and stab-breaker interlock
• Optional IP20 safety features and incidental contact barriers
• Stab and Door Interlock: prevents opening the unit door when stab is energized.
• Stab and Unit Interlock: prevents user from taking the unit out when stab is energized, or inserting the unit into the bus when stab is extended.
• Racking Screw and Disconnect Interlock: prevents the user from racking the stab in/out of the unit with the disconnect in the “ON” position.
Selection Tables
Fused Switch Type
FVNR AFM
NEMA
Size
3
3
3
4
1
2
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
100
100
200
200
30
60
60
100
200
200
FVR AFM
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
100
30
60
60
C2000
Standard
Space Units
300-Line
Standard
Space Units
1
1
2
3
3.5
3.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
4
4
C2000
Standard
Space Units
300-Line
Standard
Space Units
1.5
2
4
2
2.5
4.5
For information, please see GE publication DEA-593.
D2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Circuit Breaker Type
208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
FVNR
NEMA
Size
3
4
1
2
5
6
Max.
Hp
7.5
10
25
40
75
150
IC
(kA)
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
1
1
1.5
2
3
4
Notes
➁
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
3
4
5
1
2
Max.
Hp
10
20
40
75
–
IC
(kA)
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
–
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SEP
SGL
–
Space
Units
2
2
4.5
5
–
Y-Delta
NEMA
Size
4
5
6
2
3
Max.
Hp
20
40
60
150
300
IC
(kA)
65/100
65/100
100
100
100
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
TGL
TGL
TGL
Space
Units
4
5
5.5
5.5
5.5
FVR
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
5
6
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
75
150
7.5
10
25
40
75
150
IC
(kA)
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
3
3.5
2
2
3.5
4
5.5
8.5
Notes
➀
Notes
➂
2S1W, 2S2W
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
Constant
Variable Torque
Constant
HP
6
1
4
5
2
3
4
5
40
75
150
7.5
10
25
40
75
30
60
100
5
7.5
20
30
60
IC (kA)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
25
30
SFL
SGL
65 SGL/SKL
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SFL/SFP
100 SGL
Space
Units
Notes
4.5
5
8.5
2
2
4
4.5
5.5
➀
Rev
Space
Units
7.5
10
–
2.5
3
4.5
5.5
10
RVAT
NEMA
Size
6
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
40
75
150
10
25
40
75
100
IC
(kA)
25
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SFL
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space Units
13" Deep 20" Deep
5
–
N/A
4
5
5.5
–
N/A
4
5
12
4
4
4.5
5
12
Notes
➀
➁
➀
D
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W).
➁ A 1/2X compact starter is available.
➂ Refer to factory.
D3
D
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Circuit Breaker Type
230 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
FVNR
NEMA
Size
5
6
3
4
6
1
2
Max.
Hp
200
7.5
15
30
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
5.5
1
1
2
2.5
3
6
Notes
➃
➀
FVR
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
5
6
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
100
200
7.5
15
30
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
5.5
8.5
2
2
3
3
5.5
8.5
Notes
➀
➁
➀
➁
RVAT
NEMA
Size
2
3
5
6
4
5
Max.
Hp
100
200
15
30
50
100
IC
(kA)
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
Space Units
13" Deep 20" Deep
N/A
N/A
4
5
6
N/A
5
12
4
4
4.5
5
Notes
➁
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
2
3
4
4
5
1
5
Max.
Hp
25
50
75
–
–
10
–
IC
(kA)
–
–
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
–
Circuit
Breaker
Type
–
–
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SGL
–
Space
Units
2
4.5
5
–
–
2
–
Notes
➂
➂
Y-Delta
NEMA
Size
2
3
4
4
5
5
Max.
Hp
75
–
25
50
75
150
IC
(kA)
100
–
65/100
65/100
100
100
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
–
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SGL
SGL
Space
Units
5.5
–
4
5
5.5
5.5
Notes
➀
➂
➀
➀
➂
2S1W, 2S2W
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
Constant
Variable Torque
Constant
HP
IC (kA)
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
1
15
30
50
100
50
100
200
7.5
20
40
75
150
40
75
150
7.5
Circuit
Breaker
Type
25
30
SFL
SGL
65 SKL
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SFL/SFP
100 SGL
Space
Units
Notes
4.5
5.5
8.5
2
2
4
4.5
5.5
➁
➁
➁
Rev
Space
Units
3
4.5
7.5
10
5.5
10
–
2.5
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S2W).
➂ Refer to factory.
➃ A 1/2X compact starter is available.
D4
FVR
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Circuit Breaker Type
460 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
FVNR
NEMA
Size
5
6
1
2
5
6
3
4
Max.
Hp
200
400
10
25
50
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
3
5.5
1
1
1.5
2
3.0
5.5
Notes
➄
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
2
3
4
4
5
1
5
Max.
Hp
150
–
15
40
75
150
–
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
2
3
4
5
Max.
Hp
40
75
150
300
Max.
Hp
100
200
400
10
25
50
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
25
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SFL
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SFL/SFP
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
2
2
3
3
6
12
4
5.5
8.5
Notes
➀
➁
➀
➁
IC
(kA)
25/65
25/65
65
65
IC
(kA)
10
–
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
–
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
–
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SGL
–
Space
Units
4.5
–
2
2
4.5
5
–
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SE
SGL
SGL
SGL
Space
Units
3
3.5
4.5
5
Notes
➃
➃
Notes
➀
➀
2S1W, 2S2W
Max. Hp
NEMA
Size
Constant
Variable Torque
Constant
HP
IC (kA)
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
1
25
50
100
200
100
200
400
10
20
40
75
150
75
150
300
7.5
Circuit
Breaker
Type
25
30
SFL
TJC
65 SKL
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SEL/SEP
65/100 SFL/SFP
100 SGL
Space
Units
Notes
4.5
6
12
1.5
2
4
4.5
6
➀➁
➁
➀➁
Rev
Space
Units
3
4.5
7.5
10
5.5
10
–
2.5
RVAT
NEMA
Size
2
3
5
6
4
5
Max.
Hp
200
400
25
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
100
65
65/100
65/100
65/100
100
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SGL
SKL
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SEL/SEP
SGL
Space Units
13" Deep 20" Deep
–
N/A
4
5
6
N/A
5
12
4
4
4.5
5
Notes
➂
➁
➂
D
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep (2S1W not available).
➂ Size 5 RVAT cannot be mounted in 13" deep enclosure.
➃ Refer to factory.
➄ A 1/2X compact starter is available.
D5
D
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Circuit Breaker Type
575 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
FVNR
NEMA
Size
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
10
25
50
100
200
400
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
25
65
42
25
25
25
42
65
42
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SEL
SFL
SGL
SKL
SGL
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
2
3
6
1
1
1.5
2
3.5
6
Notes
➀
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
4
5
4
1
2
3
5
Max.
Hp
15
40
75
150
–
150
–
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
4
5
4
2
3
4
Max.
Hp
40
75
100
150
–
150
FVR
NEMA
Size
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
10
25
50
100
200
400
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
25
65
42
25
25
25
42
100
42
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SEL
SFL
SGL
SKL
SGL
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
3
5.5
8.5
2
2
3
3
5.5
8.5
Notes
➀
➁
➀
➀
IC
(kA)
25
25
25
100
–
42
IC
(kA)
10
–
42
25
25
25
–
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SEL
SGL
–
SGL
–
Space
Units
5
–
5
2
2
4.5
–
Notes
➂
➂
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SEL
SGL
–
SGL
Space
Units
5
–
5
3
3.5
4.5
Notes
➀
➀
➀
➂
➀
2S1W, 2S2W
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
Constant
Variable Torque
Constant
HP
IC (kA)
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
25
50
100
200
400
7.5
20
40
75
150
300
25
25
25
25
22
42
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SEL
SFL
SGL
SKL
Space
Units
2
2
4
5
5.5
8.5
Notes
➀➁
➁
Rev
Space
Units
2.5
3
4.5
7.5
10
–
RVAT
NEMA
Size
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Max.
Hp
25
50
100
200
400
200
400
IC
(kA)
25
25
25
65
42
100
42
Circuit
Breaker
Type
SEL
SEL
SFL
SGL
SKL
SGL
SKL
Space Units
13" Deep 20" Deep
4
5
6
5
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
4
4.5
4.5
12
5
11
Notes
➁
➁
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVAT, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 20 and 24" wide sections, 20" deep
(2S1W).
➂ Refer to factory.
D6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Fused Switch Type
208 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
➄➆
FVNR
NEMA
Size
5
6
3
4
3
3
1
2
Max.
Hp
25
40
75
150
7.5
10
15
25
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
–
100
100
65
65
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
200
200
400
600
30
60
100
100
200
200
400
600
30
60
60
100
Space
Units
2.5
3.5
5
–
1
1
2
2.5
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
3
3
1
2
4
Max.
Hp
7.5
15
20
30
60
IC
(kA)
100
100
65
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
100
100
200
400
30
60
100
200
400
Space
Units
4
5
2
2
5.5
Notes
➄
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
3
4
4
2
3
2
2
Max.
Hp
30
40
60
7.5
10
15
20
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
65
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
30
30
60
100
200
200
400
Space
Units
5
5
6
3
4
3
3
Notes
➁
➀
➀
➀
➃
FVR
NEMA
Size
3
3
1
2
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
7.5
10
15
25
40
75
–
IC
(kA)
100
100
65
65
100
100
–
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
30
60
100
100
200
400
60
100
200
400
– –
Space
Units
1.5
2
3
3.5
5
9.5
–
Notes
➄
➄
➂➅
RVAT
NEMA
Size
3
4
2
3
5
6
Max.
Hp
10
15
25
40
75
–
IC
(kA)
100
65
65
100
100
–
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD Space Units
Switch Amps Clip Amps 13" Deep 20" Deep
60
100
100
200
400
–
60
60
100
200
400
–
4
5
5
6
–
–
4
5
4
4
6
–
Notes
➄
➄
➂
2S1W, 2S2W
3
3
2
2
4
5
1
4
5
6
1
2
2
3
3
NEMA
Size
–
10
15
25
40
75
7.5
40
75
100
Max. Hp
CT VT Constant HP
7.5
–
10
15
25
5
7.5
–
15
20
7.5
–
15
20
–
–
5
–
–
–
IC
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
100
100
–
100
100
100
65
65
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
200
400
30
60
60
100
100
200
400
600
30
60
60
100
100
30
30
60
60
100
200
400
30
30
60
60
100
200
400
600
Space
Units
2
2
3.5
3.5
5.5
8.5
2
5.5
8.5
8.5
2
2
2
3.5
3.5
Notes
➄
➄
➂
➄
➄
➂
➂
D
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
➂ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 31/2X used for disconnect.
➃ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere
UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.
➄ Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.
➅ Requires 12" bottom wireway cover to UL Label.
➆ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
D7
D
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Fused Switch Type
230 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
➄➆
FVNR
NEMA
Size
3
3
1
2
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
7.5
15
30
30
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
100
100
65
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
30
60
100
200
200
400
100
200
200
400
600 600
Space
Units
1
1
2
2.5
3.5
5
5.5
Notes
➅
➀
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
2
3
1
2
4
Max.
Hp
7.5
15
20
30
60
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
65
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
100
100
400
30
60
100
100
400
Space
Units
2
4
2
2
5.5
Notes
➅
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
2
2
2
2
3
4
Max.
Hp
7.5
10
15
20
30
60
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
65
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
60
60
60
100
100
400
30
30
60
100
100
400
Space
Units
4
4
4
4
4.5
6
Notes
➀➅
➃
FVR
NEMA
Size
3
4
1
2
5
6
Max.
Hp
7.5
15
30
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
100
100
65
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
30
60
100
200
400
100
200
400
600 600
Space
Units
1.5
2
3
5
8.5
8.5
Notes
➅
➂➅
➁
RVAT
NEMA
Size
Max.
Hp
4
5
2
3
6
15
30
50
100
200
IC
(kA)
100
65
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD Space Units
Switch Amps Clip Amps 13" Deep 20" Deep
Notes
60
100
200
400
600
60
100
200
400
600
4
5
6
–
N/A
4
4
5
6
12
➅
➁
2S1W, 2S2W
7.5
–
15
30
–
50
100
7.5
–
15
30
–
50
100
200
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
CT VT Constant HP
4
5
3
4
1
2
2
1
2
2
4
5
3
4
6
25
30
40
75
5
7.5
10
5
7.5
10
25
30
40
75
150
IC
100
100
100
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Space
Units
Notes
30
60
60
100
200
200
400
30
60
60
100
200
200
400
600
30
30
60
100
100
200
400
30
30
60
100
100
200
400
600
4
5.5
5.5
8.5
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
5.5
5.5
8.5
8.5
➅
➂
➅
➂
➁
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep.
➂ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20” wide with top 31/2 X used for disconnect.
➃ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24” wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30” wide section is required with 1200 ampere
UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.
➄ Use time-delay fuse, maximum rating same as switch amps.
➅ Use size 4 spacing for 100k ratings.
➆ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
D8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Fused Switch Type
460 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
➅
FVNR
NEMA
Size
5
5
3
4
6
6
2
3
1
2
Max.
Hp
50
100
125
200
10
15
25
30
250
400
IC
(kA)
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
100
200
400
400
30
60
60
100
600
600
100
200
200
400
30
30
60
60
400
600
Space
Units
2.5
3.5
5
5
6
6
1
2
1
1
Notes
➀
➀
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
2
2
1
1
3
4
Max.
Hp
10
15
25
30
60
150
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
60
100
200
400
30
30
60
60
200
200
Space
Units
2
2
2
2
5
5.5
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
Max.
Hp
50
60
100
125
10
15
25
30
IC
(kA)
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
100
200
200
400
60
60
60
100
100
200
200
200
30
30
60
60
Space
Units
6
6
4
5
3
3
3
3
Notes
➂
➀
➀
➀
➄
FVR
NEMA
Size
5
5
3
4
6
2
3
1
2
Max.
Hp
50
100
125
200
250
10
15
25
30
IC
(kA)
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
100
200
400
400
600
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
400
30
30
60
60
Space
Units
3.5
5
8.5
8.5
8.5
1.5
2
2
3
Notes
➃
➃
➁
2S1W
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
CT VT Constant HP
4
5
3
3
1
2
2
5
6
6
10
15
25
30
50
100
125
200
250
400
7.5
15
20
30
40
75
100
150
250
300
IC
100
100
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
30
60
60
100
100
200
400
400
600
600
30
30
60
60
100
200
200
400
400
600
Space
Units
4
4
5.5
8.5
2
2
2
8.5
8.5
8.5
Notes
➃
➃
➁
➁
RVAT
5
6
4
5
6
3
3
2
2
NEMA
Size
Max.
Hp
IC
(kA)
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD Space Units
Switch Amps Clip Amps 13" Deep 20" Deep
15 100
25 100
30
50
65
65
100 100
125 100
200 100
250 100
400 100
200
400
400
600
600
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
400
600
30
60
60
100
6
–
–
N/A
N/A
5
5
4
4
5
6
6
12
12
4
4
4
4
Notes
➁
➁
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with
12" bottom wireway cover.
➂ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
➃ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.
➄ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere
UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.
➅ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
2S2W
5
6
4
5
6
NEMA
Size
Max. Hp
CT VT Constant HP
1
2
10
15
7.5
15
2
3
3
25
30
50
20
30
40
100
125
200
250
400
75
100
150
250
300
IC
100
100
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
30
60
60
100
100
200
400
400
600
600
30
30
60
60
100
200
200
400
400
600
Space
Units
2
4
4
2
2
5.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
Notes
➃
➃
➁
➁
D9
D
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Selection Tables
Fused Switch Type
575 Volts, 60 Hertz – Combination Motor Starters
➄➅
FVNR
NEMA
Size
3
3
1
2
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
10
25
40
50
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
30
60
100
100
200
400
60
100
200
400
600 600
Space
Units
1
1
2
2.5
3.5
5
6
D
FVR
NEMA
Size
3
3
1
2
4
5
6
Max.
Hp
10
25
40
50
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
30
60
100
200
200
400
60
100
200
400
600 600
Space
Units
1.5
2
3
5
5
8.5
8.5
Notes
➃
➁
RVAT
NEMA
Size
3
4
2
3
5
6
Max.
Hp
25
40
50
100
200
400
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD Space Units
Switch Amps Clip Amps 13" Deep 20" Deep
60
200
200
200
400
600
60
60
100
200
400
600
4
6
6
6
–
N/A
5
5
4
5
6
12
Notes
➁
Part Winding
NEMA
Size
3
4
4
2
3
1
1
Max.
Hp
10
15
25
50
75
100
150
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
30
60
60
200
200
200
400
30
30
60
100
200
200
400
Space
Units
5
5
6
2
5
2
2
Y-Delta, OT
NEMA
Size
4
4
3
3
5
2
2
2
2
Max.
Hp
50
75
100
150
–
10
15
20
25
IC
(kA)
100
100
100
100
–
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
Switch Amps Clip Amps
200
200
200
400
–
60
60
60
60
100
200
200
400
–
30
30
60
60
Space
Units
6
6
4
4
–
3
3
3
3
Notes
➂
➀
➀
➀
➄
➅
2S1W, 2S2W
6
1
2
4
5
1
2
3
3
4
5
3
3
6
NEMA
Size
100
200
400
10
25
40
50
100
200
400
Max. Hp
CT VT Constant HP
10
25
40
50
7.5
–
40
–
IC
100
100
100
100
–
–
–
7.5
–
40
–
–
–
–
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Class RK-1, RK-5, J-TD
200
400
600
30
60
30
60
200
200
200
200
200
400
600
200
400
600
30
60
30
60
60
100
60
100
200
400
600
Space
Units
5.5
8.5
8.5
2
2
2
2
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
8.5
8.5
Notes
➃
➁
➃
➁
Note: The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum. Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to factory. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
➀ Requires 24" wide section.
➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24" wide sections, 20" deep with
12" bottom wireway cover.
➂ Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.
➃ Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24" wide 6X, right hand section is 20" wide with top 3 1/2 X used for disconnect.
➄ Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24" wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30" wide section is required with 1200 ampere
UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.
➅ Refer to factory.
➆ All 400/600A units are MCS (molded case switches).
D10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Starter Options
Option
Control
Transformer
Function
Provides control power.
See “Control Transformer” for details
CPT Primary Fuses Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded transformer primary conductor.
Additional
Space Required
–
CPT Secondary
Fuse
One midget fuse (typical Gould Ferraz type TRM) wired in ungrounded Control
Power Conductor
–
Control Power
Fuse
Starter Overload
Protection
Pilot Lights
Full Voltage
Transformer
LED
Push-to-test
Push buttons
Start-Stop
Stop
Stop
Fwd, Rev, Stop
Fast, Slow, Stop
One Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded control power conductor.
Use when control power source is remote from unit.
For more information see Section J.
CR104P type.
Red–ON FAST, FWD, UP
Amber–DOWN, REV, SLOW
Green–STOPPED, READY
CR104P with 6V lamp
(See full voltage lights for lens colors)
CR104P Type transformer type with 6V LED Lamp
CR104P, Full-voltage transformer type, or LED (See full-voltage lights for lens colors)
CR104P momentary type-use with FVNR starters with 3-wire control.
CR104P momentary type-provides stop function at MCC with 3-wire control.
CR104P maintained type–provides stop function at MCC with 2/3 wire control.
Can be furnished with mushroom head and provision for locking open.
CR104P momentary type-use with FVR starters.
CR104P momentary type-use with 2-speed starters.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Option
Selector Switches
On-Off
Hand-Off-Auto
Function
CR104P maintained type–use as permissive start with 2 or 3 wire control.
CR104P maintained type–use to select auto or manual start with
2-wire control.
Fast-Slow-Off-Auto CR104P maintained type–use with 2-speed starters.
Fixed Control TB
Power TB
Power TB
Control
Disconnect
Control Relay
Timing Relays
Pneumatic
Timing Relays
Electronic
Stationary control terminal boards in place of split type terminal boards.
Stationary motor lead terminal boards Size 3 and 4
Split Type terminal blocks on
Nema Size 1 and 2
High density pull-apart TB will provide foreign voltage isolation without disengaging the unit vertical bus stabs.
C2000 Type (standard) Rated 600V, with 10A contacts. Relays are available with normally open and normally closed non-convertible contacts. Up to four additional contact blocks can be added to basic 4 pole relay. Size 1 and
Size 2 FVNR starters require an additional half-space unit for three to four relays. Two relays can be added with no increase in space units.
C2000 (standard) .3 to 3 seconds or
10 to 180 seconds timing range. 10A contacts. 4 INST and 2 TD interlocks
(NO and NC).
Time-delay on energization/deenergization double pole, double throw contacts rated 600V, 10A. Timing ranges 1-10 or 10-300 seconds.
Additional
Space Required
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
D
D11
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
D
Starter Options
Additional
Option Function Space Required
Motor Driven Used for long timing periods. 1/2X
Specify timing range.
Accelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay for
Relay multi-speed motors to provide definite
accelerating time for each speed above
first speed. Time interval is adjustable
.3 to 30 seconds. Alternate Electronic
Timer.
Decelerating C2000 (standard) timing relay allows
Relay time for motor to coast stop before
permitting restart or coast to a lower
speed on multi-speed motors before
initiating slow speed operation (2-speed
motors). Time interval is adjustable .3 to
30 seconds. Alternate Electronic Timer.
Compelling On multi-speed starters, requires the
Relays controller to progress in sequence from
low to high speed. One relay is required
for each speed over one. Requires same
space as C-2000 timing relay. Alternate
Electronic Timer.
Latch CR120BL, 4 pole. Once relay closes,
Relay mechanical latch holds relay closed
until electrically reset. Requires same
space as CR120B (4 pole) control relay.
Fused Switch 2-10A auxiliary interlocks operated by –
Auxiliary Interlock disconnect operator Max. (2NO, or 1NO
and 1NC)
CB Options (Spectra SPDT auxiliary interlocks mounted –
only) Aux. Interlock in CB. Refer to factory if more than
2 required.
Bell Alarm Internal CB alarm switch. –
Shunt Trip Electric remote trip. –
Key Interlock Added to disconnect operating handle –
Above 250A to require a predetermined system
operating sequence. Specify operating
sequence.
Ground Fault Zero sequence sensing Ground Fault Yes
Relay for equipment protection for
NEMA size 2-6 starters.
Additional
Option Function Space Required
Current Donut type CT located in one motor Yes
Transformer phase conductor for purchasers use.
(Also used for door mounted Ammeter.)
Amp Integrated CT/Current transducer with Yes
Transducer 4-20 MA output. (Requires 120V Power).
Ammeter AC panel-type, single current-
transformer operated five-ampere
movement. Scale selected based on
125% motor full-load amperes.
Elapsed Time Mounts on pushbutton bracket.
Meter Meter Visible from front of MCC.
Phase Loss/ APVR used primarily to sense phase –
Unbalance loss, unbalance, or reversal, has time
Voltage Sensing delay under-voltage.
Motor Winding The motor winding heater is designed 1/2X
Heater for use with 3-phase ac motors to
guard against damage caused by
condensation buildup on motor
windings which can occur in high
humidity environments during motor
idle periods. Refer to application data
in Components (Section H) (1X-size 5).
Coil Suppressor, Surge suppressors reduce undesirable
120V transients in control circuits by
absorbing voltage transients
generated by operating coils.
Door Diagram Circuit diagram mounted on back of –
unit door.
Wire markers Permanent wire number identification –
on each control wire. Tube type
standard, heat shrink optional.
Provision for PFC Terminals located between contactor
Capacitor and OL relay.
D12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Product Information
Undervoltage Protection
Standard starters drop out when line voltage drops below approximately 65 percent rated volts and can be reclosed when voltage returns to 85 percent rated volts.
Where momentary contact devices are used in standard three-wire control circuits, the starter will not reclose on momentary loss of voltage until the START button is pushed, thus inherently providing undervoltage protection.
If a maintained contact device, such as a float switch, is used to start the motor, the starter will close automatically upon restoration of control voltage. In some cases, this may not be desirable for safety reasons, and a reset pushbutton and auxiliary relay should be specified to provide undervoltage protection.
Overload Relays
Standard relays are three-leg block bimetallic type with adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of the heater rating. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. A single reset button mounted on the starter door permits external reset.
Ambient-compensated relays are available for ambients from –30°C to +80°C and have adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of normal rating. Improved protection is provided when the motor is in a relatively constant ambient but control is subject to varying ambient. Relays are interchangeable with standard type.
Optional Electronic Overload Relay and
Motor Managment Relays
Electronic overload relays and electronic overload relays with basic communication functions are available (see page
H-12). Advanced motor management relays from GE Multilin are also available (see page H-5 for MM200 and MM300).
Control Circuit Protection
Motor control circuits tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, such as line-to-line control and line-to-neutral control are protected by listed, branch circuit rated fuses in each ungrounded conductor. UL requires rejection type fuses for equipment rated above 10kA short-circuit rating. 6 ampere,
600 volt Class CC fuses are furnished as standard.
Motor control circuit transformers are protected with a fuse in each ungrounded secondary conductor. Secondary fuses are UL Recognized supplementary fuses size per Article 450 of the NEC (20 amperes maximum). UL required primary transformer protection in accordance with NEC Article
430.72(c) and Article 450 fuses are furnished in each ungrounded primary conductor.
Motor control circuit power, other than power tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, should be protected against overcurrent. The protective device may be located at the source or by the optional fuse(s) located in each unit. Normally, one (Class CC) fuse in the ungrounded conductor will provide the needed protection.
Where wiring external to the motor control center is indicated,
No. 14 AWG copper will be assumed as the minimum conductor size unless otherwise specified.
Long Control Circuits
On exceedingly long control circuits two problems may occur – (1) starter will not close due to line voltage drop and
(2) starter may not open due to capacitive coupling. Table below gives the one-way distances (in feet) from the starter to the pushbutton along the route of the control cable. This table is for 120 volt coils and allows for a maximum voltage variation of 10 percent. The distances are given for #14 and
#12 AWG control wire.
NEMA Size Distance in Feet with #14 Wire Distance in Feet with #12 Wire
1
2
3
4
1-6
➀
1300
460
320
250
5000
2070
730
510
395
6000
➀ Distance based on using an interposing relay, type C2000
Separate Source Control Circuits
A separate control bus is available as an option. This bus can be fed from a separate external source, or from within the motor control center by a separate distribution transformer or distribution panel.
A normally open auxiliary contact should be specified on each unit disconnect to open the control bus circuit when the unit disconnect is opened. Unit control circuit fusing should also be added.
In lieu of the auxiliary disconnect contact, pull-apart terminal boards may be specified to provide control voltage isolation for individual starters.
Pilot Devices
Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc., are single-unit, heavy-duty oil-tight type mounted on the starter unit door.
Auxiliary Contact Ratings
NEMA Size 1-6
AC Volts
115
230
460
575
DC Volts
125
250
Continuous
10
10
10
10
10
10
Amperes
Make
60
30
15
12
–
–
Break
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
1.1
0.5
D
D13
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
D
Product Information
Starter Auxiliary Contacts (Option)
Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amperes, 600 volts are available, either normally open or closed (non-convertible). Quantities of contacts shown are maximum available and include starter requirements for cross-electrical interlocking and holding circuits. If more contacts are required than shown, a relay must be added.
Starter Type
Full-voltage, Nonreversing (FVNR)
Full voltage, Reversing (FVR)
Forward Contactor
Reverse Contactor
Two-speed, One winding (251W) ➀
Low-speed Contactor
High-speed Contactor
Two-speed, Two winding (252W)
Low-speed Contactor
High-speed Contactor
Part Winding
Run Contactor
Autotransformer, Reduced-voltage
Run Contactor
Total Control Contacts Available
(includes contacts required in basic control circuit for seal-in,cross interlocking, etc.)
1
5
2
6 ➁
NEMA Size Starter
3 4
6 6
5
6
6
6
4
4
4
3
4
4
5
–
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
Control Terminals
The table below lists the maximum number of high density control terminals available on standard heights units. See standard diagrams in Typical Circuits (Section K) for number of control terminals required for standard starters. Note total number of control points are in addition to T1, T2 and
T3 power terminal points.
Starter
Function
FVNR
FVR
2S1W
2S2W
Size 1
CB/FS
18
30
24
24
Size 2
CB/FS
18
42
36
36
Size 3
CB/FS
18
48
48
48
CB = Circuit Breaker; FS = Fused Switch.
CB
Size 4
FS
18
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
Starter Size and Type
➂
All Size 1
All Size 2
All Size 3
All Size 4
All Size 5 and 6
CPT Std. VA
60 Hz 50 Hz
60
150
150
150
300
300
100
250
250
100
CPT Max. VA
➄
60 Hz
300
50 Hz
250
300
300
300
300
250
250
250
250
UL (X)
Listed
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
➅
➃
Coil Characteristics
Size and Type
Size 1, FVNR, FVR
Size 2, FVNR, FVR
Size 3, FVNR, FVR
Size 4, FVNR, FVR
Size 5, FVNR
Size 6, FVNR
Size 2, 2S1W
Size 3, 2S1W
Size 4, 2S1W
Relay for RVAT Size 3 and 4
Relay for FVNR Size 5 and 6
* Compact starter inrush 88VA, sealed 9VA
Inrush
Volt–Amp
151*
528
1152
1248
2580
3360
576
1248
1336
55
55
Sealed
Volt–Amp
23*
60
83
87
191
255
75
87
95
9
9
300 Line Standard Coil Data
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
Coil
Amps
120V
Amps
480V
Inrush 1.26
Holding .2
Inrush
Holding
4.4
.5
Inrush 9.6
Holding .69
Inrush 10.4
Holding .73
Inrush 21.5
Holding 1.6
Inrush 28.1
Holding 2.1
VA Watts Vars PF
.33
151 69.5
134 .46
.55
24 6 23 .25
1.2
528 169 500 .32
.14
60 12.9
57.9
.26
2.6
1152 230 1129 .20
.18
83 18.4
81.5
.19
2.8
1248 262 1220 .21
.2
87 18.8
84.8
.22
5.7
2580 464 2538 .18
.42
191 38.8
185 .25
7.6
3360 608 3325 .18
.58
255 44 246 .25
% Volts Millisec
P/U D/O P/U D/O
85 63
15 to
30
7 to
15
85
85
68
65
20 to
40
7 to
15
20 to
45
7 to
15
85
85
85
65
65
65
20 to
45
7 to
15
30 to
50
15 to
25
30 to
50
15 to
25
Control Transformers
Power is tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect and the transformer provides 120 volt power.
Two 600 volt primary fuses, plus one 250 volt secondary fuse in the ungrounded conductor is standard.
Standard control power transformer ratings are adequate to handle the starter-coil current and three pilot lights. If additional burdens are expected, larger transformers should be specified.
➀ For constant- or variable-torque motors.
➁ Limit 4 with APVR relay.
➂ Refer to Company for part-winding and Y-delta starters.
➃ Starter coils operated at line voltage. Starters operated by control relay in 120 volt control circuit. Class CC fuses are provided for starter coil circuit.
➄ Without increasing standard unit space requirements for size 1 to 4, over size CPT in size 5 will add 6".
➅ 1/2X FVNR uses a 100VA CPT.
D14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Starters
Product Information
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Substitution
Substituting a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in place of a
Mag-Break ® circuit breaker may require increasing the circuit breaker trip rating to avoid tripping on starting. See Appendix
(Section J) for recommended thermal-magnetic circuit breaker trip ratings.
NEMA Size
Starter
Standard
Circuit Breaker
Substitute
1,2,3
4
5
SELI
SEL
SFLI
SGLI
SELT
SELL
SFLT
SFLT
—
SGLT
230V
Short-Circuit Rating
460V 575V
25
100
25
100
22
25
100
65
100
100
100
100
65
100
100
100
65
25
25
100
65
Terminals for Field Wiring
Description
Starter Load Terminals
Size 1 Starter
Size 2 Starter
Size 3 Starter
Size 4 Starter
Size 5 Starter
Size 6 Contactor
Control Terminal Boards
Hi Density Pull-Apart
Power Terminal Boards
50 Amp Size 1 & 2 Type C Wiring
Will Accept Wire
➀
AWG/MCM Material
14-8
14-4
8-1/0
4-3/0
(2) 2/0-400
(2) 2/0-500
(2) 12 Max.
14-6
➁
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu-Al
Cu
Cu
➀ Conductors #1 and smaller may be rated 60/75°C.
Conductors #1/0 and larger must be rated 75°C.
Conductors wired directly to OL device terminals must be rated 75°C Cu.
➁ #6 only with ring terminal.
D
D15
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Operator and Metering Panels
Unit spaces can be used to provide metering and/or operator’s panels in the motor control center itself. Arrangement and dimensions will vary depending on the quantity and type of the devices required. Normally, fuse blocks, terminal blocks
(T.B.s), current and potential transformers, etc., can be mounted on a base within the unit space. Meters, pilot lights, pushbuttons, switches, etc., can be mounted on the door.
Suitable locations and adequate space should be provided so that wiring is simplified and there is no interference between door and base mounted components. The following devices are often specified.
• Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights
• Ammeters, voltmeters and other instruments (panel or switchboard type)
• Instrument and transfer switches
• Electronic power meter
• Control relays
• Timing relays (pneumatic, motor-operated or electronic)
• Protection relays
• Alternator relays
These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components are UL listed for use in motor control centers.
Relay Panels
Relay panels can be furnished from 1 space unit to 6 space units with full width doors. The amount of vertical space required is generally determined by the number of terminal board points required or relay type used; when in doubt allow for a double vertical row of terminal boards.
These panels will be UL labeled providing all the components are UL listed for use in motor control centers.
Alternator Relay Panels
Consists of two motor alternator circuit using two control relays and a latching relay. Requires minimum 1 space unit height.
E
Space
Units
Maximum No.
of T.B. Points
1
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
3 1/2
4
4 1/2
5
5 1/2
6
12
24
30
42
48
60
72
78
90
96
108
T.B.s or relays for size estimating only.
Single Vertical Row of T.B.s
Horizontal Width for
Component Mounting
Maximum No. of
Std. 4-Pole Relays
Section Width 20”W
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
6
12
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
18
24
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
36
42
48
54
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
11 1/2"
60
66
72
96
120
144
156
24
48
60
84
180
192
216
Maximum No.
of T.B. Points
Double Vertical Row of T.B.s
Horizontal Width for
Component Mounting
Maximum No. of
Std. 4-Pole Relays
Section Width 20”W
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
18
21
24
27
9
12
3
6
30
33
36
E1
E
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Mounting Plates
Blank plates are available for customer use when field mounting a
PLC and/or relays. All plates come with mounting screws and door.
Full height dished plates come with top horizontal bus barrier.
Description
Min. Enclosure
Depth (inches)
Over Vertical
Bus, 9.5"
From Door
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 13.5” from door
13
20
Mounting Plate
Dimensions (inches)
Width Height
15
20
24
30
20
18
24
30
36
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
42
48
54
60
66
72
18
24
30
36
36
42
48
12
12
18
24
30
48
54
60
66
72
24
30
36
42
66
72
12
18
42
48
54
60
Part Number
110C1040MDG19
110C1040MDG20
110C1040MDG21
110C1040MDG22
110C1040MDG23
110C1040MDG24
110C1040MDG25
110C1040MDG26
110C1040MDG27
110C1040MDG28
110C1040MDG29
110C1040MDG30
110C1040MDG31
110C1040MDG32
110C1040MDG33
110C1040MDG34
110C1040MDG1
110C1040MDG2
110C1040MDG3
110C1040MDG4
110C1040MDG5
110C1040MDG6
110C1040MDG7
110C1040MDG8
110C1040MDG9
110C1040MDG10
110C1040MDG11
110C1040MDG12
110C1040MDG13
110C1040MDG14
110C1040MDG15
110C1040MDG16
110C1040MDG17
110C1040MDG18
110C1040MDG35
110C1040MDG36
110C1040MDG37
110C1040MDG38
110C1040MDG39
110C1040MDG40
110C1040MDG41
110C1040MDG42
110C1040MDG43
110C1040MDG44
110C1040MDG45
110C1040MDG46
110C1040MDG47
110C1040MDG48
110C1040MDG49
110C1040MDG50
110C1040MDG51
Description
Min. Enclosure
Depth (inches)
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 13.5" from door
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 15.5" from door
20
20
Mounting Plate
Dimensions (inches)
Width Height
24
30
20
24
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
54
60
66
72
42
48
54
60
18
24
30
36
66
72
18
24
30
36
42
48
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
E2
Part Number
110C1040MDG70
110C1040MDG71
110C1040MDG72
110C1040MDG73
110C1040MDG74
110C1040MDG75
110C1040MDG76
110C1040MDG77
110C1040MDG78
110C1040MDG79
110C1040MDG80
110C1040MDG81
110C1040MDG82
110C1040MDG83
110C1040MDG84
110C1040MDG85
110C1040MDG52
110C1040MDG53
110C1040MDG54
110C1040MDG55
110C1040MDG56
110C1040MDG57
110C1040MDG58
110C1040MDG59
110C1040MDG60
110C1040MDG61
110C1040MDG62
110C1040MDG63
110C1040MDG64
110C1040MDG65
110C1040MDG66
110C1040MDG67
110C1040MDG68
110C1040MDG69
110C1040MDG86
110C1040MDG87
110C1040MDG88
110C1040MDG89
110C1040MDG90
110C1040MDG91
110C1040MDG92
110C1040MDG93
110C1040MDG94
110C1040MDG95
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Mounting Plates
Description
Min. Enclosure
Depth (inches)
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 15.5" from door
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 17.5" from door
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 18.5" from door
20
20
20
Mounting Plate
Dimensions (inches)
Width Height
30
20
24
30
20
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
42
48
54
60
66
72
18
24
30
36
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
24
30
36
42
66
72
12
18
48
54
60
66
72
42
48
54
60
18
24
30
36
Part Number
110C1040MDG96
110C1040MDG97
110C1040MDG98
110C1040MDG99
110C1040MDG100
110C1040MDG101
110C1040MDG102
110C1040MDG103
110C1040MDG104
110C1040MDG105
110C1040MDG106
110C1040MDG107
110C1040MDG108
110C1040MDG109
110C1040MDG110
110C1040MDG111
110C1040MDG112
110C1040MDG113
110C1040MDG114
110C1040MDG115
110C1040MDG116
110C1040MDG117
110C1040MDG118
110C1040MDG119
110C1040MDG120
110C1040MDG121
110C1040MDG122
110C1040MDG123
110C1040MDG124
110C1040MDG125
110C1040MDG126
110C1040MDG127
110C1040MDG128
110C1040MDG129
110C1040MDG130
110C1040MDG131
110C1040MDG132
110C1040MDG133
110C1040MDG134
110C1040MDG135
110C1040MDG136
110C1040MDG137
110C1040MDG138
110C1040MDG139
110C1040MDG173
110C1040MDG174
110C1040MDG175
110C1040MDG176
110C1040MDG177
110C1040MDG178
110C1040MDG179
110C1040MDG180
110C1040MDG181
110C1040MDG182
110C1040MDG183
Description
Min. Enclosure
Depth (inches)
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus, 18.5" from door
Dished
Mounting
Plate,
No Bus,
21" from door
20
22
Mounting Plate
Dimensions (inches)
Width Height
24
30
20
24
30
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
42
48
54
60
66
72
18
24
30
36
60
66
72
12
36
42
48
54
12
18
24
30
24
30
36
42
66
72
12
18
48
54
60
66
72
42
48
54
60
18
24
30
36
Part Number
110C1040MDG184
110C1040MDG185
110C1040MDG186
110C1040MDG187
110C1040MDG188
110C1040MDG189
110C1040MDG190
110C1040MDG191
110C1040MDG192
110C1040MDG193
110C1040MDG194
110C1040MDG195
110C1040MDG196
110C1040MDG197
110C1040MDG198
110C1040MDG199
110C1040MDG200
110C1040MDG201
110C1040MDG202
110C1040MDG203
110C1040MDG204
110C1040MDG205
110C1040MDG140
110C1040MDG141
110C1040MDG142
110C1040MDG143
110C1040MDG144
110C1040MDG145
110C1040MDG146
110C1040MDG147
110C1040MDG148
110C1040MDG149
110C1040MDG150
110C1040MDG151
110C1040MDG152
110C1040MDG153
110C1040MDG154
110C1040MDG155
110C1040MDG156
110C1040MDG157
110C1040MDG158
110C1040MDG159
110C1040MDG160
110C1040MDG161
110C1040MDG162
110C1040MDG163
110C1040MDG164
110C1040MDG165
110C1040MDG166
110C1040MDG167
110C1040MDG168
110C1040MDG169
110C1040MDG170
110C1040MDG171
110C1040MDG172
E3
E
E
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Lighting and Distribution Panelboards
The following panelboards are available for mounting in motor control centers. Type AL and AQ Panelboards with main circuit breakers are normally provided. Type AE and AD panels require a feeder unit for the main circuit breaker, which then feeds the M.L.O. panel.
Panel
Type
System
Voltage
(Maximum)
Type
Branch
Poles
➀
Ampere
Rating
A Series
Type AL
A Series
Type AQ
A Series
Type AE
4 Wire
A Series
Type AD
3 Wire
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
120/240 Vac
240 Vac
120 Vac
240 Vac
277 Vac
480/277 Vac Max.
277 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
TXQB
THQB
THHQB
TXQB
TEY
TEY
TEY
TEY
TED
TED4
THED
TED4
TED4,6
THED4
THED4
THED6
TED6
THED6
THQL
THQL
THHQL
THHQL
TXQL
THQL
THHQL
THQL
THQB-GF
THQB
THQB
THHQB-GF
THHQB
THHQB
1
2
1
2
1,2
2,3
2,3
3
1,2
1
2
1
1
2
1,2
1,2
2,3
3
1
2,3
1
2,3
1
1
1
2
3
2
3
3
3
3
➀ Two-pole THED breakers require a 3-pole space.
➁ Equipment rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker installed.
➂ One space unit (X) equals 12" vertical height. M.L.O. panel does not include feeder space requirements. (see pg. C4)
15-30
15-100
15-100
15-30
15-100
15-100
15-100
15-100
15-100
15-50
15-30
15-100
15-150
15-100
110-150
15-150
15-150
15-150
15-70
15-100
15-70
15-125
15-30
15-100
15-100
15-30
15-30
15-70
15-100
15-30
15-70
15-100
14
65
14
14
25
14
14
14
25
25
14
18
65
65
65
65
10
22
Interrupting
Rating
➁
RMS
Symmetrical Amps
(in thousands)
10
10
22
22
65
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
65
10
Notes:
• Branch devices are plug-in for Type AL and bolt-on for AQ, AE and AD panelboards.
Maximum of 42 circuits per panel.
• Ground fault CB not available in AL panels.
• Lighting panel main bus is rated 1000 amps per square inch, alternate 800 amps per square inch is available.
• 65 kAIC rating for panels is obtained through series rating.
• For all panels fed from MCC bus, add feeder unit to feed panel.
AD
Number of
Circuits
18
24
24
30
30
12
12
18
36
36
42
42
MCC Space Units
Number of
Circuits
12
12
18
18
24
24
30
30
36
36
42
42
Panel Main Bus
Rating (Amps)
100
225
100
225
225
400
225
400
225
400
225
400
Panel Main Bus
Rating (Amps)
100
225
100
225
100
225
100
225
100
225
100
400
Space Units
➂
AL, AQ
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
4 1/2
3
4 1/2
3 1/2
5
3 1/2
5
Space Units
➂
2 1/2
3
3
3 1/2
3
3 1/2
3 1/2
4
4
4 1/2
4
4 1/2
SpaceUnits
➂
AE
2
2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
3 1/2
3
3 1/2
3
4
3 1/2
4
The unit rating is the same as the lighting panel rating when:
A. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit but not connected to any power source within the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating. The lighting/ distribution panel must have a main breaker.
B. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected directly (with no intermediate transformer) to motor control center bus through a feeder. The panel series rating must equal or exceed motor control center short-circuit rating.
C. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected to a transformer unit in the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating.
E4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Distribution Transformers
General
Open, dry-type transformers with primary thermal-magnetic circuit breaker or fusible switch with NEMA Class R (dual element) fuses are available in motor control center construction. The accompanying tables give both single- and three-phase transformers normally mounted in motor control centers for use in supplying separate-source control circuits, panelboards and power external to the motor control center.
NEC Article 450-3 covers transformer protection, other than motor control circuit transformers or special applications.
The general requirements are:
The degree of protection required depends on the specific application. Select a transformer protective device which provides the required protection. Secondary protection in each ungrounded conductor can be provided if specified.
Space units shown include space necessary for the primary disconnect. One space unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.
If transformers with taps are required, refer to the factory.
Primary disconnects stab into the vertical bus. Transformer secondary conductors are wired to a terminal board in the unit. One leg of 120 volt secondaries, the center point of
120/240 volt secondaries, and the Y-point of 3-phase secondaries are grounded unless otherwise specified.
Primary Protection Only
Primary Current
9 amps or more
2 amps to 9 amps
Less than 2 amps
Primary Protection Rating
125% or next higher standard rating per NEC Sect. 240-6
167% maximum
300% maximum
Primary and Secondary Protection
Secondary Current Primary Protection Rating Secondary Protection Rating
9 amps or more
Less than 9 amps
250% maximum
250% maximum
125% or next higher standard rating
167% maximum
E
Three-Phase Transformers (Delta-Y, no Taps
➅
)
KVA
Switch
Size
Fused Switch-100kAIC
Fuse
Amps
380-120/208 Volts, 50 Hertz
3 30 7
9
30
30
60
17.5
60
45 200 90
480-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz
3
9
30
30
5.6
15
15
30
30
60
25
45
45 100 70
600-120/208 Volts, 60 Hertz
3
9
30
30
30
60
4.5
12
40
➃
Space
Unit
2.5
3
6
6
2.5
3
4
4
4
2.5
3
4
UL Listed
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
➀ Requires full depth of motor control center.
➁ Requires 24" wide enclosure.
➂ Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.
➃ Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)
➄ Sized for primary and secondary protection.
➅ Add 6" for Taps.
➆ Requires 30" wide enclosure.
Notes
➀➁
➂
➀➆
➂
➀➆
Notes:
• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.
• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.
IC Rating (kA)
65 100
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
–
–
QMW
SEP
SEP
SEP
QMW
SEP
SEP
SEP
SEP
QMW
SELL
SELL
Circuit Breaker
CB Trip
Space
Unit
➄
30
70
150
20
30
70
125
20
70
2.5
3
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
3
4
4.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
UL Listed
(X)
Notes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
➀➁
➂
➀➆
➀➆
➀➆
E5
E
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Distribution Transformers
Single-Phase Transformers kVA
Switch
Size
Fused Switch-100kAIC
Fuse
Amps ➃
Space
Unit
240-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50
30 3.2
1
3
5
10
15
30
30
30
60
200
7
15
30
60
80
25
37.5
200
200
150
200
380-120/240 Volts, 50 Hertz
0.50
1
3
10
15
30
30
30
60
60
3.5
4
12
35
50
25
37.5
100
200
90
125
480-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50
30 2.8
1 30 3.5
3
5
10
15
25
30
30
30
60
100
10
12
25
40
70
37.5
100 100
600-120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz
0.50
1
3
30
30
30
2.5
4
8
10
15
25
37.5
30
60
60
100
20
35
60
80
2
2
4
1
1
1.5
4
6
1
1
1.5
2
3
3
4
1
1
1.5
2
2
3
3
4
3
4
2
3
1
1
1.5
UL Listed
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
➀
➀➅
➀➅
➀➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
➀ Requires full depth of motor control center.
➁ Requires 24" wide enclosure.
➂ Requires 20" deep enclosure 24" wide.
➃ Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)
➄ Sized for primary and secondary protection.
➅ Add 6" for Taps.
➆ Requires 30" wide enclosure.
Notes:
• 15-45KVA transformers are TP-1 rated per NEMA Standard TP-1-1996.
• Low temperature rise and/or copper windings are available. Refer to factory.
IC Rating (kA)
65 100
–
–
–
–
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
QMW
QMW
SEP
SEP
SEP
SEP
QMW
QMW
SEP
SEP
SEP
SEP
QMW
QMW
QMW
SELL
Circuit Breaker
CB Trip➄
Space
Unit
UL Listed
(X)
Notes
30
40
70
150
225
225
15
50
90
150
125
15
20
40
50
125
125
40
50
100
90
1
1
1.5
2
2
2.5
2.5
3.5
1
1
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
4
1
1
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
3.5
1
1
1.5
2
2
3.5
3
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
➀
➀➅
➀➅
➀➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
➀
➀➅
➂
➅➆
E6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Power Factor Correction Capacitors
Description
Motors and other inductive loads require two kinds of electrical current: Current which performs the actual work and reactive current which produces the magnetic fields necessary for the operation of inductive devices such as motors. Both types of currents produce system I 2 R losses. Capacitors installed near inductive loads can be used to reduce the reactive currents which flow through much of the system, thereby reducing
I 2 R losses.
Low-voltage capacitors are generally three-phase units, delta-connected, and are protected by current limiting fuses. The fuses disconnect the capacitor in the event of an electrical short, providing service continuity for the system and reducing the possibility of rupturing the capacitor case.
Power factor correction capacitors should be switched by a separate contactor (sketch B) under any of the following conditions:
• High inertia load.
• Open circuit transition reduced voltage starting.
• Wye-delta motor.
• Reversing or frequently jogged motor.
• Multispeed motor (2S1W, 2S2W, etc.).
Power factor correction capacitors should not be connected to the load side of solid state starters and drives*. It should be noted that two-speed motor starters and soft starters require separate contactors to switch in capacitors after a time-delay in order to avoid possible motor damage while the capacitors discharge. For the same reason, Wye-Delta starters have the capacitors applied after the delta connection has been made.
Capacitors Switched with the Motor
Capacitors used for power factor correction should be selected using the motor manufacturer’s application data.
When the capacitor is connected ahead of the overload relay (sketch A and B), the overload current elements should be selected using the full-load motor current and service factor values specified on the nameplate of the motor.
Capacitors must not exceed the maximum KVAR recommended by the motor manufacturer for switching with the specific motor selected.
Disconnect
means—
Short circuit protective means—
Contactor—
Overload relay—
Motor—
Capacitor—
A B
E
*Care should be taken when connecting power factor correction to the line side of power conversion equipment, such as drives, to avoid component damage.
E7
E
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Miscellaneous Units
Power Factor Correction Capacitors
Selection of Power Factor Correction Capacitors
The following table is provided as a guide. Consult motor manufacturer for actual capacitor KVAR values.
Typical Capacitor Ratings
➀
HP
100
125
150
200
300
40
50
60
75
15
20
25
30
3
5
7
10
Nameplate Volts
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
460
460
460
460
Full Load RPM
1750
1740
1760
1750
1760
1750
1760
1760
1770
1765
1775
1775
1780
1780
1785
1785
1785
Maximum KVAR
14.9
19.1
24.9
27
29.1
32.3
38.7
50.5
77.2
4.5
5.1
7.2
9.1
1.4
1.9
3.1
3.6
➀ For use with 1800 rpm, 3-phase. 60Hz classification B motors
Type KE to raise full-load power factor to approximately 95 percent.
➁ See J1 for full load amps.
MCC Space
Units Required
1X
240V
22 1/2
Maximum KVAR
480V
50
600V
45
UL Listed
(X)
X
One space unit X equals 12 inches of vertical height. Space required is for capacitor only. Add space for switching device as needed.
In front-mounted configurations utilizing the 20" deep enclosure, capacitors may be mounted in the rear 10 inches of space behind the vertical bus. Rear access to the motor control center is required for servicing the capacitors.
Switching Capacitors Spearately
When a group of motors are so operated that some run while others are idle, a single capacitor bank (containing a number of individual units) can be connected to the motor control center bus to supply kilovars to the group. In these instances, a separate switching device is needed for the capacitors. The interrupting rating of the switching device should be at least as great as the short-circuit current available.
Cable must be capable of at least 135 percent rated capacitor current. Switching device selections in the following tabulation are based on the continuous current of the capacitors.
• Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers ............................135%
• Fuses and Fusible Switches ..............................................165%
• Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ..........................................150%
Recommended Switching Device
KVAR
240 Volts, 60 Hertz
2 1/2
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
27 1/2
30
37 1/2
480 Volts, 60 Hertz
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
27 1/2
30
37 1/2
Switch with Class J
(In Amperes)
10
20
30
40
60
80
125
125
175
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
60
80
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
(In Amperes)
60
80
100
110
15
20
30
40
150
40
50
50
60
70
15
15
20
30
For PFCC other than 240V or 480V, 60 Hz, refer to factory for sizing.
Optional 240 and 480 volt blown fuse indicating lights are available. The indicating lights are mounted on the unit door.
All capacitor units are Dry Type.
Bus connected power factor capacitors may be paralleled to increase kvar ratings. Refer to factory.
E8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Intelligent E9000 MCC
GE’s Intelligent Low-voltage Motor Control Center (MCC) is an extension of GE’s Evolution E9000* MCC product which utilizes network devices to communicate the status of the system, to enable control of the system devices, or to facilitate advanced diagnostics.
A motor control center is responsible for controlling multiple motor loads throughout your facility. With GE’s intelligent
MCC offering, you can remotely monitor and control your system, helping to increase productivity and personnel safety.
Standard GE Network Devices
GE offers a wide variety of network devices to build a customized MCC to meet your needs. Overload and motor management relays, intelligent trip units, variable frequency drives (VFD’s), soft starters, and main metering are all available with communication capabilities. This section will highlight the intelligent solutions GE can offer by leveraging these network devices.
To learn more about these devices, please see Section H and Section G (for VFD’s and Soft Starters).
GE Multilin’s MM200 Motor
Management Relay
EntelliGuard Trip Unit (TU) AF-600 and AF-650 VFDs ASTAT XT Soft Starters
F
GE Multilin’s MM300 Motor
Management Relay microEntelliGuard TU ASTAT BP Soft Starters GE Multlin’s Main Metering:
PQMII & EPM Series
F1
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Intelligent Solutions
GE offers multi-level solutions to help meet the needs of your motor control center application. GE’s Intelligent E9000
MCC configurations can provide local monitoring at or near the equipment, remote control of the network devices, dual protocol solutions, and complete system integration with existing equipment.
The following examples demonstrate some of the different intelligent MCC configurations GE can provide using programmable logic controllers, programmable automation controllers, I/O systems, human machine interfaces, and envisage* Energy Management software to help transform
GE's network devices into an intelligent MCC solution.
Monitoring
F
Monitoring and Control
Dual Communication Bus
F2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs)
GE Intelligent Platforms' family of traditional PLCs provide powerful solutions for small to mid-range stand-alone or distributed industrial control. Our PLCs have powered both discrete and process industries for nearly 25 years, and include the popular Series 90-30, one of the first advanced, full-featured small controllers on the market with thousands of installations worldwide. Also included in the portfolio is the VersaMax Modular PLC, one of the first solutions for control or distributed I/O. Both systems have wide variety of
I/O and a history of high reliability for your exact application requirements.
Series 90-30
Modular Ddesign Offers Unique Versatility
Configure just the system you need, saving critical space and reducing cost. With over 100 I/O modules, the Series 90-30
PLC can be adapted to a wide range of applications.
• Digital interfaces for push buttons, switches, proximity sensors, relays, contactors and many other devices
• Analog modules with varying degrees of resolution for flow, temperature or pressure applications
• Direct connect wiring or remote termination
• Local or remote I/O systems
Ethernet Communications Provide a Real-time Link
Between the Plant Floor and the Boardroom
You can begin with an Ethernet-enabled CPU, or at a later date, choose from our selection of rack-mounted Ethernet modules. The Series 90-30 Ethernet module supports both
SRTP and Modbus TCP/IP application protocols.
The Scalable Processing Power of the CPU Creates a Clear
Upgrade Path
Create the system that’s ideal today, while leaving open the option of creating a more powerful system tomorrow — without having to change your application software.
Integrated Motion Control Fosters High Performance,
Point-to-point Applications
A variety of Series 90-30 field bus interfaces enables distributed control and/or I/O. Choose from Ethernet EGD, Profibus-DP ™ ,
Genius*, DeviceNet ™ and Interbus-S ™ modules. Field Bus interface modules are easy to install and quick to configure.
Plug them into an existing system or design a new system around them.
Programming is Easy with Proficy* Machine Edition
With the most advanced PLC programming tools on the market today, Proficy Machine Edition is an integrated solution for PLC and remote I/O hardware configuration, PLC programming languages, application development, and online diagnostics. Supported programming languages include
Ladder Diagram (LD), Instruction List (IL), Structural Text (ST), and C Block.
The Series 90-30 Stands Out Among Small Controls for
Offering Redundancy Options
The Series 90-30 is the low-cost solution for high availability applications, with redundant CPUs and power supplies.
F
F3
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers
Pick the Palm-Sized PLC That’s Light on Your Budget
For tight spaces, the VersaMax Nano PLC is the perfect solution. Thanks to its all-in-one construction, installation is a breeze. All you have to do is snap it onto a DIN-rail or screw it into a panel. With the VersaMax Nano, you save on initial as well as life-cycle costs.
Select the Big-Featured PLC in a Compact Package
The small footprint VersaMax Micro PLC offers the flexibility of modular design and a variety of built-in features, including up to 64 I/O points (expandable to 176 I/O points), fast cycle times, a robust instruction set and extensive memory that multiplies your programming options.
Tap the Perfect Solution for Low-end Motion Applications
Both the VersaMax Nano and Micro can be used with either a PWM or a pulse train device. In addition, both controllers come with built-in high-speed counters that can be used in either Type A or Type B configurations. The new Micro 20,
Micro 40 and Micro 64 support four 100Khz high-speed counters and four 65Khz PWM or pulse train out-puts for high speed motion applications.
The new MicroMotion expansion module (2 axis of Servo or
Stepper @ 500Khz pulses/second with encoder inputs) is ideal for either Micro integrated motion control or standalone motion control (over serial or Ethernet networking). The
MicroMotion expansion module is loaded with features and supports 2 axis of stepper and servo control. The module supports a powerful function set, Home, Jog, Registration
Input, S-Curve acceleration, Feedrate Override and more.
Up to 256 move profiles are stored on the module and backed up with the Portable Memory device (removable
Flash device) for easy program storage of the motion moves.
The Micro 20, Micro 40, and Micro 64 support up to 2
Micro-Motion expansion modules for a total of 4 axis high performance motion control.
Take Advantage of a Host of Communications Options
Both the VersaMax Nano and Micro have an RS-232 port that can be used for SNP slave, Modbus RTU or serial I/O commands. The Micro 23 and Micro 28 also have an RS-485 port that adds SNP master and Modbus master commands.
With serial I/O commands, you can interface with such devices as pagers, intelligent scales, bar code readers and printers. The new Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 have a second option port that supports either RS-232, RS-485 or
USB communications module. The VersaMax Nano and
Micro can easily be networked to Ethernet utilizing the powerful VersaMax SE (Serial to Ethernet module).
Program Your Controllers in Record Time
With GE’s Proficy* Machine Edition software, programming your VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs is a simple and intuitive process. Mix Relay Ladder Diagram and Instruction List programming within an application. Develop and save custom view tables. View PLC and I/O system fault tables on demand.
Machine Edition is an automation software breakthrough deploying HMI, motion, and multi-target control in an integrated development environment. This environment provides a common user interface, drag-and-drop editing, and a rich set of development tools. The Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 support a portable program FLASH Memory
Module that provides a simple cost effective way of upgrading field controllers.
F4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers
Typical Micro 20, Micro 40 and Micro 64 Applications
Material Handling, Packaging and Assembly Machines
Micro 20, Micro 40, Micro 64 Advantages
Flexible motion control to improve machine throughput is built into controller
• Up to 4 axes of stepper or servo control (32bit, 65Khz
Pulse Train)
• Up to 4 high speed counters at 100Khz (32bit)
Powerful Networking to improve data gathering
• Plug in 10/100M bit Ethernet available
• Two built-in communication ports
Simple control for complex applications
• 48K bytes of user program memory and 32Kwords of data storage
• Advanced programming instruction set. Ramping, Jog, Find
Home, Go Home, Blended Move (up to 4 continuous moves)
• Portable program storage device
MicroMotion Expansion
• 2 axis of Servo or Stepper @ 500Khz pulses/second with encoder inputs
• Supports Home, Jog, Registration Input, S-Curve acceleration,
Feedrate Override and more
• Interfaces with Micro 20, Micro 40, Micro 64 or standalone mode using Serial or Ethernet
• Stores up to 256 motion profiles on module
SCADA
Micro Advantages
Flexible Communications from Serial to Ethernet
• Modbus Master, Modbus Slave and Report by exception
• Modem and Ethernet SRTP or Modbus TCP (Server) option
Abundance of data storage capability
• Up to 32Kwords of data storage
Powerful instruction set
• Floating point math and PID for process control
• Write and Read data to internal FLASH
F
F5
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers
The newest additions to the Micro family – the Micro 20,
Micro 40 and Micro 64 PLCs – feature expansion to 132, 152 and 176 I/O points respectively, to fast cycle times, robust instruction sets, and generous memory to allow more flexible programming.
These new Micros each feature an optional second port that provides you with an additional RS-232 port, RS-485, USB, or Ethernet. The serial expansion ports come with two analog input channels. A user-friendly memory module is available to easily download changes to the controller without the need of a PC.
And it’s all packaged in a sturdy modular design for easy access and long-term durability. These all-in-one PLCs give you everything you need to control a wide variety of applications.
F
VersaMax Nano and Micro Controllers Selection Guide
Features Nano 10 Micro 14
Built-in Discrete I/O
Built-in Analog I/O
6 in/4out 8 in/6 out
1 on some models none
I/O Expansion Units none
Logic Memory (Words) 2K
Up to 4 units
9K
Data Storage (Words) 256
Scan Time (msec/K) 1.3 msec
Battery Backed RAM Super Cap only
Real Time Clock none
256
1.1 msec
Super Cap only none
Ports Available
Ethernet Option
High Speed Counter
Pulse Train/PWM
Motion Commands
1 RS-232
Yes, VersaMax SE
Up to 4 at 10Khz
(16 bit)
Up to 4 at 5Khz
(16 bit)
N/A
1 RS-232
Yes, VersaMax SE
Up to 4 at 10Khz
(16 bit)
Up to 4 at 5Khz
(16 bit)
N/A
Micro 23 Micro 28 Micro 20 Micro 40 Micro 64
13 in/10 out
2 in/1 out
Up to 4 units
9K
16 in/12 out none
Up to 4 units
9K
12 in/8 out none
Up to 4 units
24K
24 in/16 out none
Up to 4 units
24K
40 in/24 out none
Up to 4 units
24K
2K
1.1 msec
2K
1.1 msec
32K
1.1 msec
32K
1.1 msec
32K
1.1 msec
Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap Yes and Super Cap
Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included Yes, Included
1 RS-232 and
1 RS-485
1 RS-232 and
1 RS-485
1 RS-232 and second port optional
RS-232, RS-485, USB or Ethernet
1 RS-232 and second port optional
RS-232, RS-485, USB or Ethernet
1 RS-232 and second port optional
RS-232, RS-485, USB or Ethernet
Yes, VersaMax SE
Up to 4 at 10Khz
(16 bit)
Up to 4 at 5Khz
(16 bit)
Yes, VersaMax SE
Up to 4 at 10Khz
(16 bit)
Up to 4 at 5Khz
(16 bit)
Yes on second port Yes on second port Yes on second port
Up to 4 at 100Khz
(32 bit)
Up to 4 at 100Khz
(32 bit)
Up to 4 at 100Khz
(32 bit)
Up to 4 at 65Khz
(32 bit)
Up to 4 at 65Khz
(32 bit)
Up to 4 at 65Khz
(32 bit)
N/A N/A
Find Home, Go Home, Find Home, Go Home,
Jog, Ramp, Blended
Move (4 Consecutive
Moves)
Jog, Ramp, Blended
Move (4 Consecutive
Moves)
Find Home, Go Home,
Jog, Ramp, Blended
Move (4 Consecutive
Moves)
Write Register Values to Internal Flush
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
F6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
VersaMax*Nano and Micro Controllers –
General
I/O Circuits
Standard Input Circuit – 120 Volt AC Input Module
(VersaMax IC200MDL240)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
10
16
17
18
19
20
Terminals Field Wiring
NC
NC
H
~
NC
N
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Rated Voltage 120 Volts AC
Indicators One Lcd per point
Inputs per Module 16 (1 group with a single common)
Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field side an logic side
Current Draw 50 mA (typical) at rated voltage from backplane
Input Characteristics:
Max. On-state 70 volts to 132 volts
Min. Off-state 0 to 20 volts
Min. On-state 6 mA maximum
Max. Off-state 1.5 mA maximum
On response time 1 cycle
Off response time 2 cycle
Standard Input Circuit – 120/240 Volt Isolated AC Output
Module (VersaMax IC200MDL331)
Terminals Field Wiring
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
NC
H
~
N
NC
A1
NC
H
~
N
NC
A2
NC
H
~
NC
N
A3
NC
H
~
N
NC
A4
NC
H
~
NC
A5
N
Rated Voltage 120/240 Vac
Output Voltage Range 85 to 264 Vac
Outputs per Module 8 (each output isolated)
Isolation 1500 volts RMS between fieldside and logic side
500 volts RMS between each output
Output Current (Max.) 2 amps per point,
5 amps per module
Output Characteristics:
Inrush Current 25 amps maximum for one cycle
Min. Load Current 100 mA
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 volts maximum
Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at
120 Vac
6 mA maximum at
240 Vac
On response time 1 ms maximum
Off response time 9 ms maximum
(1/2 cycle)
F
I/O Configurations
Standard I/O for motor control center consists of grouped input cards and isolated output cards (note that the isolated outputs can control NEMA Size 1 to 6 starters).
F7
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Programmable Automation Controllers
Expanding On Traditional PLCs
GE Intelligent Platforms created the concept of the
Programmable Automation Controller with the introduction of our PACSystems * family of automation controllers. Expanding on traditional PLCs, GE's PAC controllers provide a highly reliable, high-performance advanced control platform for discrete logic control, motion control, and process control.
While GE offers and supports a wide variety of communications protocols to support our customers needs, we have standardized our control systems on the market-leading industrial network, PROFINET, to provide an extremely high performance, highly reliable, yet simple to configure and install distributed IO network.
PACSystems* RXi Controller
High Performance Distributed IO Controller Platform
GE Intelligent Platforms has leveraged its rich experience in embedded computing and control technology in the design of the innovative PACSystems RXi controller platform. The
RXi Controller incorporates leading-edge CPU technology, the market leading industrial Ethernet network technology, and a unique user interface for maintaining the controller to deliver a control system unique in the industry.
The PACSystems RXi controller is PROFINET enabled, delivering a small footprint solution with highly flexible distributed I/O capabilities to equipment builders and end users. Its unique
Intelligent Display Module provides configuration and maintenance functions at the controller without software.
As a PACSystems controller, the RXi is fully compatible with applications written for any other PACsystems platform.
The result is a high performance solution designed for distributed IO applications.
Higher Performance
The RXi Controller is designed for high performance distributed
IO applications. With a high performance dual core CPU and
Gigabit PROFINET (with built in MRP redundancy) and
Ethernet ports, every aspect of the RXI has been designed for performance.
For even more power, the RXi controller can be combined with the RXi Modular IPC to deliver a unique control and computing platform for the factory floor. Integrated highspeed connectors allow instant data handling. Operator usability can be enhanced by pairing the RXi Modular IPC with new RXi panel displays with new multitouch technology.
The unique combination of high performance control, integrated
PROFINET, intelligent display module, and compact format truly distinguishes the RXi Controller from other offerings.
Greater Uptime
Systems with distributed architectures are easier to configure and maintain. In addition, RXi components are industrial temperature grade, which combined with patented thermal monitoring technology and sophisticated passive cooling techniques delivers reliable control in rugged environments.
Lower Total Cost of Ownership
RXi’s compact control and computing platform allows users to simplify panel design and reduce the overall size of the panel while benefiting from the performance, maintainability, and upgradeability of the PACSystems platform. The optional
Intelligent Display Module provides a maintenance touchscreen display right on the controller, providing faster interaction with the controller and simpler start-up.
F8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems* RXi Controller
Feature
COMExpress CPU Technology
Benefit
Dual core processor for high performance in rugged applications
Rugged technology with wider temperature ranges, higher shock and vibration designs, suitable for industrial applications
Carrier and enclosure designs last across multiple CPU lifespans to provide faster performance enhancements
Integrated redundant PROFINET I/O Interface
High-speed Interconnect Bus
Built-in Data Storage
USB and SD interfaces
Provides a Gigabit Ethernet I/O network connection with built-in cable redundancy (MRP) delivering IO cabling redundancy with no external switches
Enables truly unique combinations of control and Proficy (or other Microsoft
®
Windows
® or Linux applications)
Internal industrial grade SSD drive provides local long-term data retention
Interfaces enable program loading, serial communications and data storage via standard devices
Specifications
Storage
• 10 MB user memory
Data Retention
• RXi specific Energy Pak provides power during power failure while data is written to NV RAM
Ethernet
• 2 Port (shared MAC) GB PROFINET – with MRP
• 1 Ethernet (10, 100, 1000 Mbit) port
• 1 Ethernet (1000 Mbit) – internal
USB Interface
• 2 USB 2.0 Standard Size
Others
• SD Card (on Intelligent Display Module or
Intelligence Faceplate)
Power
• Input: 24V DC (±25%) with protection
Environmental
• Operating: -25°C to +55° C (standard)
• Storage: -40°C to +125° C
• Operating humidity: 10% to 90%
Mounting
• Panel Mount
• Dinrail Mount with Optional DIN Mount Plate
Safety
• UL, CE
• Class 1, Div 2 (pending)
F
F9
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems* RX3i Controller
The PACSystems* RX3i controller is an incredibly powerful
Programmable Automation Controller (PAC) in the innovative
PACSystems family. The RX3i features a single control engine and a universal programming environment to provide application portability across multiple hardware platforms and deliver a true convergence of control.
With integrated critical control platforms, logic, motion, HMI, process control and high availability based on our Reflective
Memory technology, the RX3i provides the performance and flexibility to give you an advantage. No matter the challenges your applications bring, PACSystems RX3i lets you take control.
Benefits
The innovative technology of the PACSystems RX3i enables users to:
• Address major engineering and business issues, such as higher productivity and tighter cost control
• Boost the overall performance of their automation systems
• Reduce engineering and commissioning costs
• Easily integrate new technology into installed base systems
• Significantly decrease concerns regarding short- and longterm migration and platform longevity
High Performance Control on One Platform
The PACSystems RX3i provides logic, motion, HMI, and process control with open communications protocols.
• PACMotion modules can control up to 40 high speed axes in one rack
• PACSystems High Availability solution offers true dual redundancy data synchronization and bumpless transfer
• The Control Memory Xchange offers amazing data transfer at a rate of 2.12 Gbaud
Universal Development Environment
The common software platform across all GE controllers, award-winning Proficy* Machine Edition software provides the universal engineering development environment for programming, configuration and diagnostics for the entire
PACSystems family.
• Programming tools such as tag-based programming, a library of reusable code and a test edit mode for improved online troubleshooting
• User-friendly environment that can increase design flexibility and improve engineering efficiency and productivity
Features
• High-speed processor and patented technology for faster throughput without information bottlenecks
• Dual backplane bus support per module slot:
— High-speed, PCI-based for fast through put of new advanced I/O
— Serial backplane for easy migration of existing
Series 90-30 I/O
• Multiple CPU offerings meeting various performance criteria up to and including an Intel
®
1 GHz CPU for advanced programming and performance with 64 Mbytes memory
• Memory for ladder logic documentation and machine documentation (Word, Excel, PDF, CAD and other files) in the controller to reduce downtime and improve troubleshooting
• Open communications support including Ethernet, GENIUS*,
PROFIBUS™, HART, DeviceNet™ and serial
• Supports high density discrete I/O, universal analog (TC,
RTD, Strain Gauge, Voltage and Current configurable per channel), isolated analog, high-density analog, high-speed counter, and motion modules
• Expanded I/O offering with extended features for faster processing, advanced diagnostics and a variety of configurable interrupts
• Hot insertion for both new and migrated modules
F10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems* RX3i Controller
Baseplates
Expansion Modules
Pneumatic Modules
CPUs
Networks and
Distributed I/O
Discrete I/O Modules
Motion Modules
Power Supplies
CPUs
The CMU310 is a High Availability redundant CPU that is configured using the MaxON software. The CMU310 has the same functionality as the CPU310. Synchronization of the
CMU310s is via an Ethernet link.
Baseplates
The RX3i Universal baseplates support hot swap capability to reduce downtime. Expansion bases are available in 5 and 10 slot versions to maximize flexibility.
Universal Bases Power Supplies
The RX3i power supply modules simply snap in just like I/O, and they work with any model CPU. Each version provides auto-ranging so there is no need to set jumpers for different incoming power levels, and they are current limiting so a direct short will shut the power supply down to avoid damage to the hardware.at a rate of 2.12 Gbaud
Discrete I/O Modules
Input modules provide the interface between the PLC and external input devices such as proximity sensors, push buttons, switches, and BCD thumbwheels. Output modules provide the interface between the PLC and external output devices such as contactors, interposing relays, BCD displays and indicator lamps.
Analog I/O Modules
GE offers easy-to-use analog modules and HART analog modules for control processes such as flow, temperature and pressure.
Specialty Modules
The RX3i features a wide range of Specialty Modules to address specific application requirements.
These modules include:
• Millivolt and Strain Gage I/O
• RTD I/O
• Temperature Control
• Thermocouple I/O
• Resistive I/O
• Power Transducer
Networks and Distributed I/O Systems
The RX3i features a variety of communications options for distributed control and/or I/O. Choose from Ethernet EGD,
PROFIBUS-DP, Genius and DeviceNet. These communication modules are easy to install and quick to configure.
RX3i Pneumatic Module
This output module provides 11 pneumatic outputs and five
24 VDC sourcing outputs. For each pneumatic output, the module contains an internal 3-way solenoid-actuated valve and an associated output fitting. Solenoid power is supplied from an external 24 VDC source to the“DC Outputs” connector on the front panel.
Expansion Modules for Local and Remote I/O
The RX3i supports various expansion options for local and remote I/O to optimize configurations. The RX3i can be expanded up to 8 expansion bases using local remote expansion module. The RX3i also supports Ethernet remote
I/O using the RX3i Ethernet Network Interface module
(IC695NKT001) Series 90-30 Ethernet Network Interface module (IC693NIU004) for more distributed I/O.
Motion Control
PACMotion
The PACMotion controller is a versatile 4-axis servo motion controller that provides the scalability and flexibility to cover a full range of motion applications from small material handling applications to complex multi-axis machines and electronic line shaft applications. PACMotion provides real-time synchronization of all axes in an RX3i rack. A separate RX3i fast logic scan enables fast deterministic event response and synchronization, and the demand driven data exchange model between the RX3i CPU and PACMotion module many significantly reduce scan time impact. The 4-axis servo motion controller is built on a high performance hardware platform, with a new enhanced motion engine, operating system, and open standard integrated programming paradigm.
F11
F
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Example PLC Connections
PLC Controlled Starters
A combination motor starter will require a minimum of one Input and one Output per starter. As shown in Figure 5, the Output is connected between the starter coil and the fused, ungrounded leg of the control voltage source (terminals 3, 1). The Input connection is made between the starter “Seal contact” and the grounded leg of the control voltage source (Terminals 2, X2). The Input monitors the status of the seal circuit to independently verify that the starter has closed.
Fig. 5. Input and Output Connection
When an H-O-A switch is used with PLC I/O, the configuration will appear as shown in Figure 6. Note: as mentioned previously, the
INPUT monitors the status of the starter’s seal circuit in the manual mode as well as the PLC (automatic) mode.
Optional Inputs/Diagnostic
Additional Input connections can be made to monitor the specific status of combination starters and feeders to provide further diagnostic information to the process operator and maintenance personnel.
1. The status of the overload relay can be monitored. An electricallyisolated, normally-open auxiliary contact can be ordered with the GE 300-Line overload relay and an additional PLC Input can be wired in series with it.
2. A PLC Input can be connected between terminals 1 and X
2 to monitor the availability of control power to the starter unit.
Starter Units with Separate-Source Control Voltage
Input and Output connections are shown below (see Figure 7) for units arranged for separate-source control.
Input
A common (non-isolated) Input can be used if all X
2 terminals are wired together.
Output
As required by NEC Article 430-74, if a disconnect auxiliary contact and/or control circuit fuse (FU) is included with each starter, then the Output must be the isolated type. However, if the auxiliary contact and fuse are omitted, a common Output module can be used. With common output modules, interposing relays are required with NEMA Size 3 and 4 starters. Note: NEC article 430-74 can be met with GE’s standard split-type control terminal boards on all draw-out units, or with GE’s pull-apart terminal boards.
Fig. 7. Input and Output Connections for Separate-Source Control
Fig. 6. H-O-A Connection
Starter Units with Individual Control Transformers
For starters having individual control power transformers all Outputs must be isolated type. This requirement is necessary due to the separate voltage sources provided by the individual control transformers. Inputs may be either isolated or non-isolated types. Where non-isolated Inputs are used all X
2 terminals must be wired together.
Surge Suppressors
In cases where excessive noise is present on the control line or hard interlocks which will operate often (in series with PLC Output), surge suppressors are recommended.
Isolated Versus Non-Isolated Outputs
Isolated Outputs
GE’s isolated Outputs can be used for direct control of NEMA Size 1 through 4 combination starters without the use of an interposing relay. The contactors of GE’s standard NEMA Size 5 and larger starters are operated at line voltage with interposing relays operated from the secondary of the control transformer.
Non-Isolated Outputs
NEMA Size 1-2 starters may be operated directly from common PLC
Output cards. The continuous current rating of GE’s non-isolated
Output module requires an interposing relay for NEMA Size 3 and larger starters. Check the module ratings for inrush and continuous values.
F12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Distributed I/O and Remote I/O
GE Intelligent Platforms provides high performance distributed
I/O for demanding control applications. Our I/O and Controllers are connected by PROFINET – the market leading industrial network. Using this common interface allows users to mix and match their preferred Controller with the I/O that best meets the needs of each part of the applica-tion. Our I/O portfolio has a wide range of packaging options covering the full spectrum of needs from simple discrete to high speed analog control, and from factory automation to process industries with harsh environments. We deliver best in class flexibility, performance, reliability and connectivity.
VersaMax* I/O and Control
Maximum versatility is the guiding principle behind VersaMax from GE Intelligent Platforms. This compact, extremely affordable control solution can be used as a PLC, as I/O, and as distributed control. With its modular and scalable architecture, intuitive features and ease of use, this innovative control family can save machine builders and end users considerable time and money.
Offering Big PLC Power in a Small Package
VersaMax CPUs supply a number of features usually found only in PLCs with larger footprints, including up to 64k of memory for application programs, floating point math, realtime clock, subroutines, PID control, flash memory, and bumpless program store. The serial ports support serial read/write and Modbus master/slave communications.
An Abundance of Useful I/O Options
GE offers a broad range of discrete, analog, mixed, and specialty I/O modules. These modules can be freely combined to create stand-alone I/O stations with up to 256 I/O points and expanded I/O systems with up to 4,096 I/O points.
The Perfect Match for Today’s Open Systems
VersaMax gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC, DCS and PC-based control systems by way of Genius*, DeviceNet
™
, PROFIBUS-DP
™ and
Ethernet networks. VersaMax also fully supports the power and open architecture of GE’s PC Control solutions.
The Ultimate in Cost-effective Control and I/O
With intuitive diagnostics, hot insertion of modules and quick connect wiring, VersaMax extends uptime, reduces engineering and training needs, and dramatically reduces project life-cycle costs.
A Design that Maximizes Ease of Use
Every aspect of VersaMax has been carefully refined to accommodate the user. Snap-together I/O carriers mean that no tools are required for module installation or extraction.
A convenient rotary switch can be used for setting bus and reducing programming time. With VersaMax, you can even address I/O automatically.
F
F13
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems* RSTi
Ethernet based I/O delivers high performance and system flexibility
To succeed in an outcome-driven world, businesses must operate faster and leaner and be increasingly connected. At
GE Intelligent Platforms, we understand today’s connected business environment, and are committed to simplifying it.
That’s why we’ve designed an automation architecture that helps you design better machines and plants, operate them smarter, and redefine the interaction with your equipment.
A pivotal point in this architecture is the I/O. GE Intelligent
Platforms leverages industry standards and our experience in embedded technology and high-performance automation to deliver I/O that simplifies system design while reducing costs.
With GE’s Ethernet-based RSTi I/O, communications are enhanced through PROFINET, a high-speed, open protocol that facilitates the massive amounts of data that devices generate. The RSTI I/O unlocks the potential of continuity, connectivity, and collaboration for your control systems.
Simplifying System Design without Sacrificing Performance
Equipment builders are continuously looking to improve the performance of their equipment while augmenting usability and reducing size and complexity. These requirements extend to the I/O control system. With PACSystems automation portfolio, GE provides high-performance control solutions with best-in-class integration of distributed (networked) I/O ideally suited for demanding applications.
The RSTi line of I/O extendds the capabilities of PROFINET enabled GE solutions with a comprehensive line of granular slice I/O that simplifies panel design and reduces the overall size of the control panel while offering the performance, maintainability and upgradability of the PACSystems platform.
Decentralized I/O Reduces Cost
The RSTi decentralized I/O addresses the challenges of high installation overhead cost and lack of granularity of a centralized I/O system. The RSTi provides a high performance distributed I/O network that reduces the cost of field wiring.
The distributed nature of the RSTI enables a machine builder to design in sections with distributed I/O drops closer to the field devices.
Decentralized I/O systems are easily disassembled and reassembled with a standard, off-the-shelf Ethernet cable versus hundreds of wires coming back to a centralized control cabinet.
The compact RSTi I/O line allows the user to “right size” the application, minimizing cost and panel space. I/O expansion is simple with the slide and lock design.
Feature
PROFINET Connectivity
System Diagnostics
Powerful Integration Tools
“Build as You Go”
Rugged Design
Network Independence
Benefit
High-speed I/O throughout that connects to hundreds of third-party devices
Increased uptime by isolating system failures quickly
Reduced development time with Proficy Machine Edition tools
Granular design enables “right sizing” the application, resulting in minimum installation cost and panel space
Rugged “slide and lock” design provides an easy, secure installation
Eight global standard network interfaces supported by the RSTi enables the user to standardize on one I/O system regardless of the bus requirements
F14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems* RSTi
Distributed I/O delivers high performance and system flexibility
Powerful Solution
The RSTi innovative design enables module power, communications and field power to be passed from one module to the next. Power Distribution, Power Booster and Field Power Isolation modules are available to simplify installation wiring. The RSTI compact design (99 mm high x 70 mm deep x 12mm wide for I/O) reduces panel space.
Global Standards
• CE, UL, CUL approved
• UL Class 1 Div 2 and ATEX Zone 2
• Temperature range -20°C to 60°C
• UL temperature range -20°C to 60°C
Flexible Network Interfaces
• PROFINET RT
• Modbus TCP/IP
• DeviceNet
• CC-Link
• PROFIBUS DP/V1
• Modbus Serial
• CANOpen
User Friendly Design
• Rugged, removable terminal block
• Tool-less spring clamp wiring
• DIN Rail “slide and lock” design
• Color coded identification
• Easy to read LED status
• Diagnostic test points
Over 80 Module Types
Available
• AC and DC I/O
• Relay Outputs
• Analog I/O
• RTD
• Thermocouple
• 2, 4, 8 and 16 point density
Specialty Modules
• Serial communications
• High-speed counters
• SSI interface
• PWM and pulse output
SVDC Module Power and
Communications
• Passed from one module to the next
Field Power
• Passed from one module to the next
GE’s high-performance PACSystems RSTi PROFINET enabled family of I/O modules are part of GE’s Intelligent Platforms
High Performance Platform strategy. The platform leverages industry standards plus the combination of experience in embedded technology and automation to deliver long-life and higher performance solutions that are easy to configure, manage and upgrade. Contact your local representative for more information about GE’s solutions for your I/O requirements.
F15
F
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Genius I/O System
General
The Genius I/O, a system of inherently distributed inputs and outputs, is designed to interface to any number of industrial controllers, including GE Intelligent Platforms PLCs, and third party CPUs. It can be used as the only I/O on a System or it can be mixed with the present rack-type I/O. Genius represents a complete rethinking of the role of I/O in industrial control.
Genius Blocks are UL, CSA, FM and CSA hazardous environment approved. The Genius I/O system was made possible through two key GE technological innovations:
Smart Switch: A device with the built-in current and voltage sensors required for the extensive diagnostics available with
Genius I/O. The smart switch allows detection of faults not only within the programmable controller I/O system, but also faults in the coils and other actuator devices under the control of the programmable controller, as well as the signal path from pushbuttons and other input devices. No other technology provides this level of fault detection.
Communications Controller: A token bus local area network controller which allows Genius I/O devices to communicate over a single-shielded twisted wire pair, rather than via bundles of point-to-point wires required in conventional systems.
The electronics assembly contains the power supply, communications chip, microprocessor, smart switches and other electronic components required to perform Genius I/O functions.
Each I/O Block is keyed to prevent the insertion of a nonmatching electronics assembly into a terminal assembly wired for a different power. Once inserted, the electronics assembly automatically reads the content of the EEPROM and initializes itself to match the configuration originally established for the I/O Block in that position. Table 1 lists the types of I/O Blocks currently available, as well as other basic system components.
Typical Genius I/O Unit
Genius I/O System Architecture
A simplified block diagram of the Genius I/O System is shown in Figure 2. The PLC, CPU and I/O rack shown are standard
Series 90-70 units. The Genius serial bus connects I/O Blocks with a single shielded twisted pair up to 7500 feet from the
Bus Controller.
Fig. 2. Genius I/O System Block Diagram
Genius I/O Block
A microprocessor-based, configurable, ruggedized solid-state device to which field I/O devices are attached. Measuring approximately 9" x 4" x 3", I/O Blocks can be mounted virtually anywhere, such as in a draw-out unit of a motor control center or pushbutton station where it is common to have one input and one output per motor circuit. No separate rack or power supply is required. Field wiring is attached to a terminal assembly which separates from the removable electronics assembly. Thus, field wiring need not be disturbed to service the electronics. Due to the microprocessor and intelligent switching, inputs and outputs may be mixed arbitrarily on blocks. There are no dip switches nor replaceable fuses.
An EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only
Memory) is located within the terminal assembly. The EEPROM stores all user-selectable options and retains these selections even during Power Off conditions. It can be read by the electronics assembly at any time and altered by commands from either the CPU or the Hand Held Monitor. The EEPROM is the only electronic device in the terminal assembly and has a long Mean-Time-Between-Failure (MTBF).
Fig. 3. Genius I/O Block Assembly
F16
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs)
The QuickPanel* View Family
The QuickPanel View bundled visualization solution provides the tools required for today’s application needs with a combination of bright touch screen displays, multiple communications options, and Proficy* View – Machine
Edition software.
Information Delivery
Acting as the bridge between the enterprise system and the plant floor, QuickPanel View provides information, not just data, that the operators need to run the machines, and that managment needs to run their business. The QuickPanel View is a critical link to a well-integrated manufacturing operation.
• Built on Microsoft Windows CE operating system
• Built-in web server access data and panel using any standard browser
Scalable
As your information requirements grow, so will your hardware needs. QuickPanel View products are exceedingly scalable to grow with your needs.
• Broad range of display sizes from 6" to 15"
• Choice of Monochrome, Color-STN, or Color-TFT display
• Expandable memory and communications options
• Easy configuration allows you to run the same program on different size models
Seamless Connectivity
As your need to monitor and collect data grows, you may need to connect to a wide variety of devices. Unless your operator interface has seamless connectivity, you may face delays and headaches. That is why QuickPanel View comes standard with a large number of built-in drivers to connect with the the world of automation devices, making it easy to connect to anything.
• Communication drivers over serial and Ethernet
• Communication over fieldbus and vendor specific networks through the addition of a communication expansion card
Other Advantages
We invite you to explore the advantages of QuickPanel View.
• Cost-effective replacement for push buttons and pilot lights
• Data collection, trending, system security and other functions
• Multi-language support
• Migration of applications developed with QuickDesigner*
• Adherence to global standards UL, ATEX, and CE
F
F17
F
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
PACSystems RXi Display/Panel PC
Multi-Touch Control and Widescreen Viewing of Industrial Processes
To succeed in an outcome-driven world, businesses must operate faster and leaner, and be increasingly connected.
At GE Intelligent Platforms, we’ve reimagined automation architecture to help you succeed in today’s business environment.
A pivotal point within this architecture is the displays for operators. GE Intelligent Platforms reconsidered every aspect of an industrial display when developing the
PACSystems* RXi Display. From the moment it is unpacked and mounted to when the operator touches its screen, the
RXi Display delivers a sleek and powerful user experience.
The RXi Display connects people and machines by combining the latest in touchscreen technology with a widescreen display to give operators an enhanced view into their processes. The result is quicker, smarter decisions based on real-time visualization.
When paired with the RXi Box PC, the RXi Display creates a high-performance system that lowers TCO with seamless replacement of either component and provides for powerful upgrades to the underlying computing technology.
High-Performance Display Technology
The RXi Display takes industrial displays into today’s connected world, combining design, durability, and power in an ultraslim package designed for the factory floor.
The RXi Display’s modular design means it is built for today — and tomorrow. It helps you design better machines and plants, operate them smarter, and redefine the interaction with your equipment.
GE knows that today’s rapidly changing industrial environment requires display and computing equipment that can evolve along with your operations. The RXi Display and RXi PC system doesn’t become obsolete — upgrade the
PC as chip technology accelerates. The result is increased performance and productivity, and decreased TCO.
User-Friendly Design Increases Productivity
The RXi Display was designed for ease of operation. For example, its front-mounted SD memory card slot can be accessed without opening the cabinet.
For fast and easy installation, the RXi family of displays offers a unique mounting system, designed to be completed by a single person without the need for special tools or fasteners.
Your system is up and running in minutes.
Enhanced Durability and Touchscreen Control
The RXi Display’s solid aluminum bezel design is built to last.
Its 9H-rated hardened projected capacitive multi-touch screen provides an intuitive, smartphone-like experience. The responsive, clear-glass display allows operators to efficiently navigate software in a variety of industrial environments.
Capacitive touchscreen technology is more resistant to physical damage and UV discoloration, and permits a higher degree of brightness and contrast as compared to standard resistive technology. This means you get clear, easy-to-see visualization of your process.
Feature
Widescreen Technology
Multi-Touch Screen Interface
External Memory Slot
Captive Mounting Hardware
Benefit
Allows operator to view more processes or information on one screen
Easier on-screen navigation enabling familiar smartphone-like experience
SD Card Slot can be accessed from front of panel without opening cabinet
One person can quickly install the display without special tools.
F18
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Intelligent MCC
envisage*
Energy Management System
envisage Monitoring
The envisage Monitoring module displays real-time power and demand data from remote intelligent energy devices as well as facility-wide infrastructure systems.
A birds-eye graphical site diagram provides a model representation of the complete facility and leads quickly to more detail in dynamic one-line schematics for the site location and even individual installed devices and monitored values. It keeps you completely and accurately informed of the system’s status in real-time – both locally and remotely – through customized views that aggregate and scale the information you need. Energy monitoring includes trend data from meters, relays, and breaker trip units in order to analyze the power system. It allows you to highlight and acknowledge unusual activity and alarm conditions with the real-time and historical alarm viewers to ensure that problems do not go unnoticed.
Typical Monitored Values
• RMS current
• Current demand
• Peak current
• RMS voltage
• KW and KWh
• Peak KW demand
• Apparent power (KVA) and apparent energry (KVAh)
• Reactive power (KVA) and reactive energry (KVARh)
• Power factor
• Frequency
• Event records
• Additional system parameters — water, air, gas, electric, steam, HVAC, backup power, security
• Switch position and breaker status
Typical Connected Devices
• Meters
• Trip units
• UPS
• Solar chargers
• CRAC units
• ATS
• PSG
• PDU
• Generators
• VFD
• PLC
• Proactive relays
• “Smart” power strips
F
Overview of entire network
F19
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Frequency AC Drives
General Application Notes
As a vehicle for controlling multiple motor functions, the
Motor Control Center has become the logical place to mount variable speed drives. However, the application of these drives is not a simple selection process, and the following is an explanation of some of the variables involved.
A drive must have ventilation. The basic power switching components are transistors, which are mounted on finned heat sinks. Although the drive may be operating at 95% or greater efficiency, the 5% (±) normal heat loss cannot be enclosed in the MCC without exceeding the safe operating temperature (50°C). Standard mounting is ventilated (NEMA
1 or 1A only).
A drive is electronically controlled. The new generation of
PWM drives are all microprocessor based. Although well shielded from stray noise, they require careful wire routing, and in some cases shielded wire runs to avoid “nuisance” problems. Control wires should be run separate from power leads. If they must cross, try to keep them at right angles to minimize the induced electric fields (noise).
motor using dampers or valving to reduce its output. (The amount of savings depends, of course, on the amount of time the motor can be used at the reduced speed.) It will also lower demand charges due to reduced motor starting current.
A drive creates noise on the power system. Although we use line reactors to minimize system disturbances, a drive will create harmonics on the power/system (both at the motor and at the transformer). If sensitive computer systems are to be utilized, they should be isolated from the drive’s source, or EMI/RFI filters added. Likewise, the harmonics created at the motor may cause the motor to run hotter than expected.
Standard motors should be derated 10% when used with a drive. We recommend high efficiency motors for drive applications as a minimum. See motor application data, SH, page G3.
A drive must have short circuit protection. Since a drive is subjected to higher available short circuit currents in an
MCC, (vs. a wall mounted unit) additional components such as current limiting fuses and reactors are utilized. See typical one line sketch.
Line Reactors
The available power source connected to the Drive is not to exceed 500kVA. If the AC power source is greater than
500kVA and the Drives rating (HP) is less than 10% of the power source's kVA; AC line reactors will have to be installed in L1, L2, and L3 power leads of the Drive. We provide 3% Line reactors as standard but they can be deleted as an option.
The drive internally has a DC reactor, which will protect the drive components.
A drive can provide significant energy savings. When a fan or pump is utilized on a system with variable flow rates, whether measured in gallons per minute or cubic feet of cooling air per minute, a variable speed drive is the most efficient means of control. Since a variable torque load requires significantly less energy when operated at lower speed, the energy savings can be in the 25 to 50% range when compared to a full voltage
Load Filters
IGBT drives create voltage spikes at the motor. Motor insulation rating must be higher than these peaks. Motor should meet
NEMA MGI part 31. If not, load filters may be required. Refer to page G4.
G
G1
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Series
Adjustable Frequency Drive
The AF-600 FP is an AC packaged drive that provides the functionality required for variable torque loads such as fans, pumps and compressors. Forward/Reverse and Simple commands from the local or remote keypad or from the facility management system, along with pre-loaded motor parameters and factory defaults, allow for quick and readyto-go installation. The E9000 offers expanded horsepower ratings in 230Vac (1/4 to 50Hp), 460Vac (1/2 to 500Hp) and
575Vac (1-500Hp) for even greater range of application.
The AF-650 GP Adjustable Frequency Drive with flux vector and dynamic torque-vector control using optimized control of voltage and current vectors provides the enhanced performance that you are looking for in your application. The
AF-650 GP process control systems will make any task simple and profitable. In addition, by adding an optional (encoder) speed feedback device, this drive can be configured to operate in a flux vector control mode. The AF-650 GP provides flexibility across a wide range of constant torque applications.
G
The AF-600 FP and AF-650 GP series have an array of functions that provides significant benefits. Standard features include: auto-tuning without having to rotate the motor, built in PID control, rotating motor pick up control (catch spinning motor), Standard RS485 (Modbus RTU), Metasys or Apogee
FLN P1 Communications, automatic energy-saving operation
(which minimizes drive and motor loss at light load) and other functions to combine performance and energy savings. The new generation IGBT means reduced electrical noise and less voltage spiking. On-line-tuning provides a continuous check for variation of motor characteristics during running of high-precision speed control. All drives conform with the following safety standards: UL, cUL, CE and C-Tick.
AF-600 FP
AF-650 GP
G2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP
Environmental Conditions
Enclosures IP20 Chassis, IP00 Chassis, NEMA 1 kit available
Installation Location Do not install in locations where product could be exposed to dust, corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, vapor, water drops or direct sunlight. There must be no salt in the atmosphere. Condensation must not be caused by sudden changes in temperature. For use ataltitudes of 3280 ft. (1000M) or less without derating.
Storage Temperature -25° to 65°C
Ambient Temperature -10° to +50°C (24 hour average max of 45°C)
Ambient Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration 1 g.
Cooling Method Fan Cooled all ratings. Fan Control Auto, 50% level, 75% level, 100% level adjustable
Standards / Approvals CE, UL, cUL, and C-Tick Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes for 230V and 460V
Input Power Supply
Rated Input AC Voltage 200-240 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 380-480 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-600 Vac, 3-phase,
50-60Hz, +/- 10% V, 525-690 Vac, 3-phase, 50-60 Hz, +/- 10% V
Maximum Voltage Imbalance 3% of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor > 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor > 0.98
Switching On Input Power Supply Maximum twice/minute up to 10HP, Maximum once/minute above 10HP
Environment According to EN60664-1 Overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
DC Link Reactors Built-In DC Link Reactors on all ratings
RFI Filters Built-In RFI Filters to reduce noise generated by the drive. Meets industrial standards.
Output
Rated Output Voltage 0-100% of supply voltage
Output Frequency 0-590 Hz; 0-590Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525/600/690 V above 50HP
Switching on output Unlimited
Accel/Decel Times 0.01-3600 seconds
Control Method Sinusoidal PWM Control (V/Hz, Avd. Vector Control, Sensorless Vector, and Flux Vector with motor feedback)
Control
Starting Torque 160% starting torque for 1 minute (constant torque), 110% starting torque for 1 minute (variable torque)
Carrier Frequency (Motor Noise Selectable - 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 kHz
Torque Boost AF650 GP-Selectable by up to 5 individual V/Hz settings in V/Hz Mode or by 0 - 300% setting of Torque Boost parameter in Adv. Vector Mode. AF600 FP- 0 - 300% setting to compensate voltage in relation to the load at low speed.
Acceleration / Deceleration Time 0.01-3600 seconds (4 acceleration and deceleration times are selectable via digital inputs. Acceleration and deceleration patterns can be selected from linear or S-curve).
Data Protection Password Protection for Quick Menu or Main Menu, 0-9999.
Pattern Operation Settings via Built-In Logic Controller Sequencer
Jump Frequency Control 4 jump (or skip) frequencies via parameter set to avoid mechanical vibration
Slip Compensation Maintains motor at constant speed with load fluctuations
Torque Limit Control Output torque can be controlled within a range of 0.0 to 160% (0.1 and steps)
Preset Speeds 8 programmable preset speeds selectable by 3 digital inputs
Built-In Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1
Trim Reference Setting Available for speed reference offset via potentiometer, voltage input, or current input
DC Injection Braking Starting frequency: 0.0-590 Hz, 0-590Hz for 460V above 100HP and 525-690 V above 50HP Braking time:
0.0-60.0 seconds Braking level: 0-100% of rated current
Jogging Operation Operation via On key or digital input (Fwd or Rev).
Auto-Restart After Power Failure Restarts the drive without stopping after instantaneous power failure
Energy Savings Controls output voltage to minimize motor loss during constant speed operation
Start Mode Function This functionality smoothly catches a spinning motor
Real Time Clock Built-In with programmable timed actions
Logic Controller (LC) Sequencer
Logic Controller Events Up to 37 types of Programmable Events
Comparators Array of 6 Comparators
Timers Array of 8 Timers, adjustable from 0.0 to 3600 sec
Logic Rules Array of 6 Boolean Logic Rules
Logic Controller States Array of 20 Logic Controller Action States
Process Controller (PID)
Process CL Feedback Select Up to 2 references. Selectable - No function, Motor Feedback, Separate Encoder, Encoder Option Module, or
Resolver Option Module
Process PID Control Normal or Inverse
Process PID Anti Windup Disabled or enabled
Process PID Start Speed 0.0-200 Hz
Process PID Proportional Gain 0.00-10.00
Process PID Integral Time 0.1 - 10000.0 ms
G3
G
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
Standard Specifications AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP
(continued)
Process PID Differential Time 0.0 - 10 s
Process PID Differential Gain 1.0-50.00
On Reference Bandwidth 0-200%
Operation
Operation Method Keypad operation: Hand, Off, Auto Digital Input: Programmable for Start/Stop, Forward/Reverse, Jog Timer operation: Stop after predetermined time frame. USB Port for programming drive with optional PC Software
Frequency Reference Signal Left or Right Arrow buttons on keypad in Manual Mode Speed Potentiometer: 0 to +10 Vdc, 10 to 0 Vdc,
0- 10Vdc analog input 0/4-20ma analog input
References Up to 3 Input References can be selected from Analog Input #1 or #2, Frequency Input #1 or #2, Network, or
Potentiometer
Input Signals Signals 6 - Digital Inputs, 24 Vdc PNP or NPN, 1 - Safe Stop Digital Input suitable for category 3 installations to meet EN-954-1, 2 - Pulse Inputs rated to 110kHz or 1 - Pulse Input and 1 - Encoder Input 24 Vdc rated to 4096
PPR 2 - Analog Inputs -10 to +10V scalable or 0/4 to 20 mA scalable. Digital Input Settings: No Operation, Reset after drive trip or alarm, Drive at stop with no holding current, Quick Stop according to Quick Stop Decel Time 1,
Stop on input going low, Start, Maintained Start after signal applied for Minimum of 2ms, Reversing, Start Reverse,
Enable Start Forward only, Enable Start Reverse only, Jog, Multi-Step Frequency selection (1 to 8 Steps), Hold Drive
Frequency, Hold Reference, Speed Up; activated by Hold Drive Frequency, or Hold Reference, Slow Down; activated by Hold Drive Frequency or Hold Reference, Drive Parameter Setup Select 1-4 Precise Start or Stop; Activated when drive parameter, precise start or stop function is selected, Catch Up or Slow Down; Activated by signal to add to or subtract from input reference to control speed,Pulse Input selectable from 100 - 110000Hz, Accel / Decel Time select.
Set Input to Accel / Decel Times 1 to 4, Digital Potentiometer Input Increase or Decrease, Mechanical Brake Feedback.
Output Signals 2 - Digital Outputs 24 Vdc (Digital Outputs are used in place of 2 of the Digital Inputs), 2 - Form C Relays rated to
2A at 240 Vac, 1 - Analog Output 0/4 to 20mA, Relay Output Settings : No Operation, Control Ready, Drive Ready,
Drive Ready in Remote, Standby No Drive Warnings, Drive Running, Drive Running No Drive Warnings, Drive
Running on Remote, Alarm, Alarm or Warning, At Torque Limit, Out of Current Range, Below Current, Above
Current, Out of Speed Range, Below Speed, Above Speed, Out of Feedback Range, Below Feedback, Above
Feedback, Thermal Overload Warning, Reverse, Bus OK, Torque Limit and Stopped, Brake and no Warning, Brake
Ready and No Faults, Brake Chopper Fault, External Interlock, Out of External Reference Range, Below External
Reference, Above External Reference, Fieldbus Controlling Drive, No Alarm, Running in Reverse, Local Mode Active,
Remote Mode Active, Start Command Active, Hand Mode Active, Auto Mode Active
Protective Functions Line Phase Loss, DC Overvoltage, DC Undervoltage, Drive Overload, Motor Overtemperature, Motor Thermistor
Overtemperature, Torque Limit, Overcurrent, Ground Fault, Short Circuit, Control Word Timeout, Brake Resistor
Short-Circuited, Brake Chopper Short-Circuited, Brake Check, DC Link Voltage High, DC Link Voltage Low, Internal
Fan Fault, External Fan Fault, Power Board Overtemperature, Missing U Phase, Missing V Phase, Missing W Phase,
Internal Fault, Control Voltage Fault, Auto Tune Check - Wrong Motor Parameters, Auto Tune Low Inom - Motor current is too low, Current Limit, Mechanical Brake Low, Drive Initialized to Default Value, Keypad Error, No Motor,
Keypad
Soft Charge Fault, Auto Tuning Fault, Serial Comms Bus Fault, Hardware Mismatch, Speed Limit.
Keypad Features LCD Display with 6 Alpha-numeric lines. Multi-Language Support, Hot Pluggable, Remote Mount Option, and
CopyCat Feature, IP65 rating when remote mounted on enclosure, LED’s - Green - drive is on, Yellow - indicates a warning, Red - indicates an alarm, Amber - Indicates active Menu keys and H-O-A keys
Keypad Keys Status - shows status of drive, Quick Menu - Enters Quick Start, Parameter Data Check or Trending Modes, Main
Menu - Used for programming all drive parameters, Alarm Log - Used to display Alarm list, Back - Reverts to previous step or layer in parameter,structure, Cancel - Used to cancel last change or command, Info - Displays information about a command arameter, or function in any display. Hand/Off/Auto - Used to control drive locally or put drive in remote mode, Reset - Used to reset Warnings or Alarms.
Password 2 Level Password Protection
Alternate Motor Parameters Up to 4 Separate complete parameter set-ups are available
Graphical Trending Trend Speed, Power, Frequency or any value programmed in status display
RS485 Modbus RTU Serial
Communications
Physical Level EIA/RS485
Transmission Distance 1640 ft (500m)
Node Address 32
Transmission Speed 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,or 115200 (bits/s)
Transmission Mode Half Duplex
Transmission Protocol Modbus RTU
Character Code Binary
Character Length 8 Bits
Error Check CRC
Special AF650 FP Modes
Fire Override Mode Overrides drive’s protective features and keeps motor running
Pump Cascade Controller Distributes running hours evenly over up to 4 pumps.
Sleep Mode Drive detects low or no flow conditions and adjusts output
Dry Pump Detection Detects pump operation and can set off alarm, shuts off, or other programmed actions
Belt Monitoring Drive can detect relationship between current and speed to recognize a broken belt
G4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Standard Options
Line Reactor 3% Reactor is standard with the drive
DC Link Reactors Standard with drive
Class AFII RFI Standard with drive
Speed Control The unit comes with a Keypad that can be used for Speed adjustment.
Outputs Relays Drive come standard with two relays form C rated to 2A at 240 VAC.
Outputs Analog Drive comes standard with 1 Analog output 0/4-20mA
Outputs Digital Drive comes standard with 2 Digital outputs at 24 VDC (Digital Outputs are used in place of the 2 Digital inputs.
Communications Drive RS-485, Modbus RTU, Metasys N2, or Apogee FLN P1
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Additional Options
Line Reactor 5% Reactor must be requested and priced
Speed control Door mounted potentiometer must be requested and priced.
Communication Module
Profibus Profibus DP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. Supports Profibus DP V1 communications networks.
DeviceNet DeviceNet internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. ODVA certified device.
Ethernet IP Ethernet IP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP. ODVA certified device. Features 2-Port built-in switch. Also includes webserver and email notification. 1Requires I/O and network slots and cannot be used with any other network or I/O modules
Modbus TCP Modbus TCP internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP.
ProfiNet RT ProfiNet RT internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP & AF-600FP.
LonWorks LonWorks internal mounted module for use on AF-600 FP drives only. Supports LonWorks building automation communications networks
BacNet BacNet internal mounted module for use on AF-60 FP drives only. Supports BacNet MSTP building automation communications networks.
Relay Output Relay Output internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP. Module adds (3) Form C relay outputs to the drive. Relays are rated at 2A at 240V resistive load.
Analog I/O Analog I/O internal mounted module for use on the AF-600 FP drive only. Module Includes: 3 - Analog Inputs
0-10V, 0/4-20mA & 3 - Analog Outputs 0-10V, Battery Back-Up power for AF-600 FP’s internal Real Time Clock
24V DC External Supply 24V DC External Supply internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP & AF-600 FP drives. This module accepts an external 24V DC supply which is used to keep the control board of the drive and other option modules powered in the event of a Line side power outage. Can be used with Communications and I/O Modules.
General Purpose I/O General Purpose I/O internal mounted module for use on AF-650 GP and AF-600 FP drives. Module includes:
3 - 24V Digital Inputs, 2 - PNP/NPN Digital Outputs, 2 - 0-10V Analog Inputs & 1 - 0/4-20mA Analog Output
Encoder Encoder internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP. Module supports all 5V incremental encoders.
Also supports Hyperface SinCos encoders.
Resolver Resolver internal mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. Module supports 4-8Vrms, 2.5kHz - 15kHz,
50mA resolvers. Resolution is 10bit at 4Vrms.
Safe PLC I/O Safe PLC I/O internal drive mounted module for use on the AF-650 GP drive. This module provides a safety input based on a single pole 24V DC input.
G
G5
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
Space Height & Assembly
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Space Height, 42 kAIC
Function Plug-In
Max HP GP/FP CT/VT @
230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V
5/5
10/15
25/40
3/3
5/7.5
15/15
40/60
5/5
10/10
20/25
60/60
/75
40/
50/60
75/
/75
100/125
200/250
75/
100/125
150/200
300/
Disconnect
Basic ,LR,
Bypass
& Isolation
X
X
X
208V
5/5
10/15
25/40
40/
50/60
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT
SFLI, SFLT
SELI, SELT
SFLI, SFLT
SGLI. SGLT
SGLI. SGLT
(1) Section 2 will always be on the left and bottom mounted. All Space height is based on all main bus sizes.
(2) When line reactors are not required consult factory for dimensions.
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs
Section 1
Width X Height
24
24
30
15
15
15
30
24
24
30
30
2.5
3
4
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 42KAIC@ 480V
Section 2
Width X Height
15
15
24
30
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.5
G
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Space Height, 65 kAIC
Function Plug-In
X
X
X
X
X
X
Max HP GP/FP CT/VT @
230/240V 380/415V 440/480V 575/600V
3/3 3/3 5/5
10/10
10/15 15/15 20/25
20/25
15/20 30/30 40/50
40/50
25/40 40/60 60/75
60/75
40/ 75/
/75 100/125
75/100
100/
200/250
350/350
150/
300/350
500/500
500/500
Disconnect
Basic &
LR
208V
3/3
10/15
15/20
25/40
40/
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT, TECL
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT, TECL
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT, TECL
SELI, SELT
SELI, SELT, TECL
SELI, SELT
SFLI, SFLT
SELI, SELT, TECL
SFLI, SFLT
SGLI, SGLT
SKLI, SKLT
SGLI, SGLT
(1) Section 2 will always be on the left and bottom mounted. All Space height is based on all main bus sizes.
(2) When line reactors are not required consult factory for dimensions.
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 65KAIC@ 480V
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 65KAIC @ 600V for all buckets rated 575/600 V
30
30
30
24
24
24
30
Section 1
Width X Height (3)
15 2
15
15
15
15
15
24
24
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
6
6
Section 2
Width X Height (1)
20
24
24
3
6
3.5
G6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
Space Height & Assembly
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Space Height, 100 kAIC
Function
Basic ,LR,
Bypass with
J-Fuse (2)
Plug-In
X
X
X
208V
5/5
15/20
40/
50/60
Max HP GP/FP CT/VT @
230/240V 380/415V 440/480V
5/5
15/20
40/
50/60
3/3
5/7.5
30/30
75/
100/125
200/250
5/5
10/10
40/50
Disconnect
SEPI, SEPT
SEPI, SEPT
SEPI, SEPT
SEPI, SEPT
SFPI, SFPT
75/ SEPI, SEPT
100/125 SFPI, SFPT
150/200 SGPI, SGPT
300/350 SGPI, SGPT
Width
15
15
15
30
30
24
24
36
36
Section 1
X Height (3)
(1) Section 2 will always be on the left and bottom mounted. All Space height is based on all main bus sizes.
(2) When line reactors are not required consult factory for dimensions.
(3) Pilot devices may impact the X height on certain plug-in HPs
2.5
3
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
4.5
5.5
Minimum UL short-circuit rating 100KAIC@ 480V
Section 2
Width X Height (1)
15
15
15
30
1.5
1.5
3
4.5
Six Pulse VFD Generic Block Diagram
Rectifier
(SCR/DIODES)
Intermediate
Circuit
L1
L2
L3
Inverter
Section (GBTs)
T1
T2
T3
Power Section
Soft Charge Circuitry
Logic to Power Interface
Control Logic
G
G7
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
Drive Configuration in Motor Control Center Construction
Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Required for Disconnect
STAB
(1)
CB
STANDARD VFD
(2)
REACTOR
VFD (3)
*
MOTOR
VFD WITH
LINE ISOLATION
STAB
(1)
CB
(2)
REACTOR
VFD (3)
*
MOTOR
G
VFD WITH
BYPASS FEATURE
STAB
(1)
CB
(2)
REACTOR
VFD (3)
*
OL
MOTOR
VFD WITH
LINE ISOLATION
PLUS BYPASS FEATURE
STAB
(1)
CB
(2)
(1) Drawout breaker through 600A
(2) J Fuse as required
(3) DC link reactor (choke) included in drive
* Load Filter option
REACTOR
VFD (3)
*
OL
MOTOR
G8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
Harmonic Filters
GE offers two basic filter types in MCC construction: Matrix and Dynamic Current Injection. Consult factory for sizing.
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters provide broadband reduction of harmonics. They not only offer better performance over other broadband filtering and 12- and 18-pulse harmonic reduction techniques, they also are suitable for a wider range of applications. Matrix Harmonic Filters can be installed in either variable or constant torque drive applications and can be applied on either a six pulse or half-controlled rectifier. For applications other than variable torque, contact the factory for filter selection.
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters enable most AC drive systems to comply with the voltage and current distortion limits outlined in IEEE 519. A complete harmonic analysis and product selection tool is available at www.gedigitalenergy.com.
Select Digital Energy > HV/MV Equipment > Capacitors > LV
Power Factor Correction > Matrix Harmonic Filter or simply use this “link”.
GE Matrix Harmonic Filters are multi-stage low pass filters specially configured to avoid the attraction of harmonics from other sources on a shared power system. They will not cause power system resonance. However, the configuration of the filter requires that only drives or equivalent loads be loaded on the output. One filter can be used with multiple drives, but if there is a drive bypass circuit, there must be one filter per drive and the filter and drive combination must be bypassed.
GE GEMActive Dynamic Current Injection Filters for harmonic cancellation and power factor correction:
• Reduce harmonics for IEEE 519 (1992) standard compliance
• Decrease harmonic related overheating of cables, switchgear and transformers
• Reduce downtime caused by nuisance thermal tripping of protective devices
• Increase electrical network reliability and reduce operating costs
• Compensate each phase independently
• Are UL approved
• Offer parallel connection for easy retrofit and installation of multiple units for large networks
• Filter to the 50th order harmonic
• Filter entire network or specific loads depending on installation point
• Respond to load fluctuations in 40 microseconds with 8 milliseconds for full response to step load changes
• Feature IGBT based power electronic technology
• Come in 50, and 100A models for 208-480V, 50/60 Hz, three phase networks that can be paralleled to match load requirements
GE GEMActive reduces problematic harmonic levels and provides instantaneous power factor correction. Cost savings result from reduced downtime and maintenance. In addition, over-sizing of distribution equipment to provide for harmonics and poor power factor can be avoided. GE
GEMActive dynamically corrects power quality by providing:
Active Harmonic Filtration, Resonance Prevention, Power
Factor Correction and Dynamic VAR Compensation
G
G9
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
Adjustable Speed Drives
Motor Application Data
Select the proper motor using the data from motor application brochures, identify the motor full load current and select the inverter which meets or exceeds the motor full load current requirements.
Harmonic Derating
AC motors have traditionally been applied as constant speed motors, so there is little published information on reduced speed efficiencies, especially when operated with a non-sinusoidal supply such as an inverter. The harmonics present in the PWM inverter output increase motor losses and thus motor heating. GE Energy Saver* motors, designed for high efficiency and improved thermal characteristics, may be applied at nameplate rating for variable torque duty, such as centrifugal fans and pumps, for 4 and 6 pole ratings.
Standard AC motors designed for 60 Hertz operation should be derated 10% for variable torque duty. For constant torque applications, Energy Saver and standard design motors should be applied per Fig. 1. For other applications refer to the Company.
100
ENERGY $AVER TYPE KE
STANDARD K
2. Motor Speed Range
Motor synchronous speed is determined by the following equation:
Frequency
Sync. Motor Speed = 120 X Applied
Number of Motor Poles
Induction motors operate at a somewhat slower speed than synchronous speed due to slip, which is generally 2-3 percent of synchronous speed.
If the application requirements call for higher or lower speeds than can be obtained by using standard motors following these application guidelines, gear increasers or reducers should be considered.
3. Multi Motor Drives
Multiple motors can be driven simultaneously by one drive unit. In order to select the proper inverter, total the individual motor full load currents and multiply the sum by a factor of 1.1. Select the inverter than can deliver the total current calculated. Each motor will require individual overload relays, when switched independently RTF.
Fig. 1
0
VARIABLE
TORQUE
% SPEED
100
CONSTANT
TORQUE
CONSTANT
HORSEPOWER
150
How to Select Drives
1. Types of Load
In selecting inverters, load patterns of machines should be known in advance. Generally, loads can be categorized into the three types shown below. Estimate or obtain the point marked 0 as indicated.
This defines maximum torque and the maximum or minimum speed requirement of the driven equipment. Calculate the required motor HP by substituting the maximum torque and rated motor base speed in equation (1).
4. Acceleration Time
Acceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for a faster acceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual time to accelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the acceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.
(Wk
2
X ΔN)
TA =
308 (T X 1.2)
Where:
TA = Time to accelerate the driven load (in seconds).
ΔN = Change in speed (in RPM)
WK
2
= The total system inertia reflected to the motor shaft.
Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.
2
)
T = Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)
When using a drive in a conventional constant speed machine application where a full voltage starter has been used, the acceleration time should be set longer than the original machine. This is because the maximum allowable current that the AF-650GP drive can deliver is 150 percent of rated current, while full voltage starters deliver 600-800 percent. This means that the drive delivers a “soft start” and thus reduces starting torque over that of a full voltage starter, which naturally yields a longer acceleration time.
SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% SPEED HZ 100% 150%
MOTOR SPEED (MAX.)
(1)HP = TXN
5250
HP = Required HP
T = Torque in lb./ft.
N = Speed in RPM
MOTOR SPEED
(ZERO)
ACCELERATION TIME
ADJUSTABLE
TIME
G10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Adjustable Speed Drives
How to Select Drives
(cont.)
Application consideration for AF-650GP and AF-600FP drives:
5. Deceleration Time
Deceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for faster deceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overvoltage or overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual time required to decelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the deceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.
(Wk 2 X ΔN)
308 (T X .2)
Where:
TD = Time to decelerate the driven load (in seconds).
ΔN = Change in speed (in RPM)
Wk 2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor Shaft.
Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.
2 )
T =Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)
If faster deceleration is required, refer to the Company.
Cable & Motor Considerations for AF-6 Drives
A primary concern in recent years has been for wiring between adjustable speed drives and motors. This is because voltage spiking, seen at the motor terminals at the switching frequency can cause damage to the motor insulation. This spiking depends on several factors such as drive input voltage level, drive output wave-form dv/dt, length of the cabling from the drive to the motor and characteristics of the cabling used, etc.
In addition, there are secondary effects related to drive/motor wiring that impact performance such as parasitic capacitance.
Max. cable lengths between drive and motor without filters
Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V
AF-650GP & AF 600FP 460V Input 49 ft. (15M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)
AF-650GP & AF 600FP 230V Input 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M) 984 ft. (300M)
• PWM IGBT drives are not typically recommended with
1000Vac insulation Motors.
• Load filters are recommended from 984 ft. when motor insulation level is 1300V or above.
• Custom motors are available for applications not listed.
• Contact motor manufacturer or your GE Energy representative.
Peak Voltage Insulation Rating (Horizontal, 60 Hz Only)
Frame
140
180
210
250
280
320
360
400
440
500
ODP-KE TEFC-KE XSD-KS
1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1000V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1300V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1300V P-P 1000V P-P 1300V P-P
1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1300V P-P
1300V P-P 1300V P-P 1300V P-P
1300V P-P 1300V P-P N/A
ODP = Open-Dripproof, TEFC = Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled,
XSD = Extra Saver Duty, ASD = Adjustable Speed Drive
XSD-IEEE841-KS ASD-KAF
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
1600V P-P
Caution: If existing motors are used, condition of insulation must be checked and manufacturers insulation rating as well. Load filters may be required.
Drive input voltage, motor insulation and cable length are beyond the scope of the drive design. The following guidelines were compiled for your convenience.
System Filtering
The use of a properly sized filter can reduce the voltage peaks and rise times seen at the motor. The filter must be properly sized and located. If the filtering is done with reactors it must be placed close to the motor terminals. If the filtering is with
LRC (Inductance, Resistance and Capacitance) it must be placed at the output terminals of the drive.
G
G11
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT XT
Digital Soft Starters for 3ph
Standard Induction Motors
GE´s new ASTAT XT solid state soft starter features microprocessor control digital technology. Setup and adjustment is performed through a six-button keypad and parameters or messages are displayed out trough a friendly LCD multilanguage interface with two rows, sixteen alphanumeric characters each. The design includes isolated
I/O and high level of protection in their circuits to minimize the disturbance effects while working in the hardest industrial environment.
ASTAT XT soft starter offers reliable performance and smooth acceleration for a variety of standard AC motors up to 1400A and up to 690V, reducing mechanical shock to the driving system, resulting in extended component and motor life.
ASTAT XT offers many traditional features such a motor overload function, adjustable ramps, current limit, kick start, but also other high end features like Inside-Delta operation,
Torque control, Pump control and a reliable motor and unit set of protections.
G
Key features
• Ratings up to 1400Amps and up to 690VAC
• Friendly multilanguage interface with two rows, sixteen characters each
• Built-in with three extra power terminals for external bypass
• In-Line or Inside-Delta operation modes
• Torque control and pump control advanced features
• Motor protection according IEC 10, 20 and NEMA 10, 20,
30, even if ASTAT XT is in bypass
• Built-in communications RS485 port, and ModBus protocol as standard
• ProfibusDP and DeviceNet optional interfaces for communications
ASTAT XT
For units up to 820A. “U” type.
ASTAT XT Control Panel
G12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT XT
Technical Data
Ratings
Main Voltage
3ph AC supply 230 to 500Vac +10%, -15% for QT1xxx units
460 to 600Vac +10%, -15% for QT2xxx units
690Vac +10%, -15% for QT3xxx units
Starter Current Rating
3ph AC motors
Motor Current Rating
3ph Induction motors
Control Voltage
1ph AC supply
Frequency Range
50/60Hz systems
Digital Inputs Voltage
From 8A up to 1400A
Motor rated current from 50% to 100% of starter current
230VAC, +10, -15%, 50/60Hz or 110VAC, +10, -15%, 50/60Hz (optional)
Wide from 45Hz to 65Hz. Auto-tracking frequency range
90-230Vac, +10 -15%, 50/60Hz or 24Vdc, +10%, -15% (optional)
Control Specifications
Control System
Operation Mode
Run Operation
Digital control with microcontroller. Starting ramp, with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation.
In-Line (three wires) or Inside-Delta (six wires) of the motor
Soft Start and Soft stop by multiple choices, including torque control both at start or Stop phases
Operator Interface
By LCD display, keypad and Indication
— LEDs Display: LCD with two rows, 16 characters each
— Type: Multilanguage, dip-switch selectable for English, Italian, Spanish and German
— Keys: Six keys, Mode, reset, Set, Select and Up / Down
— LEDs: ON, Start, Run, Soft Stop, Stop, Save / Slow Speed, Dual Set / Reverse and Fault
Initial Voltage
Starting Current
10-50% Un. Up to 80% with expanded settings function
100-400% In. Can be extended up to 500%, by using extended settings
Acceleration Ramp Time
1-30 sec. Can be extended up to 90 sec, by using extended settings
Deceleration Ramp Time
1-30 sec. Can be extended up to 90 sec, by using extended settings
Current Limitation
100-400% of motor rated current. Can be extended up to 500% by using extended settings
Bypass
Monitoring
By external contactor while motor is full protected by ASTAT XT
Motor current, line voltage, motor thermistor resistance, test and maintenance and statistics
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
-10°C up to 60ºC, with current derating by 2.5% per °C, from 50ºC
Storage Temperature
Maximum Altitude
-20ºC up to 70ºC
Up to 1000 mts. Ask your dealed for installation at higher altitude
Humidity
Protection Degree
Pollution Degree
95% at 50ºC or 98% at 45ºC
IP20 for units up to 72A, IP00 for units from 85A up to 1400A
Class 3
Standards
Global Standards
EMC Emissions
Immunity
Safety
CE for the full trange. UL, cUL for specifi ed units up to 820A
EN 61000-6-4 CISPR 11 Class A
EN 61000-6-2 ESD 8KV air, IEC 801-2; Electric RF fi eld 10 V/m, 20-1000Mhz, IEC 801-3; Fast transients 2KV, IEC 801-4
EN 600947-1 Related to safety requirements; UL508C
G
G13
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
ASTAT XT
Functions
Available Standard Functions
Soft Start and Soft Stop
ASTAT XT is provided with a soft start and soft stop features, including fi ve independent acceleration and decelertaion curve models.
The factory default curve is used for general purpose, other three are used for pump control and the last one for torque control.
Pump Control
Torque Control
Specific function for pump control, that avoids overpressure in the system at the end of acceleration phase and suppresses the hammering at stopping phase.
Provides a smoth time controlled torque ramp acceleration and deceleration, with linear deceleration of the torque resulting in a close to linear speed deceleration, thus eliminating stall conditions.
In Line / Inside Delta
ASTAT XT allows either traditional Line operation or Inside Delta operation. When the ASTAT XT is installed to operate Inside Delta, the individual phases of the starter are connected in series with the individual motor windings (six wiring connections like the Start-Delta starters), thus reducing the current x1.73, and allowing the use of a much smaller starter (x1.5 less than motor rated current).
Bypass
Kick Start
ASTAT XT allows bypass operation using an external contactor, controlled ON/OFF by starter function EOR (End Of Ramp).The
starter is provided with three dedicated power terminals to facilitate wirings to the bypass contactor. ASTAT XT protections to motor are enabled, even in bypass.
This function allows to start high friction loads that require high starting torque for a short period of time. When this function is enabled, a pulse of 80% Un during an adjustable time from 0 to 1 sec. is given to the motor. After this pulse the output voltage is ramping down to starting voltage setting, before ramping up again to full voltage.
End of Ramp
Detects end of acceleration and outputs a signal by a dry relay contact. This signal can be delayed by an adjustable timer from 0-120 sec.
Lock-out
Dual Settings
Allows to control the number of startings into a period of time, then protecting both motor and ASTAT.
By this function, ASTAT XT is able to control a secondary motor dual setting of starting voltage, starting current, durrent limit, ramp up, ramp down and motor current parameters can be selected by using one of the programmable ASTAT XT inputs.
Energy Saving
Activated when the motor has a light load for extended periods of time, then reducing the output voltage level and decreasing the reactive current and motor copper/iron losses. This function can be enabled or disabled by dedicated parameters in ASTAT XT.
Slow Speed
Auto Reset
Cooling Fan Control
Generator Supply
Function that allows the motor to run at 1/6 constant rated speed, for a short period of time of maximum 30 sec.
This function supports forward and reverse operation.
This function allows the ASTAT XT automatic recover after a fault caused by undervoltage, undercurrent or phase lost.
Auto-reset can be programed up to maximum 10 attempts.
Allows three methods of control for the ASTAT´s built-in cooling fans:
— Continuous operation
— Controlled by an external input
— Automatically OFF controlled, after five minutes ASTAT XT is stopped
This is a specific function useful when the starter is powered from a diesel generator rather than from commercial power supply.
The function is enabled by an internal dip switch, and helps to minimize the negative effects caused by the generator´s voltage fluctuations during starting.
Keypad Lock
This function is enabled by means of starter´s internal dip switch, then locking the keypad. This is usefull to prevent undesired parameter modifications.
Built-in Communications ASTAT XT includes a ModBus RTU communications protocol. Communications are carried out through a half duplex RS485 port, with maximum baud rate of 9600, supporting up to 247 stations.
Statistic Data
ASTAT XT records useful data for maintenance and start up:
— Last 10 trip events.
— Statistical data like number of starts, number of trip events and elapsed RUN time.
— Last trip data information of motor current, starting current and acceleration time.
Motor and Starter Protection
Overload
Motor Thermistor
Too Many Starts
Long Start Time
O/C JAM Fault
Undercurrent
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Phase loss
Frequency loss
Phase sequence
Slow speed time
Wrong connection
Shorted SCR
Over temperature
External fault
Wrong parameters
OC or wrong CON
Digital control with microcontroller. Starting ramp with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation.
In-Line (three wires) or Inside-Delta (six wires) of the motor.
Soft start and soft stop by multiple choices, including torque control both at start or stop phases.
Trips if output voltage does not reach rated voltage at the preset maximum start time.
Trips under the following conditions:
— Instantaneously when current exceeds 8.5 x ASTAT XT current
— During starting when current exceeds 8.5 x motor current
— During running when current exceeds 200-850% of motor current, O/C JAM has a programmable triping delay of 0-5 sec.
Trips when line current drops below the preset level for the preset time.
Trips when line voltage drops below the preset level for the preset time.
Trips when line voltage increases above a preset level for a preset time.
Trips if 1 or 2 phases are lost.
Trips if frequency is not in the range of 40-66.6 Hz.
Trips if line phase sequence is wrong.
Trips when operating at slow speed for extended periods.
Trips the ASTAT XT when one or more motor phases is not properly connected to ASTAT XT’s load terminals or if there is an internal disconnection in the motor winding.
Trips and prevents starting if any SCR is short-circuited or when motor windings are shorted.
Heat-sink over-temperature. Trips the ASTAT XT when the heat-sink temperature rises above 85°C.
Trips the ASTAT XT when a NO contact between terminals 19-21 closes for over two seconds.
Parameters not transferred from RAM to EEPROM or vice versa.
Trips when the ASTAT XT is connected Inside Delta and wrong connection or overcurrent is detected.
G14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT XT
I/O Wiring, Basic Scheme
Note: Profibus or DeviceNet options cannot be ordered separately. For those communication networks, please order the ASTAT XT with the required option built-in.
G15
G
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Overload Protections
Thermal Characteristics
The ASTAT XT allows motor protection according IEC Class 10 or Class 20 and NEMA 10, 20 or 30.
User free selectable by ASTAT internal dedicated parameter.
IEC Class 10
Sec.
10000
IEC Class 20
Sec.
10000
1000
100
COLD
10
HOT
1
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
Multiples of motor FLA Rating In
1000
100
COLD
10
HOT
1
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
Multiples of motor FLA Rating In
G
NEMA 10
Light Duty
Sec.
10000
1000
100
COLD
10
HOT
1
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
Multiples of motor FLA Rating In
NEMA 20
Sec.
10000
1000
100
COLD
10
HOT
1
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
Multiples of motor FLA Rating In
NEMA 30
Sec.
10000
1000
100
COLD
10
HOT
1
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
Multiples of motor FLA Rating In
Maximum Number Starting/Hour
Starting Current
I/In
➀
2
3
4
10s
24
16
12
Ramp Time
20s
12
8
6
30s
8
5
4
➀ In= rated current of ASTAT XT in the specified class IEC/NEMA
G16
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT BP
Digital Soft Starters for 3ph
AC Induction Motors
The ASTAT BP soft starter delivers reliable performance and smooth acceleration and deceleration on 3 phase AC induction motors from 8A-1100A at 208V-400V or 460V-600V. It reduces mechanical wear and tear on motors and also can reduce peak energy demands by limiting the current to motors at startup.
Features
• Offers current and torque control
• Has multiple soft start and stop curves to meet a variety of applications
• Comes with built in NEMA Class 10, 20, 30 or IEC Class 10 or
20 overload
• Features full text programming
Ratings
• Current ratings
— 8A, 17A, 31A, 44A, 58A, 72A, 85A, 105A, 145A, 170A,
210A, 240A, 310A, 360A, 414A, 477A, 515A, 590A, 720A,
840A, 960A, 1100A
• Line voltage
— 3ph, 208V to 440V, 50/60Hz (QB1x)
3ph, 460V to 600V, 50/60Hz (QB2x)
• Frequency range
— 45Hz-65Hz, auto-tracking frequency range
• Control voltage
— 120V or 240V, +10% / -15%
(specified at through catalog number)
Environmental Conditions
• Networks
— Modbus RTU as standard
• Standards
— UL and cUL
• Ambient Temperature
— -10ºC to 50ºC
• Altitude
— 3300ft or 1000m (consult factory)
• Protection degree
— Open Chassis / IP20 to 44A,
Open Chassis / IP00 58A and above
ASTAT BP
G
G17
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
ASTAT BP
Technical Data
General Information
Supply Voltage
Frequency
Control Supply
Control Inputs
Load
Connection Type
Rated Insulation Voltage
Line to line 208-600V (to be specified) + 10%-15%
45 – 65 Hz (fixed or variable frequency source)
Either 110VAC or 230VAC (to be specified) +10% - 15%
Either 90-230VAC - Must be the same as Control Supply
Three phases, three/six wires, squirrel cage induction motor
Standard 3 wire U, V, W connection, or 6 wire Inside Delta (programmable)
1,000V
Rated Impulse Voltage
Form Designation
4kV
Form 1 (Bypassed Controller)
Start-Stop Parameters
Starter Current
Motor Current
ASTAT-BP’s rated current according to its nameplate
Motor Full Load Ampere of Starter Current
Start/Stop Curve 0 (Standard)
2 standard starting and stopping curves
Pump Control Curves (1!, 2!, 3!) 6 field selectable curves preventing over-pressure during start and water hammer during stop
Torque Control Curve (4)
Kick Start Duration
2 selectable curves preventing over-pressure during start and water hammer during stop. In addition, these curves may be used for torque control starting of constant torque applications
A pulse of 80% Un, for an adj. time 0.1-1 Sec, for starting high friction loads
Starting Voltage
Initial Current
10-50% Un (5-80%)
100-400% In. A single current control starting curve. It appears when Starting Voltage is displayed, the up arrow is pressed and Starting Voltage has reached its max.
Current Limit
Ramp UP Time
Ramp DOWN Time
DUAL Settings Parameters
Slow Speed Torque
100-700% of Motor Current
1-30 Sec (1-90 sec)
1-30 Sec (1-90 sec)
Secondary start stop characteristic for: Starting Voltage, Starting Current, Current Limit, Ramp UP, Ramp DOWN and
Motor Current
Torque while motor is at 1/6 nominal speed
Motor Protection
Too Many Starts
Starts Inhibit
Maximum number of starts, range: Off or 1-10, during a time period 1-60 min.
Time period 1-60 min, when starting is prevented, after too many starts fault
Long Start Time (stall protection) Maximum allowable starting time 1-30 sec. (1-250 sec)
Over Current (JAM Fault)
Three trip functions:
— At all time
If I > 850% of Starter Current (Ir) it trips the ASTAT-BP within 1 cycle (overrides the value of the O/C – JAM Delay setting).
— At starting process
If I > 850% of Motor Current it trips the ASTAT-BP after O/C JAM Delay (see here after)
— At run time
If I > O/C – JAM Fault setting of Im it trips the ASTAT-BP after O/C JAM Delay
Electronic Overload
Under Current
Under Voltage
Can be set as IEC Class 10, 20 or NEMA Class 10, 20 or 30.
Can be set to operate at all times, disabled or operate during Run only.
Trips when current drops below 20-90% of Motor Current, time delay 1-40 sec. Optional auto reset after time delay
Trips when main voltage drops below 50-90% of Line Voltage, time delay 1-10 sec. Optional Auto Reset.
Over Voltage
Phase Loss,
Under/Over Frequency
Phase Sequence
Long Slow Speed Time
Wrong Connection
4Trips when main voltage increase above 110-125% of Line Voltage, time delay 1-10 sec.
Trips when one or two phases are missing, or frequency is < 40Hz or > 65Hz. Optional auto reset.
Trips when phase sequence is wrong
Trips if operating at slow speed TRQ for more than 1-30 sec (1-250 sec)
Prevents starting, trips if motor is not connected / incorrectly connected to the ASTAT-BP
(not active in D.Set: Generator Parameters)
Shorted SCR
Trips if one or more SCRs have been shorted (not active in D.Set: Generator Parameters)
Heat Sink Over Temperature
Trips when heat-sink temperature rises above 85°C
External Fault
Motor Thermistor
Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.
Trip level setting 1-10K, trips when resistance decreases below the level set
G18
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT BP
Technical Data
(continued)
Control
Displays
Keypad
Aux Contact – Programmable
Fault Contact
Communication
Communication (Optional)
Temperatures Operating
LCD in 4 – Field selectable languages and 8 LEDs
6 keys for easy setting
1 NO, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA
1 NO, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA
RS 485 with Modbus protocol for full control and supervision
Profibus DPV1 for full control and supervision
DeviceNett* for full control and supervision
-10° to 60°C; For ambient temperature between 50°C and 60°C, derate the current by 2.5% for each °C that is above 50°C
-20° to 70°C
Storage
Standards
Dielectric Test
Degree of Protection
Pollution Degree
EMC Emissions
Immunity
2500VAC
IP 20 for QBx0008 - QBx0044 ; IP 00 for QBx0058 – QTx1100
3
EN 61000-6-4 CISPR 11 Class A
EN 61000-6-2 ESD 8KV air, IEC 801-2;
Electric RF field 10 V/m, 20-1000Mhz, IEC 801-3
Fast transients 2KV, IEC 801-4
Safety
Rated Operational Current
Normal Service Conditions
UL508C
AC:53a:3.5-30: 50-4
Altitude
Humidity
Up to 1000m
95% at 50°C or 98% at 45°C
Fan and Control Consumption Ratings
QBx0008 to QBx0170
— No fan
QBx0210 to QBx0477
— Fans 50 VA
QBx0515 to QBx0840
— Fan 50 VA
QBx0960 to QBx1100
— Fans 110 VA
Total approximate consumption: 35VA
Total approximate consumption: 85VA
Total approximate consumption: 100VA
Total approximate consumption: 160VA
G
G19
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
ASTAT XT
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT XT with no
Features
ASTAT XT with no
Features
& J Fuses
Stab
_
Stab
_
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0105
0145
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0650
0820
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0650
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SKLT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SFLT
SFLT
SFLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SKLT and L Fuses
SELT
SFLT
SFLT
SFLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
50
60
100
125
20
25
30
40
3
7.5
10
15
150
200
200
2
150
200
200
50
60
100
125
20
25
30
40
200V
2
3
7.5
10
15
Horsepower➀
230V 460V 575V
2 5 5
60
75
100
150
25
30
40
50
5
10
15
20
150
200
250
2
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
250
10
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
IC (kA) @
460V
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
Section
Width
20" + 30"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"
30"
20" + 30"
20"
20"
30"
30"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.
X-Height
3.5
4
4
4
4
4
5.5
5.5
4.5 + 4.5
4.5 + 3
2
2
2
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3
3
4.5
4.5
3
3
3
3
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
2
2
2
G20
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT XT – Type 1
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT XT with no
Features
ASTAT XT with
Bypass
Feature
ASTAT XT with
Bypass
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with
ISO &
Bypass
Feature
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
200V
25
30
40
50
60
75
5
10
15
20
100
150
150
200
250
100
150
150
200
250
2
40
50
60
75
5
10
15
20
25
30
150
200
250
2
20
25
30
40
200
250
2
5
10
15
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
150
150
30
40
50
60
Horsepower➀
230V 460V
2
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
40
50
60
75
400
500
5
10
20
30
100
125
150
250
300
50
60
75
100
125
150
10
20
30
40
250
300
350
400
500
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
350
400
500
5
➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.
Section
Width
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
20"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
IC (kA) @
460V
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
60
75
100
150
150
200
15
25
40
50
300
400
400
400
500
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
400
400
500
5
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
575V
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
X-Height
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.5
5.5
6+2
6+4
6+4
6
6
6+3
6+5.5
6+5.5
2.5
4
6
4
4
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
6+2
6+4
6+4
2.5
4
4
4
4.5
4.5+3
4.5+3
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
G
G21
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
ASTAT XT – Type 1
(continued)
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO,
Bypass
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with
J or L
Fuse
Feature
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0390
0460
0580
0820
200V
IC (kA) @
460V
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
250
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
250
2
5
10
15
20
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
75
100
150
150
20
25
30
40
50
60
200
250
2
150
200
250
2
5
10
15
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
Horsepower➀
230V 460V 575V
2
5
5
10
5
15
10
15
20
25
20
30
40
50
25
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40
50
60
75
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
Section
Width
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
30"
30"+20"
30"+20"
➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.
X-Height
2
2
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
3
6+3
6+3
2
6+3
6+5.5
6+5.5
2
2
2
2.5
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
4
4
3.5
3.5
6
6
6
5+2.5
5+4.5
5+4.5
2
2
2
2.5
2.5
4
5.5
4.5+4.5
4.5+4.5
G22
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT XT – Type 12
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT XT with no
Features
ASTAT XT with
Bypass
Feature
ASTAT XT with
Bypass
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with
ISO &
Bypass
Feature
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0105
0145
170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
200V
25
30
40
50
60
75
5
10
15
20
100
150
150
200
250
100
150
150
200
250
2
40
50
60
75
5
10
15
20
25
30
150
200
250
2
20
25
30
40
200
250
2
5
10
15
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
150
150
30
40
50
60
Horsepower➀
230V 460V
2
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
40
50
60
75
400
500
5
10
20
30
100
125
150
250
300
50
60
75
100
125
150
10
20
30
40
250
300
350
400
500
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
350
400
500
5
➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.
Section
Width
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
30"
30"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
IC (kA) @
460V
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
60
75
100
150
150
200
15
25
40
50
300
400
400
400
500
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
400
400
500
5
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
575V
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
X-Height
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.5
5.5
6+2
6+4
6+4
6
6
6+3
6+5.5
6+5.5
2.5
4
6
4
4
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
6+2
6+4
6+4
2.5
7.5
7.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
3
2
2
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
3
3
3.5
3.5
G
G23
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
ASTAT XT – Type 12
(continued)
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO,
Bypass
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO
Feature
ASTAT XT with ISO
& J or L
Fuse
Feature
ASTAT XT with
J or L
Fuse
Feature
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0310
0145
0170
0210
0310
0390
0460
0580
0820
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0390
0460
0580
0820
200V
IC (kA) @
460V
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
250
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
250
2
5
10
15
20
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
75
100
150
150
20
25
30
40
50
60
200
250
2
150
200
250
2
5
10
15
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
Horsepower➀
230V 460V 575V
2
5
5
10
5
15
10
15
20
25
20
30
40
50
25
40
50
60
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
50
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
100
125
150
250
300
350
400
500
5
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40
50
60
75
60
75
100
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
150
150
200
300
400
400
400
500
5
15
25
40
50
15
25
40
50
60
75
100
Section
Width
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
15"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
30"+20"
➀ All ratings are based on a selection of Normal Duty or Class 20 overloads. See operators guide for more rating options.
X-Height
3
3
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5+2.5
7.5+3
7.5+3
2
6+3
6+5.5
6+5.5
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
2.5
2.5
2.5
3
3
3
4
4
3
4
4
5.5
5.5
4
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5+2.5
7.5+4.5
7.5+4.5
2
2
2
3
3
5.5
7.5+2.5
7.5+4.5
7.5+4.5
G24
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
ASTAT BP
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT BP with no
Features
ASTAT BP with ISO
Features
ASTAT BP with ISO
& J or L
Fuse
Features
ASTAT BP with J or L
Fuse Features
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
Stab
—
SKMCS
SKMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
SEMCS
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFL*/SFP*
SFL*/SFP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SGL*/SGP*
SKL*/SKP*
SKL*/SKP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SEL*/SEP*
SFMCS
SFMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SGMCS
SKMCS
SKMCS
0515
0590
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0240
0310
0360
0414
0477
0414
0477
0515
0590
0008
0017
0031
0044
0058
0072
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0240
0310
0360
Power Unit Size /
Current Rating
0008
0017
0310
0360
0414
0477
0515
0590
0008
0017
0031
0044
0031
0044
0058
0072
0085
0105
0145
0170
0210
0240
0145
0170
0210
0240
0310
0360
0414
0477
0515
0590
200V
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
IC (kA) @
460V
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
25
40
50
60
500
600
5
15
75
100
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
5
15
25
40
400
450
500
600
50
60
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
575V
5
15
300
350
400
450
500
600
5
15
25
40
75
100
125
150
25
40
50
60
200
250
10
15
20
25
200
-
2
5
30
40
75
100
-
125
30
40
50
60
150
-
2
5
10
15
150
-
200
-
20
25
50
60
75
100
20
25
30
40
-
125
50
60
75
100
-
125
150
-
200
-
Horsepower
230V 460V
2
5
5
10
-
125
150
-
200
-
2
5
10
15
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
75
100
250
300
350
400
450
500
5
10
20
30
60
75
100
125
20
30
40
50
150
200
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
20
30
40
50
450
500
5
10
60
75
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
5
10
20
30
350
400
450
500
40
50
100
125
150
200
40
50
60
75
250
300
24"+20"
24"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
24"
24"
15"
15"
15"
15"
24"
24"
24"
24"
24"+20"
24"+20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
24"
15"
15"
20"
20"
20"
24"
24"
24"
24"+20"
24"+20"
Section
Width
15"
15"
24"
24"
15"
15"
20"
24"
24"
24"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
15"
20"
20"
X-Height
5
5
3
3
5
5
5
5
5.5+4.5
5.5+4.5
5.5+4.5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
2.5
5.5+4.5
6
6
6
6
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
5
5
5.5+2
5.5+2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
3
3
2
2
2.5
2.5
5
5
2
2
6
6
3.5
4
4
4
2
2
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
3.5
3.5
G25
G
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
G
Solid-State Starters
Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect
ASTAT-BP Integrated By-Pass Space Requirement
Starter Type and
Feature
ASTAT-IBP
ASTAT-IBP with
J Fuses
ASTAT-IBP with
Isolation
& J Fuse
Stab
—
Stab
—
Circuit Breaker
Frame
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SFLT
SGLT
SELT
SELT
SFLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SGLT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SELT
SFLT
SGLT
Power Unit
Size
M
Z
N
K
L
Y
P
Q
R
S
N
P
Q
R
S
Y
M
Z
S
K
L
P
Q
R
M
Z
N
K
L
Y
30
40
50
15
20
25
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
60
75
100
125
60
75
100
125
15
20
30
40
50
15
20
25
Horsepower
200V 230V 460V 575V
40
50
➀
60 ➀
75
100
125
150 200
200 ➁ 300
250 ➂ 300
300
➂
40
350
50
50
➀
60
➀
75
60
75
75
100 125
125
150
150
200
200
➁
300
250 ➂ 300
300 ➂ 350
40
50
60
➀
➀
50
60
75
75
100
125
75
125
150
150 200
200 ➁ 300
250
➂
300
➂
300
350
50
60
75
75
125
150
30
50
60
20
25
25
25
30
50
60
75
100
100
150
75
100
100
150
75
100
100
150
20
25
30
50
60
20
25
25
➀ Use M power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.
➁ Use S power unit for 450% for 30 sec. Heavy Duty rating.
➂ Standard Duty only
IC (kA) @
480V
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
42
42
42
Section
Width
20"
20"
20"
20"
24"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
24"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
20"
24"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
24"+ 20"
20"
20"
X-Height
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.5
5
3.5
3.5
4
5
5.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5 + 2.5
5
4 + 2.5
4 + 2.5
4 + 2.5
3.5
3.5
3
4
5
3
3
3
Run C-2000 Contactor
The ASTAT-BP is supplied with a bypass contactor across the entire product line. Refer to factory if NEMA contactors are required.
G26
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Solid-State Starters
Reduced-Voltage, 300/450%
ASTAT SS Starters Standard Duty (300/450% selectable)
Function
SSS
BASIC
SSS with
Isolation
SSS with
Bypass
Isolation
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
➀
HP @
200/208
.1-3
5-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40
50-60
75
100
125-150
.1-3
5-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40
50-60
75
100
125-150
HP @
230/240
.1-3
5-7.5
10-15
20
25-30
40-50
60-75
100
125
150
200
.1-3
5-7.5
10-15
20
25-30
40-50
60-75
100
125
150
200
200-250
➀
250-300
➀
.1-3
5-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40
50-60
75
100
125-150
.1-3
5-7.5
10-15
20
25-30
40-50
60-75
100
125
150
200
200-250
➀
250-300
➀
HP @
380/50HZ
.1-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40-50
60
75
100-125
150
200-250
300
.1-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40-50
60
75
100-125
150
200-250
300
400-500
.1-7.5
10
15
20-25
30
40-50
60
75
100-125
150
200-250
300
400-500
➀
➀
HP @
460/480
.1-10
15-20
25
30-40
50
75
100
150
200
300
350
400
500
.1-10
15-20
25
30-40
50
75
100
150
200
300
350
400
500
.1-10
15-20
25
30-40
50
75
100
150
200
300
350
400
500
QC2KDP
54.8 A
QC2MDP
91.3 A
QC2QDP
187.0 A
QC2SDP
321.7A
QC2TDP
413.0A
QC2UDP
547.8A
QC2GDP
13.9 A
QC2IDP
27.8 A
QC2KDP
54.8 A
QC2MDP
91.3 A
QC2QDP
187.0 A
QC2SDP
321.7A
QC2TDP
413.0A
SSS Cat# FLA
@1.15 SF
QC2GDP
13.9 A
QC2IDP
27.8 A
QC2KDP
54.8 A
QC2MDP
91.3 A
QC2QDP
187.0 A
QC2SDP
321.7A
QC2TDP
413.0A
QC2UDP
547.8A
QC2GDP
13.9 A
QC2IDP
27.8 A
QC2UDP
547.8A
➀ Application rated C2000 contactors. NEMA size is used as a reference to horsepower only.
➁ 65/85KAIC rating is with fuses.
SELT
SELT
Disconnect IC (kA)
➁
Section 1
Width
Section 2
Width
X-Height
Stab
In
25 20” 2X
SELT
— 20” 2.5X
100
SFLT
SGT
SKT
65
20”
24”
30”
30”
30”
36”
36”
20”
20”
20”
20”
4X
5X
3X 5.5X
3X 5.5X
5.5X
3X 5.5X
5.5X 5.5X
SFLT
SGT
SKT
SFLT
SGT
SKT
Stab
In
—
Stab
In
—
42
65
42
65
20”
20”
24”
30”
30”
36”
20”
20”
24”
30”
30”
36”
20”
20”
20”
20”
2.5X
3X
5X
5X
5X 3.5X
5X 3.5X
2.5X
3.5X
5X
5X
5X 3.5X
5X 3.5X
G
G27
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Solid-State Starters
Standard Reduced-Voltage, Nonreversing with Primary Disconnect
Options
1. Solid-State Starter with Isolation Contactor
2. Solid-State Starter with Bypass Contactor
G
3. Solid-State Starter, Isolation & Bypass
G28
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Solid-State Drives & Starters
Solid State Drives & Starters
Arc Flash Mitigation (AFM)
The E9000 AFM units are designed to reduce the likelihood of exposure to electrical shock and the potential of internal arcing faults from occurring during maintenance. The retractable stab mechanism allows for closed-door racking of the unit, providing added protection to the electrical personnel from the dangers of an arc flash occurrence.
For more information see page D2 and GE Publication DEA-593.
.
AFM Solid State Drives & Starters
Unit Type
ASTAT-BP
(Internal Bypass)
ASTAT-XT
(External Bypass)
VFD-GP
(Constant Torque)
VFD-FP
(Variable Torque)
Rating @ 480V (hp)
5-30
40-50
60-100
5-20
25-50
0.25-5
5-10
10.1-20
20.1-40
0.25-5
5-10
10.1-25
25.1-50
C2000 Standard Unit Height (in)
18
24
30
24
30
36
18
24
30
36
18
24
30
G
G29
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Spectra RMS* Mag-Break*
Motor Circuit Protectors
Interchangeable Rating Plug
Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors use the same snap-in rating plugs as fully configured (long-time trip function) Spectra RMS circuit breakers. Each rating plug defines the range of instantaneous-trip settings available to the circuit breaker through its trip setting adjustment.
Spectra RMS Mag-Break Trip Unit Characteristics
Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provid positive, reliable and cost-effective instantaneous, with tracking short-time overcurrent protection to those circuits where long-time overload protection is supplied by thermal or solid-state overload devices.
Trip Setting Adjustment
The solid-state instantaneous-trip circuitry of the Spectra
RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors has a single, multiposition adjustment at the front of each breaker. Changes in settings vary the instantaneous-trip and tracking short-time characteristics. The Mag-Break motor circuit protectors differ from a fully configured circuit breaker by only providing an instantaneous and tracking short-time trip function.
Motor Circuit Short Circuit Protection
When a squirrel-cage induction motor is energized, a high value of magnetizing inrush current flows for the first few cycles, followed by a substantial reduction in current flow while the motor accelerates to its rated speed. When plotted on a time current curve, the motor current has three distinct regions – for the first five to eight cycles, typical magnetizing inrush currents are approximately ten times the full-load motor current (but can be much greater for high efficiency motors). Between 0.10 and 10 seconds, the magnetizing inrush current drops to approximately five to six time the full-load motor current. After approximately 10 seconds, the motor reaches its full speed and the current quickly decreases to the full-load current of the motor.
Accessory Pockets
Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors have the same accessory pockets and use the same internal accessories as Spectra RMS circuit breakers. This important capability allows field modification of Mag-Break units with shunt trip,undervoltage release, bell alarm or auxiliary switch accessories,in any combination, without affecting the
UL Listing status.
Optimum motor protection for the first two regions of the motor time current plot would involve a two-tiered protection scheme with a high value of current tolerated for a few cycles, followed by a lower,sustained trip setting.
Spectra RMS Rating Plugs
Use of the same UL Listed interchangeable rating plugs for both Mag-Break and fully configured Spectra RMS circuit breakers expands the flexibility of the entire Spectra RMS family of products. The advantages of interchangeable rating plugs with Spectra RMS circuit breakers are inherent to
Spectra RMS Mag-Break units, which permit wider ranges of motor ratings to be protected by a given breaker frame size.
This is exactly the protection that is offered by the Mag-Break motor circuit protector. This two tiered protection scheme prevents nuisance tripping due to magnetizing inrush current, without compromising superior short circuit protection during motor acceleration. Protection for the third region of the motor time current plot is accomplished via the motor starter’s overload relay.
H
SE150 Spectra RMS Mag-Break
Motor Circuit Protector
H1
H
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
The time current curve below illustrates this motor protection scheme. Curve A and the shaded area directly above it represents the region of operation that will produce permanent damage to either the motor, its feeder conductors or both.
Curve B represents the trip characteristics of the motor starter’s overload relay, which provides both long-term overload and stall protection but does not protect the system from short circuits in either the motor or its feeder conductors.
Curve C is a plot of the motor current during a worst-case start (e.g., low line voltage, highest load torque, etc.). Curve D represents the trip characteristics of the Mag-Break motor circuit protector — with this addition, the motor and its feeder conductors are now fully protected against short circuits.
Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector Ratings
The table below lists rating plugs available for each Mag-Break motor circuit protector frame size. Instantaneous trip settings are listed under electrical data on page 21 and UL interrupting ratings are shown on page 28 (per UL 489, motor circuit protectors are not marked with interrupt ratings). Except for
3 amp and 7 amp plugs, all other rating plugs are used in both circuit breaker and Mag-Break motor circuit protectors .
Motor Circuit Protection Using Mag-Break
Motor Circuit Protectors
Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector and
Rating Plug Current Ratings
Frame
SE-Frame
SF-Frame
SG-Frame
SK-Frame
Maximum Amperes
7①
30
60
100
150
250
400
600
800
1,200
Available Rating Plugs, Amperes
3 & 7
15, 20, 25 & 30
40, 50 & 60
70, 80, 90 & 100
110, 125 & 150
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 & 250
125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350 & 400
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 & 600
300, 400, 500, 600, 700 & 800
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 & 1200
① The 7-amp frame and the 3A and 7A rating plugs are used only with the
Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protector.
H2
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches
Construction. The family traditions of ruggedness and dependability are continued in the Spectra RMS molded case switch line. These units provide a circuit disconnect function using the compactness of molded case circuit breaker construction. The operating handle actuates all three poles of the switch using the same common trip bar of Spectra
RMS circuit breakers and Mag-Break units.
Termination Lugs. Snap-in termination lugs used with SEand SF-Frame Spectra RMS circuit breakers are used interchangeably in Spectra RMS molded case switches.
SG- and SK-Frame molded case switches use the same bolt-on termination lugs used with Spectra RMS circuit breakers.
External Accessories. The full range of external circuit breaker accessories offered for use with Spectra RMS circuit breakers and Mag-Break motor circuit protectors, are available for molded case switches. In addition, plug-in bases, motoroperated mechanisms, mechanical interlocks, and the full complement of external handle operators (STDA, TDR and TDM) are available for use with Spectra RMS molded case switches.
Fixed-Trip Setting. The Spectra RMS molded case switches are equipped with a fixed Hi-set instantaneous trip setting whose values are shown in the table below.
Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch
Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Applications
Molded case switches are inherently horsepower-rated. By virtue of the UL489 six-times rated-current overload test, they can be used as motor circuit disconnects where overload and short-circuit protection are provided by other protective devices.
Spectra RMS molded case switches are most commonly used as a disconnect in main, feeder, or starter applications in combination with fuses.
All Spectra RMS molded case switches are UL Listed and tested per UL Standard 1087 for molded case switches.
Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Fixed-Trip Setting
Molded Case
Switch Frame
SE-Frame
SF-Frame
SG-Frame
SK-Frame
Maximum Ampere
Rating
100
150
250
400
600
800
1200
Fixed-Trip Setting RMS Amperes
Nominal ±20%
2100
2450
5600
6000
12,600
12,700
H
H3
H
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Heavy Duty Fusible Disconnects
QMW Fusible Switch
Spectra Molded Case Switch (MCS) 400 & 600 Amp
A growing number of industrial applications with high available short-circuit current has made switch fuse coordination increasingly important. In addition, there has been a growing number of requirements for 400 amp and above applications, including Ground Fault, Annunciation and Remote Tripping.
The Evolution E9000 MCC supports these requirements by incorporating Spectra Molded Case Switches with separate fuse blocks for all 400A and 600A applications. The same accessories used in the Spectra Circuit Breaker can be used in the MCS. In addition to ease of accessorizing, the MCS saves space.
Withstand capability – Safety and reliability depend on the interrupting capacity of both the switch and the switch-fuse combination. While switch-fuse interrupting ability is limited by the maximum current the fuse will interrupt, it is also determined by the maximum let-through energy the switch will withstand as the fuse clears a short circuit.
QMW Fusible Switch (30-200 Amps)
The QMW Fusible Switch is a premium heavy-duty disconnect switch. It was developed to meet the most rigorous industrial requirements. It meets or exceeds all industry standards for withstand capability and interrupting ratings, and it is UL listed for use in Evolution MCC.
The switch must remain operable after the fuse has cleared.
Switch withstand capability rating is determined by the maximum energy the switch can withstand (and remain operable), stated as ampere-squared seconds, l
2 t.
Interrupting Capacity – In addition, the switch may have to interrupt a wide range of currents without assistance from the fuse, including normal switching-duty currents (up to fullload rating), overload and motor “jogging” currents (up to 10 times motor full load) or intermediate fault currents (usually arcing faults–from overload to near full-system available).
Previously, basic switch design criteria has been primarily concerned with interrupting normal switching and motor starting currents. New applications require a switch capable of interrupting intermediate fault currents without assistance from a fuse. For maximum protection, a switch should be able to interrupt any current on which it can be closed and reopened before the fuse blows. This is commonly called
“fuse racing.”
H4
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
New Generation High Pressure Contact
(HPC) Switches
The new generation HPC switch is based on the time-proven platform of the Power Break* II circuit breaker. Now, it’s
ArcWatch-enabled to provide a better Arc Flash hazard mitigation solution. The new generation HPC builds on the abilities of the original HPC by utilizing the features of the
Power Break II (PBII) circuit breaker. In addition, the new generation GE HPC utilizes the EntelliGuard* control unit which incorporates many of the features of the EntelliGuard Trip
Unit for GE circuit breakers. The new generation GE HPC switch is available in frame ratings of 800, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000 and 4000A, both top and bottom feed, with IC ratings to 200kA with the appropriate UL Class L fuses. The new generation HPC switch is available for new installations and for retrofit, to replace the older GE HPC. By retrofitting with the new generation HPC switch, remote operation of the switch through the motor operators, shunt trips with lockouts, RELT and the Adjustable IOC for continuous reduced incident energy can be added in the same footprint as that of the older existing switch.
Features and Benefits
• Top or Bottom Feed
— 800-4000 Amperes 600 Volts ac Max
• High Durability–Safety of Operation
— High-dielectric strength, glass reinforced insulating case
• High Interrupting Capability
— Arc chute of unique construction suppresses arcs and cools gases rapidly, providing quick arc interruption and extended switch life
• High Transient Voltage Withstand Capability
— Interphase partitions mesh with switch cover to completely isolate each pole
• Extended Switch Life
— Preloaded constant pressure pivot eliminates braid whip and fraying on high short-circuit currents and repeated operations
• Positive “ON-OFF” Indication
— Green (OFF), Red (ON), eliminates any question about the position of the switch contacts
• Easy Operation Quick Make
• Emergency Open–Quick Break
— Finger-tip “OFF” button instantly opens the switch contacts
• Fuse Mounting Bolts with Captive Washers for Ease of
Mounting Fuses
• Padlocking Provisions Standard
In addition, the new generation GE HPC utilizes the EntelliGuard* control unit which incorporates many of the features of the
EntelliGuard Trip Unit for GE circuit breakers:
• Built-in metering, waveform capture and Modbus communications
• Ground fault protection or alarm, optional GF disable
• GE’s patented WFR Adjustable Selective Instantaneous protection
• RELT Alternate Adjustable fast instantaneous setting, remote operable and with positive status feedback
• Zone-Selective operation for GF that works with all circuit breaker trip platforms and includes four different
GF curve shapes
• Instantaneous Zone-Selective operation that works with upstream EntelliGuard Trip Units and EntelliGuard control units
RELT Control Schematic
H
H5
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
Power Break II Insulated Case Circuit
Breakers
General Description
The GE line of Power Break II insulated case circuit breakers offers the rugged, reliable type of system protection critical for heavy-duty applications. In
Evolution Series E9000 MCC, Power
Break II circuit breakers are rated up to 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity without fuses or current limiters. In Evolution E9000
MCC, the Power Break II design consists of 800, 1600, 2000, and 2500 Amp frame sizes.
Power Break II is a versatile breaker, designed for a wide variety of applications with features such as temperature insensitive trip units, push-to-open and -close buttons, standard padlocking provision, maximum three-cycle closing time, field installable rating plugs to change ampere ratings, UL listing, plug in field installable accessories, and easy-to-operate two stage pumphandle, stored-energy operating mechanism capable of change after close.
EntelliGuard* TU Trip Unit
GE’s EntelliGuard TU is the trip unit with the built-in flexibility required to match your system’s needs, whether for optimum safety, optimum system reliability or both at the same time. The EntelliGuard TU trip unit provides the industry’s most advanced instantaneous protection without compromising system selectivity.
Standard Features for Exceptional Flexibility
• Highly flexible time current settings
— up to 22 Long Time Delays
— up to 22 (fuse shaped) Long Time
— up to 14 Short Time Delay bands
— 3 Short Time slopes (I
2
T)… novel GE feature
• Selective Instantaneous algorithm (WFR)…novel GE feature
• Ammeter
• Large backlit LCD screen
①
• Breaker status indication
• Universal rating plugs – less plug inventory
• Status and event log (10 Events)
• Date and time event stamping
①
• LED health status indicator
①
• Free set-up software
• Discrete I/O
①
• Thermal memory, battery back-up
• Common interface across all versions
• Mechanism self-timing… novel GE feature
Optional Full-function Metering
• Current (Amps, kAmps)
• Voltage (Ph-Ph, Ph-N)
• Energy (kWh, MWh, GWh)
• Real power (kW, MW)
• Total power (kVA, MVA)
• Frequency (Hz)
• Demand (avg. kW, MW) and peak demand
Options
• Internal/external ground fault trip or alarm with 4 curves to select from (I
2
T, I
4
T, special selective GF curve, and definite time slope)
①
• Switchable ground fault trip / alarm (now password protected and UL Listed)
• Modbus RTU communications
①
(Profibus also available for
EntelliGuard G)
• Waveform capture for harmonic analysis
• Full-function metering
①
• Protective relaying
①
(see list of functions below)
• Zone-Selective-Interlocking for GF, ST, Instantaneous
(I-ZSI)
①
…novel GE feature
• Threshold Zone-Selective-Interlocking for ST and Instantaneous (T-ZSI)
①
…novel GE feature
• Built-in Zone-Selective-Interlocking test capability…novel
GE feature
• RELT – Reduce Energy Let Through
①
• RELT and ground fault alarm harness kits
• Test Set GTUTK20
• Digital Test Kit Software, available December 2013
Optional Protective Relaying Functions
• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage
• Voltage unbalance
• Current unbalance
• Power reversal
• Power direction setup
① Some options require 24VDC additional hardware to enable Metering, Relaying, RELT,
ZSI, Modbus to be added to the breaker, equipment cubicle and equipment sections.
H6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers
Features
Spectra RMS
SE150, SF250, SG600 and SK1200 circuit breaker frames have a digital, solid state, RMS sensing trip system with field installable, front-mounted rating plugs to establish or change the breaker ampere rating. Adjustable instantaneous with tracking short-time is standard on all frames. The trip unit uses digital sampling to determine the RMS value of sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal currents. See more at: http://www.geindustrial.com/products/circuit-breakers/ spectra-rms-electronic-trip#sthash.fmoX8l9f.dpuf.
A complete circuit breaker consists of a UL Listed circuit breaker frame and a rating plug (UL Listed interchangeable trip breaker unit). Terminal lugs for cable connection are available if required.
• All frames use the same UL listed, field installable internal accessories (auxiliary switch, shunt trip, undervoltage release and bell alarm).
• All frame sizes have maximum UL listed interrupting ratings of 200 kA @ 240 volts AC and 100 kA @ 480 volts AC with
600 volts AC ratings to 65 kA depending on frame size.
UL listed current limiting versions are provided through the SG600 frame for the 65 kA @480 volts AC and the
100 kA @ 480 volts AC models, with no increase in physical frame size.
• Spectra RMS Mag-Break instantaneous-only motor circuit protectors also use the same digital, solid state trip unit and rating plugs as the circuit breakers. The interchangeable rating plug establishes the instantaneous pickup range (with tracking short-time) but does not change the frame ampere rating.
• Spectra RMS molded case switches have a fixed, high-set instantaneous trip (without tracking short-time function) and have short circuit withstand ratings equal to their equiva- lent breaker frame size interrupting rating in most cases.
• RMS breakers are ambient insensitive. Trip times will not vary over the range 10-50° breaker ambient .
• Spectra RMS breakers contain no parts that would support fungus growth and are, therefore, inherently fungusproof.
Other MCCB Features
• Broad product line to meet virtually any application need.
• Reduced downtime. A tripped breaker is easily spotted and can be immediately reset after the fault has been corrected.
• Eliminates single phasing. A common trip bar disconnects all poles simultaneously on both overloads and short circuits.
• Offers application flexibility through the use of a wide variety of accessory devices and special attachments.
• Repetitive operation — no fuses to replace.
• Breakers can be repetitively tested. Fuses must be destroyed to confirm calibration accuracy.
Reference – GET-7002 for further application information.
The add-on limiter coordinates with the Spectra thermal magnetic trip to allow normal tripping functions at standard ratings with backup limiting at high short-circuit levels for
150A frame Spectra circuit breakers
H
H7
H
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers
Features
microEntelliGuard* Trip Unit
The microEntelliGuard trip unit is the newest and most advanced trip unit available in the Spectra* line of molded case circuit breakers. Based on the EntelliGuard TU trip platform, the new microEntelliGuard trip unit allows you to select the enhanced system protection, coordination, metering and communications options required for the application. New features include enhanced time-current adjustability, Ground Fault Alarm, Neutral Protection,
Zone Selective Interlock (ST/GF/INST), and direct Modbus communications. Other features that enhance system protection and diagnostics include long-time thermal memory, waveform capture, programmable output contacts, and an LED “Health” status indicator.
Standard Features
• Adjustable Long-Time pickup and delay bands with three curve shapes (MVT I
2 t, CB and Fuse I
4 t) for optimal system coordination (includes thermal memory for enhanced system protection)
• Adjustable Short-Time pickup with multiple delay bands, curve slopes, I
2 t IN/OUT, and OFF setting
• Adjustable Instantaneous pickup
• 3-Phase ammeter
• Backlit LCD display with five-button tactile keypad and sealable, clear LEXAN cover for tamper resistant settings
• LED Status Indicator to show “health” of trip unit
• Trip Target indication and local pickup warning signal
• Interchangeable/universal rating plugs
• Test set jack for GTUTK20 test kit
• True RMS sensing for accurate response to high harmonic content waveforms
• EMI immunity per ANSI C37.90
Optional Features
• Ground Fault (Trip or Alarm) pickup and delay bands with multiple slopes, I
2 t IN/OUT for optimal system coordination
• Neutral Protection provides overload protection on the system neutral
• Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) capability on Short Time,
Ground Fault and Instantaneous settings for optimal system coordination and selectivity
• Reduced Energy Let-Through (RELT) setting for enhanced equipment and personnel protection
• Advanced metering option includes the ability to monitor current, voltage, energy, frequency, power factor, power
(real/reactive/apparent) and peak power demand
• Modbus communications system with user selectable address assignment for communicationdirectly with
EnerVista Viewpoint power system monitoring software
• Waveform capture for enhanced system diagnostics
• Protective Relays for enhanced system protection
–Voltage Unbalance
–Current Unbalance
–Under Voltage
–Over Voltage
–Power Reversal
–Load Alarm
• Input relay for RELT signal or remote tripping of the breaker
• Two programmable output relays for enhanced signaling and diagnostics
• Control Power option provides connection capability for
+24Vdc control power via the distributioncable system
Other Features
• UL Listed for reverse feed and HACR type (standard)
• UL Listed 100% continuous current rating (optional)
• UL Listed Current Limiting (optional on SG Frame)
• Internal Accessories (Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Release,
Auxiliary Contacts, Bell Alarm) – UL Listed for field installation and common across the entire line of
Spectra RMS breakers
H8
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Ground Fault Current Detection Systems
Model BGFL (Relay)
Trip Currents 5-60, 30-360, or 100-1200A
Description
These Class 1 Model BGFL ground fault relays and sensors form a system for detecting a ground fault current on a ground ac power system. When a ground fault exceeds a pre-selected current level and time delay setting, the relay initiates a trip signal for a shunt trip disconnect device to open and clear the fault. This BGFL system provides protection for electrical equipment, not for personnel.
Operating range: Trip currents of 5-60, 30-360, or 100-1200A. Time delay from
0.10 to 1 second (adjustable).
Input power: 2 VA plus shunt coil requirements. Rated @ 120 Vac.
Input withstand: 200,000 Amperes RMS for 3 cycles, 50/60 Hz.
Nominal input voltage: 120 Volts ac, 125 Volts dc, 24
Volts dc, 48 Volts dc.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Ambient temperature range: -30°C to +60°C
Only for use with GFL sensors.
Approximate weight 1.5 lbs.
• Meets NEC service entrance equipment standards.
• Available in three basic styles: Standard, Form C or Zone
Interlocking for coordination of single or multiple ground fault devices in system.
• Integral test panel with Push To Test and Shunt Trip Bypass pushing for ease in proper operational testing of the system, with or without tripping the protective device.
• Power On LED indicator in cover.
• Positive visual trip indicator, manual reset.
• Infinitely adjustable Time Delay.
• Discrete current threshold adjustment.
• Panel or door mounting.
• Rear terminal kit and clear plastic cover standard with door mounting.
• Electromechanical relay output, positive ON and OFF.
• Operates with molded case and power circuit breakers, bolted pressure switches, fusible disconnect switches.
Contact Rating
Device Input Power Inrush Cont.
120 Volts ac 10A 3A
125 Volts dc
48 Volts dc
24 Volts dc
1A
4A
8A
1A
4A
8A
Note: Mounting provision on reteangular GFL sensors with 11.1" and 13.2" widths.
H
H9
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Ground Fault Current Detection Systems
Model GFM Relay
2.0 to 65 Amp Trip Currents
H
Description
These Class 1 Model GFM Ground Fault protection systems are designed to minimize damage or loss to equipment caused by destructive arcing ground faults. This GFM system is designed for all polyphase applications and is ideally suited for motor control, motor control centers, and medium voltage starters. Systems can be wye or delta, grounded or resistance grounded. When the ground fault current exceeds a preselected condition (current and time settings) the relay trips. The relay contacts can be connected in the control circuit of a motor starter, to the shunt trip of a circuit breaker or similar disconnecting or alarm devices. The system has an inverse time characteristic to prevent nuisance tripping. The relay tripping current value is field adjustable over the trip current range of the sensor. The adjustable trip time delay relay is field settable up to 36 cycles.
Operating range: Trip currents from 2.0-65A.
Time delay from instantaneous to 36 cycles.
Input power: Self-powered
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Ambient temperature range: -30°C to +60°C
Only for use with GFL sensors.
Operation
• Positive condition indication
• Normal (Reset) - Green (“ON”)
• Tripped - Red (“OFF”)
• Manual Reset
1.77"
3.53"
2.75"
3.00"
(4) 0.31X0.21
OPEN SLOTS
1.09" 2.15"
0.44"
3.65"
1.56" DIA
1.83
Model
Number
GFM 156
1.77"
Trip
➀
Current
3.8 to 18
4.6"
3.5"
LABEL
10.75"
GFX2 GFX1
2.0"
H1
3.75"
Model
Number
GFM 3P208
Trip
➀
Current
5 to 20
Model GFM-252 and 262
Contacts rated 10 Amps continuous, 23 Amps inrush, 120 Volts AC
0.46"
2.00"
.86"
1.17"
0.50"
3.30"
2.50"
1.15"
1.18"
0.46"
3
8
10
1 12
2.25" 0.35"
#6-32X.35LG.
TERMINAL SCREWS
To current Sensor X1 and X2 all contacts shown with the relay in the tripped position
3
1
8
10
12
Typical Circuit
L1 L2 L3
1
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(2)
1FU
(1)
(5) (6)
(5)
M
(6)
K3
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K2
(3)
(4)
X1
(1) (2)
K1
(1)
(2)
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
(H2)
T
(X1) (X2)
(5)
K6
(3)
K5
(1)
K4
Gnd
X2
OL
(6)
(4)
(2)
(H1)
8CT.
T3
T2
(FX1)
G1
(1)
(FX2)
G2
T1
GFR
(3)
GFR
(10) (9)
(13)
SW PB
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
1A
3
M
(A) (B)
48
OL
(7) (8)
49
MOTOR
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
2
R
(1) (2)
PB
① Trip current tolerance is ± 15 percent.
H10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
C2000 Line Motor Starters
GE’s C2000 Line motor starters offer greater design versatility.
C2000 Line components are loaded with features that make them easier to install, allow more flexible configurations, and allow for a smaller unit footprint. These components conform to international standards (UL, cUL and IEC-947) and have dual (U.S./European) markings to ensure global acceptance. A single nomenclature system allows simple sourcing worldwide. AC coils (both 50 Hertz and 60 Hertz versions) are available for a wide range of voltages for flexibility.
Design Versatility
• 3-pole AC contactors (non-reversing and reversing, ranging from 5-500 hp @ 460 volts)
• RT overload relays (Class 10 versions for contactors 5-125 hp range, and Class 10 and Class 30 versions for contactors in the 150-500 hp range)
• Contactor accessories — front– and side-mount auxiliary contact blocks, mechanical interlocks, pneumatic times, and surge suppressors
• Wye-delta starters
• Control relays available in various contact arrangements
• Up to six front-mount auxiliary contact blocks and one side-mount auxiliary contact block can be added to contactors in the 30-75 hp range.
Easier Installation
• 5-75 hp contactors can be either DIN-rail or screw mounted
• Mechanical interlocks allow quick, easy configuration of reversing contactors
• Coil information is printed on top of each contactor for easy reference
• On 5-25 hp contactors, pozi-drive screws accept any screwdriver
• Easy attachment of accessories
Flexible, Compact Configurations
• In the 5-75 hp range, each contactor accepts both front– and side-mount auxiliary contact blocks
• Pneumatic timers can be used in conjunction with side-mount auxiliary contact blocks
• Double-clamp terminal accepts two differently sized wires; both control and power wires can be inserted
• Surge suppression is built into the electronic control module inside 100-500 hp contactors
• RT overload relays mount directly on 5-125 hp contactors to reduce space requirements
Safety Protection
• Contactors in the 5-75 hp range have built-in finger and back-of-hand protection
Dimensions (in/mm)
Contactor
CL08
CL09
CL10
CK75
CK08
CK09
CL00
CL01
CL02
CL25
CL04
CL45
CL06
CL07
CK95
CK10
CK11
CK12
Width①
1.77/45
1.77/45
1.77/45
1.77/45
2.17/55
2.17/55
2.60/66
2.60/66
2.60/66
2.95/75
2.95/75
4.86/123
4.86/123
5.90/150
5.90/150
6.29/160
6.29/160
9.06/230
Height
3.19/81
3.19/81
3.19/81
3.19/81
3.43/87
3.43/87
4.63/117.5
4.63/117.5
4.63/117.5
4.63/117.5
4.63/117.5
7.01/178
7.01/178
8.34/212
8.34/212
9.00/229
9.00/229
9.84/250
Depth①
3.35/85
3.35/85
3.35/85
3.43/87
3.86/98
3.86/98
4.57/116
4.57/116
4.57/116
4.96/126
4.96/126
6.50/165
6.50/165
8.18/208
8.18/208
9.05/230
9.05/230
10.31/262
① Does not include front- or side-mount auxiliary contacts required on CL25, CL45 and CL06-CL10.
Contactor with
Overload
CL00+RT1
CL01+RT1
CL02+RT1
CL25+RT1
CL04+RT1
CL45+RT1
CL06+RT2
CL07+RT2
CL08+RT2
CL09+RT2
CL10+RT2
CK75+RT3
CK08+RT3
CK09+RT4
CK95+RT4
CK10+RT5
CK11+RT5
CK12+RT5
Width
1.77/45
1.77/45
1.77/45
1.77/45
2.17/55
2.17/55
2.60/66
2.60/66
2.60/66
2.95/75
2.95/75
4.86/123
4.86/123
5.90/150
5.90/150
6.29/160
6.29/160
9.06/230
Height
5.03/128
5.03/128
5.03/128
5.03/128
5.27/133.7
5.27/133.7
7.25/184
7.25/184
7.25/184
7.43/189
7.43/189
10.39/264
10.39/264
16.53/420
16.53/420
14.45/367
14.45/367
16.18/410.9
Depth
4.20/106.7
4.20/106.7
4.20/106.7
4.20/106.7
4.06/103
4.06/103
4.57/116
4.57/116
4.57/116
4.96/126
4.96/126
6.50/165
6.50/165
9.12/231.6
9.12/231.6
11.36/289
11.36/289
11.81/300
H
H11
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
300-Line Motor Starters
The 300-Line starter is a full-voltage, magnetic motor starter with encapsulated coil and three-leg block overload relay with visual trip indicator, manual reset and manual weld check. It incorporates all the features and benefits most asked for by users and has received standard specification approval by many major manufacturers. In addition to the basic non-reversing form, the 300-Line is available in reversing, two-speed and combination forms in NEMA Sizes 00-5.
The 300-Line’s toolless contactor disassembly allows quick access for inspection and maintenance. Simply release two coil retainers and pull the spring clip from the “I” magnet to gain access to the magnet, coil and contacts. No need to remove any wiring.
Improved
Auxiliary
Contacts
Rated for Heavy
Pilot-Duty
Manual Weld
Check
Overload Trip Adjustment
±10%
Visual Trip
Indication
Optional N.O. Isolated
High Fidelity Contacts
Staggered Saddle
Clamp Terminals with Permanent
Terminal
Identification
Quick
Contact
Inspection and Coil
Change
GE Exclusive
Dual
Bimetal
Overload
Protection
Optional terminals can be provided to permit the easy connection of power factor correction capacitors for energy conservation.
H
The molded coil is impervious to moisture, dirt and oil. It is highly resistant to mechanical damage and high-humidity failure. Retaining clips engage detents encapsulated in the coil to hold it securely in place.
H12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
300-Line Motor Starters
(Cover removed)
Where it’s essential to monitor performance or diagnose faults, a
300-Line starter may be ordered with an additional isolated, highfidelity, normally-open contact on the overload relay. This contact may be used for direct input to a programmable controller or direct interface with a computer.
Overriding is eliminated because overload reset occurs only when the reset arm is released on the standard manual-reset form.
A bright yellow visual trip indicator tells operators at a glance if the overload has tripped. An optional automatic-reset overload relay is available for special applications upon request.
All line and load terminals on NEMA Size 00, 0 and 1 starters have saddle clamps to accommodate all types of terminations– ring, spade and stripped-wire. Terminal numbering is permanently stamped, and terminals are staggered to help prevent shorting. NEMA Size 2, 3 and
4 starters are also available with provision for ring terminations with staggered terminals. Size 5 starters are available with provision for ring terminations. In-line terminals for spade and stripped-wire connections are standard.
On NEMA Size 1 starters and larger, contact tips are weld-resistant with cool operation and extended life. The contacts have a wedgeshaped configuration for positive make with minimum bounce.
They can be easily changed from normally open to normally closed without additional parts on Sizes 0 and 1.
Magnet provides long life and is specially treated to resist rust.
Overload relay heaters are completely interchangeable with heaters for 200- and 100-Line starters, eliminating the need to stock different heaters.
Relay trip points are factory calibrated at given currents for high accuracy. For added flexibility, the trip current of the relay is protection to any given motor and to eliminate nuisance tripping. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. The overload relay is available in standard or ambient-compensated forms.
Each auxiliary contact is rated 10 amperes
AC, continuous current (NEMA A600), and is suitable for either right or left side mounting.
All necessary parts are supplied in the modification kit for easy installation. An insulating shield is also provided for use between each auxiliary contact unit and the starter.
Auxiliary contact kits offered include one with a basic contact block and one with an adder block. The basic block is supplied with either a single circuit (one normally open contact or one normally closed contact) or a double circuit (one normally open and one normally closed contact). The adder block must be used in conjunction with a basic block. It may be ordered with either one normally open or one normally closed contact.
The overload relay can be manually tripped deliberately as a convenient way to check against contact welding. Depressing the manual weld check arm trips the relay. Then a welded contact can be detected with a simple continuity check.
H13
H
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
Overload Relays
Description
Type
Protection Class
Ambient
Compensation
Phase loss protection
Phase unbalance
Series RT Thermal
Overload Relay
RT overload relays provide motor overload protection through fixed bimetal heaters. These relays are ambient compensated and utilize a differential mechanism for single-phase sensitivity. Overload relays may be set for 4 different operational modes — manual reset only, automatic reset only, manual reset/stop, or automatic reset/stop.
Stop is initiated by pushing the reset button which interrupts the holding circuit in the latter two listed modes.
Overload relays feature visible trip indication, reset on the upstroke, weld check, and trip test.
CR324 Thermal Bimetallic
Overload Relay
The CR324 thermal bimetallic overload relays use interchangeable match overload relays to motor amps. A ±10 trip adjustment dial is used to fine tune the motor overload relays.
Overload relay features include trip test, manual reset on upstroke, weld check visible trip indicator and an optional normally open signal contact.
Thermal Thermal bimetallic
20
CR324X Electronic
Overload Relay
The CR324X is an electronic alternative to the CR324 bimetallic overload relay. The
CR324X eliminates the need for heater elements, providing a broader amperage adjustment range.
Provisions for increased diagnostic capabilities permit automation control via auxiliary contacts and remote reset open collector.
Mounting dimensions are identical to the
CR324 thermal overload relay and permit fast, simple field upgrades.
Electronic
Basic Communication
Overload Relay
The Basic
Communication overload relay is a solid-state overload relay with selectable trip class and wide current adjustment range settings. This robust relay allows for either ground fault or communication modules to be side mounted to the relay.
Electronic
MM200
Motor Controller
The MM200 integrates protection, control and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low voltage motor applications. Easily integrated into new and existing control system architectures, the
MM200 provides comprehensive low voltage motor protection and communications for all types of motor protection applications.
Electronic
MM300
Motor Controller
The MM300 integrates protection, control, automation, metering, diagnostics and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low voltage motor applications. Designed for motor control centers, the MM300 delivers superior protection and control to extend equipment life and maximize process uptime.
Electronic
10, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 15, 20, 30 (selectable) 10, 10A, 20, 30
Ambient temperature compensating
Optional Ambient insensitive Ambient compensated Yes* Yes*
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault
Self Powered
No
Yes
±5%
±3%
No
Yes
±5%
±3%
No
Yes
±2%
±2%
0.4-540 A (Depending on relay chosen)
Manual
Yes*
Yes
2.5-5%
1%
0.4-540 A (Depending on relay chosen)
Manual & Automatic
Yes
No (power from starter CPT)
2%
Yes
No (power from starter CPT)
2% Accuracy
Repeatability
FLA Adj. Range
Reset Mode
Trip Test
Trip Indication
Operating Temp.
Range
0.16-850A
Manual & Automatic
Yes
Yes
–25° to 60°C
(compensated)
Up to 135A
Manual (auto optional)
Yes
Yes
0° to 55°C
Yes
Yes
–20° to 70°C
Yes
Yes
–20° to 60°C
—
5 to 1000 FLA in steps of 1A**
Manual & Automatic
Manual & Automatic
—
5 to 1000 FLA in steps of 1A**
Manual & Automatic
Manual & Automatic
LED/User Interface/SCADA LED/User Interface/SCADA
-20°C to 60°C -20°C to 60°C **
Communications No No No
Profibus*
DeviceNet*
Ethernet IP*
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU + Profibus DP
Modbus RTU + Profibus
+ DeviceNet
Yes
Modbus RTU + Modbus TCP
+ Profibus DP
Modbus RTU + Modbus TCP
+ DeviceNet
Yes Addressable No No No Yes
Heater Required
PFC Terminals
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (optional through
NEMA Size 2)
No
Yes (optional through
NEMA Size 2)
No
No
No
No
No
No
PLC Compatible
Contacts
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Aux. Contacts NO & NC NC (NO optional) NO & NC NO & NC 2 NO, 1 C form
2 NO standard, add on available
Mount
Reference
Publication
Notes
Designed to mount directly to C2000 contactor or panel mount
—
—
Designed to mount directly to CR305 contactor or panel mount
Designed to mount directly to CR305 contactor or panel mount
GE Control Catalog
This table reflects GE’s standard offering of overload relays; however, other overload relays can be included if needed. If you have other overload relays you wish to add to your MCC, please contact the factory for assistance.
Section 1
—
DEP-015
—
Din-Rail Panel Mount Din-Rail Panel Mount Din-Rail Panel Mount
—
* Ground fault and communication modules cannot be used at the same time
090824 - V17,
GEK-113400E,
1601-9034-A6
*When ordered with
RTD Module
**1-10 turns are available to accommodate CT turns lower than 5A
131111 - V21,
GEK-113022J,
1601-9023-AA
*When ordered with
RTD Module
** based on 1" around base unit
***1-10 turns are available to accommodate CT turns lower than 5A
ASTATs and AF-6 VFDs utilize integral overload protection algorithms. External overload relays are only used with ASTATs and AF-6 VFDs to support the motor control in a bypass configuration.
H14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Industrial Relays
C2000* Control Relays
Accessories for C2000 Contactor and
Control Relay
Front-Mount Auxiliary Contact Blocks
The C2000 Control Relay is a compact, industrial style relay designed for heavy-duty applications where reliability and versatility are required.
Basic forms: 4 NO; 3NO-1NC; 2NO-2NC; 4 NC
Max front mounted aux. contacts: 4 (NO or NC)
Contact Rating: A600; P600
Aux. Contact Rating: A600; Q600; P300
Timer Contact Rating: A600; P600
1NO or 1NC
Front-mount auxiliary contact blocks clip into front face of control relay.
Pneumatic Timers
Coil Data
Burden
Inrush
Holding
Pickup Voltage (% of Coil Volts)
Drop-Out Voltage (% of Coil Volts)
Switching Delay (ms)
Switching Delay on
Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%
Coil Voltage at Rated Value
Switching Delay off
Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%
Coil Voltage at Rated Value
Maximum Operations per Hour
No Load
Rated load
AC Voltage DC Voltage
45 VA
6 VA
85-110
40-55
6-25
8-20
6-13
6-13
9000
1200
5.5 W
5.5 W
80-110
20-40
35-65
40-45
30-60
30-60
3600
1200
Coil Rating
AC Coil Rating
24V/60 Hz 24V/50 Hz
48V/60 Hz
120V/60 Hz
208V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
42V/50 Hz
110V/50 Hz
190V/50 Hz
220V/50 Hz
220V/50 Hz
240V/50 Hz
277V/60 Hz
—
—
480V/60 Hz
600V/60 Hz
380V/50 Hz
415V/50 Hz
440V/50 Hz
550V/50 Hz
DC Coil Rating
24VDC
48VDC
125VDC
250VDC
Contact Ratings
A600
Continuous Thermal Current
Max. VA/Amps Making
10A
7200VA/60A
Max. VA/Amps Breaking
Max. Operating Voltage
720VA/6A
600VAC
P600
5A
138VA
138VA
600VDC
Q600
2.5A
69VA
69VA
600VDC
P300
5A
138VA
138VA
300VDC
Pneumatic timers are adjustable time-delayed auxiliary contacts. They come equipped with two time-delayed contacts:
1NO or 1 NC, electrically separated. Setting is scaled over a
350° rotation by means of a knurled knob with timing guide marks. To mount a pneumatic timer, simply clip it on front face of control relay.
Type
Time
Delay On
Time
Delay Off
Range
.1-30 sec
1-60 sec.
.1-30 sec.
1-60 sec
Contacts
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
Surge Suppressor
For suppression of disturbances on electronic circuits due to the coil transient voltage occurring on opening of the contactor.
Limits high voltage transients that may be produced when coil is de-energized. Mounts directly on top of the coil.
Control Relay - Front View AC Control Relay - Side View
1.77
45
5.55
141
4.49
1114
3.35
85
E
3.19
81
C B
.195
5
1.38
35
.18
4.5
TYP.
H15
H
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
CR104P Pilot Devices
Description
Newly-designed nameplates with chrome-plated octagonal rings project an attractive, quality appearance. Positive feel selector switches give a quality touch in all illuminated, solid color, spring return, and maintained units.
Standard and illuminated push buttons and selector switches are available. Both push button and selector switches are available with key or for conventional operation. The CR104P push-button line also includes press-to-test and standard indicating lights, mushroom-head, joy stick, push-pull and push-push operators.
Application
Especially adapted to machine-tool service or any application where oil or coolant is present. The convenient one-hole mounting makes this line suitable for general purpose use in equipment of all kinds where panel mounting is possible.
This line is ideal for applications where oil tightness, watertightness and long life are essential.
All units are suitable for use in Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 12 and 13 environments when mounted in enclosures rated for those same applications.
➀
Contact Ratings
AC Ratings, NEMA A600 Heavy Pilot Duty
Max. Ac
Continuous Current
Amps
600 10
AC Voltamperes @ 60/50 Hz
➁
Make
7200
Break
720
DC Ratings, NEMA P600
125V
1.1
Max. Make or Break Amps
250V
0.55
600V
0.2
➀ CR104PTP units are suitable for Type 1,12, and 13 applications only.
➁ Maximum make and break currents are 60 and 6 amperes respectively for voltages of 120 and below.
Features
• Ease of assembly–One screw contact block mounting.
Octagonal ring provides ease in front panel mounting and enclosure applications.
• Greater torque–Due to the eight-sided ring design, greater torque can be developed during assembly and installation to provide oil tightness.
• Stocking inventories reduced–Forms may be furnished as complete units or as components, allowing building block construction from a minimum of stock.
• Color Coded–Colored knobs and caps are available in kit forms for easy field conversion.
CR104P pilot lights
Pilot lights match appearance of switches above. Standard applications use full voltage or transformer type lights.
Optional nameplates match those used with switches, neon lights are available (with limited lens colors).
Type
Full Voltage
(120 VAC)
Transformer
(6 VAC Secondary)
Neon
LED
(Transformer Type only)
STD
X
X
X
X
Push-To-Test
X
Bulb
#120PSB
X
N/A
X
#755
Neon
LED
(6 Volt)
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
Clear
Red
White
Amber
Clear
Red
Green
Blue
Amber
H16
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
C2000 Pilot Devices
C2000 Pilot Devices
Description
C2000 Push Buttons are heavy-duty, 22.5mm water-tight and oil-tight pilot devices. Four operator styles – round polished and satin chrome, round and square engineered plastic – are available. They just snap onto the mounting flange and all reflect a sleek, distinctive European style that give you precisely the look and function you want in your push buttons. Choose from full-voltage, resistor and transformer power supplies with incandescent, LED or neon lamps.
Features
• Installation is quick, labor cost are reduced.
• Ergonomic design adds ease of assembly and operation.
• Back-tightened locking rings discourage tampering, accommodate a range of panel thickness, and tighten down with either a custom wrench or any flatbladed screwdriver.
• A removable orientation tab allows universal mounting in either notched or round 22.5 mm holes.
• Permanently bonded front gasket provides superior sealing against contaminants and makes installation nearly foolproof.
• Markings are easy to read and laser-etched so they remain permanently legible.
• 4-point contact, flanges snap securely onto the operator.
• Ultrasonically welded contact block housings hold up longer and resist contamination better, even in the dustiest environments.
• Double bridge sliding contacts provide excellent performance, even in low-voltage applications.
• Terminals (both screw and quick-connect) can be wired off the operator, then snapped on.
• Contacts are rated A600, Q300.
Standard for 1/2X compact starter. See GE Control Catalog, Section 9.
C2000 Double Bridge Feature
H
H17
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
Solid-State Motor Winding Heater
Description
The motor winding heater is designed for use with 3-phase ac motors to guard against damage caused by condensation build-up on motor windings, which can occur in high-humidity environments during motor idle periods. With the heater connected as indicated in the connection diagram, and the motor not running, an SCR controlled current flows in the motor windings, producing enough heat to maintain the temperature inside the motor above the ambient temperature.
The motor winding heater is automatically energized after the starter contacts (M) open, and de-energized when the starter contacts close. Fuses are included for SCR overcurrent protection and protection for wiring.
Applications
50 Hertz Applications: The 230/460 volt device can be used at 220/440 volts, 50 Hertz. The 575 volt device can be used at 550 volts, 50 Hertz.
Typical Wiring Diagram
If desired, a pilot light can be connected as shown (“Fuse
Condition Indicator”) to visually monitor the condition of the fuses. With the starter contacts open, the light will be On if current paths through FU1 and FU2 are complete. The pilot light should have a line voltage rating.
Specifications
Output Voltage Regulation: Voltage applied to motor winding
Note: Since voltage is present at motor terminals at all times, cautionary information sent with the device must be observed.
-15%.
Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to +50°C.
Fusing: FU1–Fast-acting semiconductor fuse for SCR overcurrent protection. FU2–Class RK-5 rejection type fuse with time delay for wiring protection.
Additional SCR Protection: Metal oxide varistor protects against voltage surges. RC snubber circuit limits rate of change of circuit voltage.
Motor Voltage
+10%, –15%, 3-Phase 60 Hz
230/460V
575V
Heater is UL Listed in MCC Construction
Motor Horsepower Range
15-400 Hp
25-400 Hp
H18
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
EPM 6000 Power Meter
High Accuracy Power and Energy Measurement
Overview
EPM 6000 is one of the industry’s highest performance revenue grade panel meters. Based on the latest technology and an all-new platform, EPM 6000 has a superior cost to performance ratio and significantly outperforms other metering products many times its price.
Applications
• Continuous metering of electrical loads such as generator panels, feeders, switchgear etc.
• Provides remote status when used with EnerVista suite of software
• Low and medium voltage applications
• Replaces multiple analog meters saving space and installation costs
Key Benefits
• High accuracy multifunction power meter
• Superior performance at competitive pricing
• Ultra compact, easy to install, program and use
• 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering
• Total harmonic distortion (%THD)
• Fits both ANSI and DIN cutout
• Large 3 line .56” bright LED display for better visibility and longer life
• User programmable for different system voltages and current measurements
• Standard Modbus and DNP communications
• Optional Ethernet port for simplified integration into onto new or existing LAN infrastructures and multi-point connectivity
Features
Monitoring and Metering
• True RMS multifunction measurements including voltage, current, power, freq., energy, etc.
• Meets ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy classes
• Future field upgradeable for added functionality without removing installed meter
• Load percentage graphical bar for instant load visualization
Communications
• RS485 Modbus and DNP 3.0 Protocol up to 57.6K Baud
(Serial Option)
• Modbus TCP Protocol through 10/100BaseTX via RJ45
(Ethernet Option)
• 3 Line .56” Bright Red LED Display
• Front IrDA Port laptop communication
• Pulse output for accuracy testing and energy
For more information on EPM 6000, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ epm6000.htm
H
H19
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
EPM 6010 Automation Power Meter
BACnet*/IP Communications and Energy
Measurement
Overview
The Multilin EPM 6010 is an industry leading revenue grade power meter with native BACnet/IP communications. This meter is designed to integrate seamlessly into existing and new building management systems using the popular BACnet protocol. The meter allows users to gather data on voltage, current, power and energy usage throughout a facility.
Designed to be the perfect device for environmental initiatives, LEED certified projects and smart energy projects, the
EPM 6010 provides superior metrology, and revenue testable 0.2% energy accuracy. The meter is in compliance with ANSI and IEC accuracy standards, has advanced DSP technology, samples at high rates, and has 24 bit A/D conversion to measure and analyze power accurately and reliably.
Applications
• LEED projects
• Smart buildings
• Commercial energy management
• HVAC efficiency monitoring
• Building management systems
Key Benefits
• Rapid integration into BACnet management systems
• High accuracy multifunction power meter, 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering
• Ultra compact and easy to install, fits both ANSI and DIN cutouts
• EnerVista* software makes metered data and power quality status easily accessible
• User programmable for different system voltages and current measurements
• Standard Modbus* and TCP communications
• Easy to read, large 3 line .56” bright LED display for better visibility and longer life
Features
Measuring and Metering
• High accuracy multifunction power meter, 0.2% class revenue certifiable energy and demand metering
• Samples at 400+ times per cycle and has 24 bit A/D conversion to measure accurately and reliably
• Meets ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy classes
• Total harmonic distortion (%THD)
• Load percentage graphical bar for instant load visualization
• True RMS multifunction measurements including voltage, current, power, frequency and energy
Communications
• BACnet/IP 100BaseT Ethernet protocol
• 40 pre-defined BACnet objects facilitate rapid integration
• Embedded web-server, allows BACnet/IP interface to be remotely configured and BACnet objects can be remotely viewed over the internet with a web browser
• Standard Modbus TCP communications can be used to poll the EPM 6010 while BACnet/IP interface is being used
For more information on EPM 6010, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ epm6010.htm
H20
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
EPM 7000 Power Meter
Power Quality and Energy Cost Measurement
Overview
The EPM 7000 meter provides revenue class (0.2%) three phase power metering with optional Ethernet, relay, status, and analog output communication modules. This flexible meter can be used for a wide range of high accuracy applications including disturbance recording and power quality studies.
EPM 7000 can easily be mounted in a panel for generator monitoring, substation automation, power quality studies, data recording and more. The meter can also provide data to RTUs, PLCs and other control devices.
The EPM 7000 is a highly accurate meter providing 0.1% accuracy for Voltage and Current. The unit’s real-time clock provides time stamping of all logs as they are created. Up to 4 MB of data can be logged for analysis of historical trends, limit alarms, I/O changes power quality recording and sequence of events.
Features
Metering
• Meets ANSI C 12.20 and IEC 687 (0.2%) accuracy
• Ia Ib Ic In
• Va Vb Vc Vab Vbc Vca
• Hz W VAR VA
• Wh VARh VAh
• Demand: W VAR VA
• Power Factor
• Voltage and Current Angles
• Load Bar
Applications
• Four quadrant energy and power monitoring of distribution feeders, transformers, reactors and generators
• Power monitoring of LV and MV industrial power control centers and motor control centers
• Energy monitoring of commercial and distribution utilities
Power Quality
• Harmonics to the 40th order
• Total Harmonic Distortion
• Disturbance Recording and Waveform Capture
• Sag and Swell
Key Benefits
• Four Quadrant Energy and Power Measurement, complying with ANSI C12.20 (0.2% Accuracy)
• Analyze power quality over long periods of time to improve network reliability through high resolution event and disturbance recording
• Ideal for monitoring industrial power centers, data centers and hospitals due to high accuracy disturbance recording
(up to 512 samples/cycle)
• Retrieve archived data, capture past events and analyze disturbances through high resolution data recording (up to
4MB of data logging)
• Flexible communication options provide easy to access meter values, simplified configuration and seamless integration into new or existing automation systems
Data Logging
• Up to 4 MB Memory
• Disturbance Recording
• Power Quality Studies
• Load Studies
Communications
• Standard RS485 Modbus (DNP 3.0 and Modbus RTU or ASCII)
• Optional Ethernet 100BaseT
• IrDA Port
• Intuitive faceplate programming
Software
• Embedded Web Server
• GE Communicator
• EnerVista* Integrator
• EnerVista* Launchpad
H
For more information on EPM 7000, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ epm7000.htm
H21
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
PQM II Power Quality Meter
Power Quality and Energy Cost Management
Overview
GE Multilin has set a new standard in metering technology with the introduction of the PQM II. This meter, designed on the latest industry specifications, provides accurate and reliable three-phase power metering with an optional
Ethernet and fiber communications module in a small and modern package. The PQM II can be used for a variety of applications including metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators and motors.
Applications
• Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks and motors
• Medium and low voltage systems
• Commercial, industrial, utility
• Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc.
Key Benefits
• Power quality metering with waveform capture and historical data logging
• Easy to program and use with keypad and large illuminated
40 character display
• Multiple communication ports for integration with DCS and SCADA systems
• Supports DNP 3.0 and Modbus protocols
• Digital and analog I/Os for control and alarms
• Voltage disturbance recording capability for electrical sag and swell events
Features
Monitoring and Metering
• Ia Ib Ic In
• Va Vb Vc Vab Vbc Vca
• V I unbalance
• True PF crest and K factor
• Hz W var VA
• Wh varh VAh W cost
• Demand: A W var VA
• Harmonic analysis through 63rd with THD and TIF
• Event recorder - 150 events
• Waveform capture
• Data logger -98,000 events
• Voltage Disturbance Recorder (VDR) -500 events
Communications
• Front RS232 serial port (1,200 to 19,200 bps)
• Two rear RS485 serial ports with ModBus and DNP 3.0
protocol
• Ethernet connectivity provided by MultiNet
• EnerVista* software is provided for setup and monitoring functions
• External dial-in modem capabilities
Protection and Control
• Load shedding
• Power factor control
• Pulse input totalizing
For more information on PQM II, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ pqmil.htm
H22
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Three-Phase Voltage Monitors
Model SPVRB
General
UL Listed file No. E103039
The model SPVRB Voltage Sensing Relay is designed to protect against single phase, phase loss, phase unbalance, and phase reversal in a power system. The output contacts change their normal state only when a single phase, phase loss, phase unbalance, or phase reversal occurs for longer than the preset trip delay. A total power loss or de-energization of the SPVRB relay will not change the output contacts position. Recommended for manual reset switches and breaker applications. The SPVRB is suitable for loss of phase with motor loads.
Features
• Phase unbalance: 8%
• Adjustable Trip Delay: 1 to 10 seconds after failure occurs, prevents nuisance operations
• Output Relay: normally de-energized, form C contacts for easy circuit configuration
• Electro-mechanical indicator: retains memory of fault until manually reset
• Door or panel mounting
• Status Indicator: bi-colored LED
— Green: Output relay de-energized (normal condition)
— Red: Output relay energized (fault condition)
— Dark: Output relay de-energized (input power off)
• Single Phase, Phase Reversal, Phase Unbalance and
Phase Loss Protection: operates the output relay after a preselected time
• Automatic or Manual mode
— Automatic mode: Upon removal of fault conditions, relay automatically resets to normal
— Manual mode: Upon removal of fault conditions, relay resets to normal after local or remote reset button has been pressed
➀ Bi-Colored LED Indicator
•Power system condition Normal (Green), Trip (Red)
➁ Electromechanical Diagnostic Indicator
• Phase loss
➂ Adjustable System Delay
• Phase loss
• Phase unbalance
• Single phase
• Phase reversal
• Under and over voltage
(2) 0.24 Dia. Holes
Clearance holes for
#12 screws
Panel Mounting Layout
SPVRB — XXX
Input Voltage:
120/208/240/480 or
575 Vac, (60 Hz)
380 or 415 Vac, (50 Hz)
Available Models
Model No.
Nominal Vac
SPVRB–120
SPVRB–208
SPVRB–480
SPVRB–575
SPVRB–380
SPVRB–415
120
208
480
575
380
415
Hz
60
60
60
60
50
50
Output Contact Ratings
Voltage
120 Vac
240 Vac
600 Vac
Continuous
10 A
10 A
3 A
10 A, 28 Vdc/120 Vac/240 Vac, 80% pf
3 A, 480 Vac/600 Vac, 80% pf
HP
1/3
1/2
1/2
H
H23
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
High-Resistance Ground
Equipment Overview
High Resistance Grounding Equipment coordinates the use of resistors and control devices, creating a high-resistance ground for a power system. The grounding equipment has the following features:
• Over-voltage Reduction: Reduces the transient over voltages that can occur during arcing faults.
• Fault Detection: Gives immediate warning when the first ground fault occurs.
• Fault Tracking: Helps locate the fault by producing a tracer signal of current pulses easily distinguishable from background noise.
• Operation Protection: Enables the system to continue operation with a single line-to ground fault present.
Operational Description – Low-Voltage Systems (600v Max)
Typical circuit used in low-voltage is shown on page L22.
Where to Use
The function of high-resistance grounding equipment is:
1. To provide a ground for neutral of an ungrounded threephase power system, utilizing the high-resistance method.
Using this equipment allows the system to operate basically as an ungrounded system. The equipment is designed to eliminate the danger of high-transient overvoltages during certain types of ground faults.
Note: The use of high-resistance grounding on 600 volt maximum systems precludes line-to-neutral loading.
2. To provide an immediate warning when the first ground fault occurs through an alarm system.
3. To provide a method for quickly locating and removing the fault before another fault develops on another phase, thereby preventing circuit outages due to double line-toground faults. This is done by using the pulsing ground current feature and portable detector.
When a ground fault occurs, the resistor acts to limit the ground current to a pre-determined low value. Taps are provided on the resistor to adjust the fault current. The voltage appearing across the resistor or the amperage through the resistor is sensed by the PulserPlus Pro* Controller. A variable time delay is entered via the operator’s panel. When the time delay expires, the red Ground Fault indicator light will illuminate. Auxiliary contacts are provided in case a remote indication of the fault is needed or desired. The red light will stay illuminated until the ground fault is removed and the system is reset. Optionally, the PulserPlus Pro can be set for auto-reset. In addition, an audible alarm will sound when the ground fault occurs. This alarm can be silenced from the operator’s panel.
Approximate Dimensions and Weights
Equipment
Enclosure
Type
NEMA 1
W x D x H
(inches)
20 x 20 x 90
With Pulsor in Pounds
Wye
600
Delta
700
Without Pulsor in
Pounds
Wye
575
Delta
675
600 Volt Maximum Wye System
PULSING CONTACTOR
NGI
CURRENT LOOP INPUT
CONTROL MODULE
SW1
NEUTRAL
A#
CPT LINE
FUSES INTERLOCKING
DISCONNECT
B#
Features
• Undervoltage and undercurrent detection and alarm
• Adjustable pulser from 10 to 50 per minute for custom setup
• Adjustable trip delay to avoid nuisance downtime
• Alarm contacts for remote monitoring of ground fault, high harmonics and loss of ground
• High harmonic filtering and detection
• Third harmonics generator winding protection
• Remote operation and monitoring via RS232, Modbus or Ethernet communication
ALARM CONTACTS
600 Volt Maximum Delta System
PULS
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
Line and Control Connections
The line connections are made to the main bus. The control power and auxiliary device connections are made to the terminal blocks rated 30 amperes, 600 volts. Refer to the specific diagrams furnished with the equipment for location detail. Setup information is through the operator’s panel.
PulserPlus Pro is a trademark of Post Glover.
H24
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
MM200 Motor Management System
Low Voltage Motor Protection and Control
Overview
The MM200 meter integrates protection, control and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low volage motor applications. Easily integrated into new and existing control system architectures, the MM200 provides comprehensive low voltage motor protection and communications for all types of motor protection applications.
Applications
• Low Voltage Three-Phase AC Motors
• MCC and standalone Panel Mount Applications
• IEC NEMA Motor Control Center (MCCs)
• Process control applications
• System architecture requiring multiple simultaneous communications
• FVNR, FVR, two speed
Key Benefits
• Flexible Protection, Control, and Communication options to suit Low Voltage Motor applications
• Small footprint designed specifically for IEC and NEMA MCC applications
• Integrated pushbuttons and LED indicators reduce external components and wiring
• Flexible DIN rail mounting
• Multiple communication protocols allows simple integration into monitoring and control systems
• Optional control panel provides local control
Features
Protection and Control
• Motor Thermal Model
• Undercurrent
• Current Unbalance
• Acceleration Time
• Sensitive Ground Fault
• Built-in Starter Logic
• FVNR, FVR, Two-Speed
• Auto / Manual Control
• Configurable Inputs
• Power Fail Restart
Metering & Monitoring
• Current, Motor Loads, Thermal Capacity
• Motor Running Time, Cause of Trip, Total Number of Trips
• 1A / 5A combined CT inputs
Communications
• Networking through RS485
• Multiple Protocols - Modbus RTU ODVA Compliant
DeviceNet Internally powered Profibus
• Simultaneous Communications
User Interface
• Optional Control Panel with control push buttons and LED status indicators
• Includes EnerVista MM200 Setup software for simple programming and retrieval of system or trip information
EnerVista* Software
• State of the art software for configuration and commissioning GE Multilin products
• Graphical Logic Designer and Logic Monitor to simplify designing and testing procedures
• Document and software archiving toolset to ensure reference material and device utilities are up-to-date
H
For more information on MM200, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ mm200.htm
H25
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
MM200 Motor Management System
Functional Block Diagram
ANSI Device Numbers and Functions
Device No.
37
46
49
50G
51R
Function
Undercurrent
Current Unbalance
Thermal Overload
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
Locked/Stalled Rotot, Mechanical Jam
52
BUS
Power Fuse
H
Contactor
Temperature
Thermistor
Phase CT 3
Ground CT 1
RS485 - Modbus RTU
Profibus/DeviceNet
Motor Load
7 inputs and 3 outputs (standard)
24 V DC
Metering
A
51R 49 37 45
51G
MM200
Motor Management System
H26
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
MM200 Motor Management System
User Interface
Front Panel Controls
• Integrated Device Controls
12 LED Indicators
• Motor Status
• Alarm Indication and Trip
• Communication Status
• Additional User LEDs
• Auto/Manual
• % Motor Load
Optional FieldbusProtocols
(ProfiBus or DeviceNet)
Power Supply and Digital
Inputs
• 24 VDC Power Supply
• 7 x 24 VDC Inputs (wet)
• 60-300VAC Power Supply
• 6x AC Inputs
Optional Control Panel Interface
Dimensions
Side View Front View Top View
3 Phase CT Inputs
RS485 Communications and Thermistor Input
• Sensitive Ground Fault
• 2 Form A Outputs (5 Amps)
• 1 Form C Outputs (5 Amps)
H
H27
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
H
MM300 Motor Management System
Integrated Automation and Protection for
Low Voltage Motors
Overview
The MM300 meter integrates protection, control, automation, metering, diagnostics and multiple communication protocols in a rugged compact device for low volage motor applications.
Designed for Motor Control Centers, the MM300 delivers superior protection and control to extend equipment life and maximize process uptime.
Applications
• Low Voltage three-phase AC motors
• MCC or stand alone panel mount applications
• Reversing and reduced voltage applications
• Motor applications requiring advanced automation or control such as conveyor systems or well recovery pumps
• IEC or NEMA class motors
Automation
• Programmable Flexlogic Option
• Starter Control
• Process Interlocks
• Programmable Inputs and Outputs
• Undervoltage Auto-restart
Key Benefits
• Full-featured protection for low voltage AC motors
• Advanced automation capabilities for providing customized protection and integrated process control
• Advanced FlexLogic* reduces requirement for local PLC’s
• Reduced installation space requirements through integration of multiple devices including protection, control functions, pushbuttons, status LEDs and communication interfaces
• Application flexibility with multiple I/O options and programmable logic options (FlexLogic)
• Enhanced troubleshooting tools including sequence of event records and waveform capture
• Powerful communications including Serial, Ethernet,
Profibus, and DeviceNet protocols
• Small form factor and remote display options designed to fit in MCC buckets
Metering & Monitoring
• Metering — Current, Voltage, Power, Energy, Frequency,
RTD, Thermistor
• Oscillography — Analog Values at 32 Samples/cycle and
Digital States
• Event Recorder — Up to 256 Time Tagged Events with 1ms re
• Advanced Device Health Diagnostics
Communications
• Networking Interfaces — Two Wire RS485, RJ45 Ethernet
• Multiple Protocols (Modbus RTU , Modbus TCP/IP, Internally
Powered Profibus, ODVA Compliant DeviceNet)
• Programming Ports - USB, RS485
• Network Time Protocol (When Ordered with Ethernet)
User Interface
• Control Panel with 12 Status LED’s, Motor Control and
Function Keys
• Color HMI Display featuring a full color graphical display,
Motor and system status LED’s, USB programming port and motor control keys
Features
Protection and Control
• Enhanced Thermal Modeling
• Mechanical Jam / Stalled Rotor
• Undercurrent
• Underpower
• Acceleration Time
• Current Unbalance
• Ground Fault
• Sensitive Ground Fault
• Phase Overvoltage / Undervoltage
• Auxiliary Undervoltage
• Phase Reversal
• VT Fuse Failure
• Thermistor
• RTD Overtemperature
EnerVista* Software
• State of the art software for configuration and commissioning GE Multilin products
• Graphical Logic Designer and Logic Monitor to simplify designing and testing procedures
• Document and software archiving toolset to ensure reference material and device utilities are up-to-date
For more information on MM300, please see https://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin/catalog/ mm300.htm
H28
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
MM300 Motor Management System
Functional Block Diagram
ANSI Device Numbers and Functions
Device No.
27AUX
27
37
38
46
47
49
50G
51G
51R
59
66
Function
Undervoltage - Auxiliary Input
Undervoltage - Three Phase
Undercurrent/Underpower
Bearing Temperature RTD
Current Unbalance
Voltage Phase Reversal
Thermal Overload
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
Ground Time Overcurrent
Locked/Stalled Rotor/Mechanical Jam
Overvoltage - Three Phase
Starts/Hour & Time Between Starts
52
BUS
Power Fuse
Contactor
Phase CT 3
Ambient air
Ground CT 1
RTD
Thermistor
Control PT
Control fuse
27X
Direct voltage inputs
(690 V AC maximum)
Optional three-phase voltage card
6 inputs and 2 outputs (standard)
27 59 47
Metering
V, A, W, var, VA, PF, Hz
51R 49 37 66 46
Stator RTDs
Bearing RTDs
Temperature
50G 51G
49
38
Expansion module, two cards per module, maximum of two modules
Optional
RTD card
Motor
Load
RS485 - Modbus RTU
Ethernet - Modbus TCP/IP
Profibus/DeviceNet
MM300
Motor Management System
H
H29
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
MM300 Motor Management System
User Interface
H
Dimensions
H30
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME
Surge Protective Device (SPD) with Enhanced Thermal Protection
Overview
GE Surge Protective Devices (SPD) are engineered for reliability, flexibility and long life in the most extreme surge environment. The true maximum surge current rating has been proven successful in third-party tests.
These SPD models connect to the panelboard or switchboard bus bars without adding width or depth to the panel enclosure, and only occupying 7X of vertical bus space. Third-party tested per IEEE C62.62 and NEMA LS-1 for the rated 8x20µs surge current, per mode with fusing included. Standard features include a surge counter, audible alarm, indicating lights, dry contacts and an integral surge rated disconnect.
Rating options range from 65kA per mode to 300kA per mode.
All mode protection is provided with surge components
(MOVs) connected on the phase to neutral, phase to ground and neutral to ground paths as appropriate for the voltage configuration.
Technical Specifications
Nominal Discharge Current (In): 20kA
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): 200kA
Operating Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Connection: 6 to 2/0 Conductors,
Parallel Connected
Operating Temperature: -40° F to 149° F
(-40° C to +65° C)
Operating Humidity: 0% to 95%
Non-Condensing
Weight: 24 lbs. (10.89 kg)
Features and Benefits
• UL 1449 3rd Edition, Type 1 or Type 2
• UL 1283, EMI/RFI noise filter
• UL 96A, Lightning Protection System
• cUL, CSA C22.2
• Integral surge rated disconnect
• Compact design requires only 7X height of space
• Tranquell* ME device is tested to a minimum of 5,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode
• Tranquell* HE device is tested to a minimum of 20,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode
• Industrial-sized MOV technology
• Thermally protected MOVs eliminate the need for additional upstream overcurrent protection
• Form C dry contacts for remote monitoring
• Green status indicating lights, red alarm light
• Audible alarm with test/disable feature
• LCD surge counter
• 5 year limited warranty (standard),
10 year limited warranty (optional)
H
H31
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Components
Integrated Tranquell* HE & ME
Surge Protective Device (SPD)
Catalog Number
TPHE
TPME
120S
120Y
220Y
240D
240H
240Y
277Y
347Y
480D
Nominal Voltage
(Volts RMS)
120/240
120Y/208
220Y/380
240 Delta
120/240 Delta HL
240Y/415
277Y/480
347Y/600
480 Delta
System
Voltage
1 Ph, 3 W + G
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 3 W
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 4 W + G
3 Ph, 3 W
MCOV Max.
Continuous
Operating Voltage
L-N/G (Vrms)
150
150
06
08
320
270
12
150/270 HL
15
320
320
420
10
20
25
30
550
Maximum Surge
Current Capacity
Exposure
Level
Per
Mode
Per
Phase
TPME
TPME
TPME
TPHE
TPHE
TPHE
TPHE
TPHE
65kA
80kA
130kA
160kA
100kA 200kA
125kA 250kA
150kA 300kA
200kA 400kA
250kA 500kA
300kA 600kA
PP
SG
ME
Spectra panel or switchboard)
for UL Type 2 Locations
For all TPHE devices (125kA -
300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 2 Locations
MCC) for UL Type 2 Locations
PPT1
Spectra panel or switchboard)
for UL Type 1 Locations
SGT1
For all TPHE devices (125kA -
300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 1 Locations
MET1
MCC) for UL Type 1 Locations
H
Protection Ratings
Voltage Code 1 2 0 S / 1 2 0 Y 2 4 0 D 2 4 0 H 2 2 0 Y / 2 4 0 Y / 2 7 7 Y 3 4 7 Y 4 8 0 D
Protection Mode
UL 1449, 3 rd
edition
Voltage Protection Ratings
(VPR) (assigned UL rating)
UL 1449, 2 nd
edition
Suppression Voltage
Ratings (SVR)
(assigned UL rating)*
L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L L-N
400 400 400 700 800 1500 500
HL-N
900 800 700 1200 1200 1800 1000 1200 800 1200 700 2000 2200 1500 1200 1200 2000 1500 1500 1500 2500 1800 3000
700
L-G
400
HL-G
700
N-G
400
L-L
900
HL-L
—
L-N
800
L-G
800
N-G
800
L-L
1500
L-N
1200
L-G
1000
N-G
1000
L-L
2000
L-G
1500
L-L
3000
B3 Ring Wave Clamping
Voltage @ 6kV, 500A
470 463 452 752 750 1240 465 — 466 — 476 1025 — 763 836 828 1393 883 1000 1000 1723 1223 1800
C3 Combo Wave
Clamping Voltage
@ 20kV, 10kA
793 670 680 1007 890 1640 775 — 670 — 680 1163
*NOTE: SVR R atings are no longer assigned by UL and are included in the table above for reference purposes only.
— 1170 1073 1180 1827 1467 1240 1240 2220 1607 2933
Dimensions
0.340
[8.636]
17.722
[450.130]
17.382
[441.494]
0.280
[ 7.112] HOLE
(4 PLACES)
9.400
[238.755]
6.762
[171.751] TYP
2.638
[67.004] TYP
NOTE: All dimensions are for reference only and are shown in inches [millimeters]
See instruction manual for details
6.964
[176.877]
7.202
[182.922]
H32
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Motor
HP
1/4➀
1/2➀
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
Synchronous
Speed, RPM
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
Approximate Motor Full-Load
Current Ratings
Full-Load Current for EPAC Compliant Motors
Average Expected Values
For three-phase, 60 Hertz, GE Type KE (NEMA Design B) dripproof, normal starting torque, continuous 40°C ambient (1.15
service factor) horizontal induction motors.
4.2
5.4
5.4
5.7
2.6
3.7
3.3
3.4
2.1
2.5
2.4
2.5
1.5
1.9
1.8
2.1
1.3
1.5
1.3
1.4
0.80
1.4
0.96
1.1
575V
0.56
0.60
0.68
0.60
0.68
0.70
0.80
11.4
11.5
14.8
16.2
15.7
16.6
21.7
20.6
19.7
22.2
9.0
9.9
9.5
10.9
6.7
6.9
7.5
8.2
27.4
27.0
32.7
33.1
42.6
40.3
45.1
47.6
15.4
14.4
19.3
19.8
21.4
23.7
26.0
28.5
62.3
53.2
56.6
63.9
24.0
23.8
25.8
28.8
36.0
35.0
33.0
41.4
12.2
12.6
14.0
17.2
18.0
18.0
19.8
24.0
45.4
46.2
50.0
55.6
6.9
7.1
7.6
10.6
9.4
9.9
12.0
15.4
5.3
6.0
6.0
7.1
3.7
4.1
4.4
5.5
2.8
3.2
3.7
4.4
2.0
2.3
2.3
3.2
200V
1.6
Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents
230V
1.4
460V
0.70
1.7
2.0
1.7
2.0
1.5
1.7
1.5
1.7
0.75
0.85
0.75
0.85
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.8
2.4
2.8
3.2
3.8
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.9
0.88
1.0
1.0
1.4
3.2
2.2
4.6
4.8
4.8
4.4
4.6
6.2
6.0
5.8
6.2
9.2
8.0
7.9
8.6
13.4
4.0
3.9
4.3
6.7
3.0
2.9
3.1
4.6
2.4
2.2
2.3
3.1
1.6
1.6
2.3
2.4
12.0
11.9
12.9
14.4
18.0
17.6
19.1
20.7
9.0
9.3
9.9
12.4
6.1
6.3
7.0
8.6
22.7
23.1
25.0
27.8
Motor
HP
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
Synchronous
Speed, RPM
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
340
352
370
398
412
419
435
–
468
482
574
590
594
676
686
774
792
890
296
306
322
346
348
364
378
446
207
206
221
262
281
283
296
338
142
144
159
163
172
172
176
206
81.7
88.6
92.2
101
112
114
122
140
200V
72.0
Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents
230V
56.0
460V
28.0
71.3
73.8
82.6
85.6
60.0
63.2
71.8
67.8
30.0
31.6
35.9
33.9
71.2
73.8
80.2
89.0
97.8
99.6
105.8
129
35.6
36.9
40.1
44.6
48.9
48.5
52.9
64.5
122
125.2
138.2
145.6
147.4
149.2
153.4
181
180.0
179.2
191.8
238
232
246
258
290
91.6
86.7
95.9
119
116
118
129
139
61.1
61.0
69.1
72.8
73.7
69.8
76.7
90.5
226
239
287
295
297
338
340
387
396
445
143
149
161
164
169
177
189
217
76.7
91.2
97.7
98.4
103
116
118
122
55.3
56.6
59.9
59.7
61.4
71.5
72.0
71.7
32.1
39.2
40.3
39.8
42.3
48.9
49.4
50.1
575V
25.0
24.8
25.7
28.7
29.8
29.9
30.8
230
236
238
270
274
310
317
356
129
138
143
146
151
178
187
193
➀ Open, Type K, general purpose, NEMA SF, solid base, rolled-steel-shell, GE induction motors.
Note: The listed data is based on approximate full-load current ratings of standard, open, 1.15 service factor, continuous rated General Electric motors. Full-load current ratings of similar motors of other manufacturers may vary considerably. Therefore, whenever possible use actual full-load current rating given on motor nameplate.
Contact motor manufacturer for full-load currents of single-phase and DC motors.
J1
J
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip
Set Positions
The greatest degree of protection is provided when the magnetic trip setting is just above the motor starting inrush current. It is therefore recommended that the magnetic trip position be adjusted to a setting one position higher than the setting that carries the motor starting current. For recommended continuous-current ratings, see overload heater tables on pages J-5 through J-12.
Cat No.
3 Pole
TEC36003
TEC36007
TEC36015
TEC36030
TEC36050
TEC36100
TEC36150
TFC36225
TFC36225A
TJC36400B
TJC36400E
TJC36400F
TJC36400G
TJC36600G
TJC36600H
Continuous
Amperes
3
7
15
30
50
100
150
225
225
Lo
8
18
42
90
180
300
600
2
13
30
68
140
260
468
950
Trip Setting Positions
4
18
42
94
190
340
636
1300
6
23
804
1650
600 780 1020 1200
1000 1200 1630 1920
8
28
972
2000
10
33
54 66 78
120 146 172
240 290 340
420 500 580
1140
2350
Hi
38
90
198
390
660
1300
2700
1400
2250
400
400
400
400
600
600
1200
330
550
1000
1800
1400
435
720
1280
2100
1850
600
1780
2600
3250
860
945 1280
1000 1280 1780 2360
2360
3600
4000
1100
1670
3300
3300
6000
Spectra RMS Circuit Breaker Current Ratings
Max.
Rating Instantaneous Trip Setting, Nominal RMS Sym. Amperes
Frame Frame Plug
Amps Amps Min.
Trip Setting Adjustment Position
2 3 4 5 6 Max.
7
3
7
15
20
30
11
22
43
58
13
27
55
74
16
35
69
93
19
43
24
56
31
71
86 111 143
116 151 196
39
90
182
254
SE 60
25
30
40
50
73
87
118
148
93
112
150
187
117
142
188
236
147 193 253
179 237 314
237 308 394
296 386 498
332
415
501
637
100
150
100
110
125
150
60
70
80
90
178
206
236
267
297
328
374
450
224
261
299
338
376
415
474
570
284
329
377
426
475
524
598
720
355
411
472
532
593
654
745
897
464
534
614
694
775
857
979
604
684
787
892
998
1,105
1,265
1,181 1,528
777
863
999
1,138
1,280
1,426
1,640
1,991
SF 250
400
70
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
250
125
150
175
200
225
590
665
740
380
455
530
605
680
Min.
205
265
295
325
370
440
515
2
260
335
375
410
465
560
655
750
840
935
480
575
670
765
860
3
330
425
470
520
570
705
825
940
1,050
1,180
620
740
865
990
1,115
4
410
530
590
650
740
885
1,035
1,180
1,330
1,480
765
920
5
535
690
765
845
960
1,150
1,345
1,535
1,730
1,920
990
Max.
700
900
1,000
1,100
1,250
1,500
1,750
2,000
2,250
2,500
1,275
1,185 1,530
1,070 1,385 1,785
1,225 1,580 2,040
1,375 1,780 2,295
SG
SK
600
800
1,200
450
500
600
300
400
500
600
700
250
300
350
400
250
300
350
400
800
600
700
800
1,000
1,200
755
905
1,060
1,210
765
915
1,070
1,200
1,375
1,525
1,830
940
1,255
1,570
1,875
2,155
2,440
1,825
2,125
2,430
3,040
3,650
955 1,235
1,145 1,480
1,340 1,730
1,530 1,980
965 1,215
1,155 1,455
1,350 1,700
1,540 1,940
1,735 2,185
1,925 2,425
2,310 2,910
1,150 1,445
1,535 1,930
1,915 2,410
2,290 2,895
2,665 3,375
3,035
2,310
2,695
3,080
3,850
4,620
3,860
2,905
3,390
3,870
4,840
5,805
1,530 1,975 2,550
1,835 2,370 3,060
2,140 2,765 3,570
2,445 3,160 4,080
1,500 1,960 2,530
1,800 2,355 3,035
2,100 2,745 3,545
2,400 3,135 4,050
2,695 3,530 4,555
2,995 3,920 5,060
3,595 4,705 6,075
1,795 2,375 3,015
2,395 3,165 4,015
2,990 3,955 5,020
3,610 4,740 6,195
4,240 5,525 7,420
4,875
3,685
4,300
4,910
6,140
7,370
6,305
4,730
5,515
6,305
8,880
9,455
8,705
6,110
7,125
8,145
10,180
12,215
J2
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Thermal Magnetic Trip Ratings for
Motor Circuits
These selections are based on 2005 National Electric Code requirements for squirrel-cage motors without code letters or with code letter through G. Lower trip ratings may be required for motor with code letter A and higher trips for motors with code letters H to V. Local code or specific application requirements may necessitate special selection. Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker combination motor control units are not recommended for motors with full-load currents of 3.8 amperes or less.
NEMA Motor
Size HP
2
3
1 5
7.5
10
10
2
3
20
25
30
40
15
20
25
15
4
50
30
40
50
60
75
100
CB
Type
SE
SE
SE
SF
SGL
200/208V
Trip
15
20
30
50
50
70
100
100
125
200
230V
Trip
15
15
30
30
50
70
100
100
125
150
200
380V
Trip
15
15
20
30
30
50
70
70
100
100
125
150
200
460V
Trip
15
15
15
20
20
40
50
60
575V
Trip
15
15
15
20
20
30
40
50
70
100
125
150
200
225
50
70
100
100
125
150
NEMA Motor
Size HP
5
50
60
75
100
6
125
150
200
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
CB
Type
SGL
SGL/SKL
SKL
200/208V
Trip
200/250
300
350
500
800
800
230V
Trip
225/250
300/350
400 225/250
300
300/350
800
800
1000
380V
Trip
500
800
800
460V
Trip
225/250 225/250
300 250
350/400 300
500
600
800
1000
575V
Trip
400
500
800
800
Motor Selection Table for Spectra Motor Circuit Protectors
208V
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
–
7.5
10
25
40
40
50
60
75
100
150
Max HP per System Voltage
230V 380V 460V
0.5
1.5
1.0
3.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10
15
25
30
50
50
50
60
75
100
5.0
10.0
15
25
30
50
75
60
75
100
125
150
200
300
5.0
10.0
15
25
25
30
60
100
60
100
125
150
200
250
350
400
575V
1.5
3.0
7.5
10.0
15
20
25
30
40
60
60
100
75
100
150
200
250
300
400
Starter
Size
1
2
3-4
4RVAT
4STD
5
6
➀
150
200
➀ Size 4 RVAT with SF CB requires an additional 6" height extension.
350
400
400
500
800
1000
100
150
100
150
150
200
250
300
50
60
50
70
40
25
30
40
Amps
3
7
15
20
25
30
Rating Plug
CAT#
SRPE7A3
SRPE7A7
SRPE30A15
SRPE30A20
SRPE30A25
SRPE30A30
SRPE60A40
SRPE30A25
SRPE30A30
SRPE60A40
SRPE60A50
SRPE60A60
SRPE60A50
SRPE100A70
SRPE100A100
SRPE150A150
SRPE150A100
SRPE150A150
SRPF250A150
SRPF250A200
SRPG400A250
SRPG400A300
SRPG400A350
SRPG400A400
SRPG800A400
SRPG800A500
SRPK1200A800
SRPK1200A1000
CB
Sensor
7
400
100
150
150
200
30
60
30
60
600
1200
CB
Frame
SE
150
SF
250
SG
600
SG
600
SK
1200
J3
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
J
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Ther-Mag Controllers
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.
Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full load current multiplied by 1.25.
Provide short circuit protection in accordance with the
National Electrical Code.
WARNING: Opening of the circuit breaker may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.
Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
.41-.45
.46-.49
.50-.53
.54-.59
.60-.65
.66-.76
.77-.84
.85-.93
.94-1.04
1.05-1.15
1.16-1.27
1.28-1.39
1.40-1.55
1.56-1.73
1.74-1.89
1.90-2.05
2.06-2.28
2.29-2.47
2.48-2.79
2.80-3.31
3.32-3.70
3.71-4.06
4.07-4.47
4.48-4.95
C196A
C220A
C239A
C268A
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
C466A
C526A
Heater
Number
CR 123
C054A
C060A
C066A
C071A
C078A
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
17.2-18.1
18.2-20.0
20.1-21.5
21.6-22.5
22.6-23.9
24.0-26.3
26.4-27.0
Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
5.48-5.85
5.85-6.47
6.48-7.35
7.36-8.06
8.07-9.03
9.04-9.61
9.62-10.5
10.6-11.6
11.7-12.5
12.6-13.6
13.7-16.7
Heater
Number
CR 123
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
16.8-17.9
18.0-18.7
18.8-20.4
20.5-22.7
22.8-24.7
24.8-26.3
26.4-29.5
29.6-32.5
32.6-36.7
36.8-41.9
42.0-43.2
43.3-45.0
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
4.96-549
5.50-5.91
5.92-6.47
6.48-7.20
7.21-8.22
8.23-8.72
8.73-9.67
9.68-10.4
10.5-11.0
11.1-12.4
12.5-13.2
13.3-15.4
15.5-17.1
17.2-18.0
Size 1
Heater
Number
CR 123
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
Heater
Number
CR 123
C592A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
19.0-19.3
19.4-22.1
22.2-23.4
23.5-27.0
27.1-29.1
29.2-31.8
31.9-33.9
34.0-37.6
37.7-41.9
42.0-47.7
47.8-52.1
52.2-55.8
55.9-59.7
59.8-68.1
68.2-71.5
71.6-78.2
78.3-87.5
87.6-90.0
Heater
Number
CR 123
F233B
F243B
F270B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
17.8-18.4
18.5-21.1
21.2-22.1
22.2-26.1
26.2-28.0
28.1-31.3
31.4-33.3
33.4-34.3
34.4-40.9
41.0-44.7
44.8-51.0
51.1-52.0
52.1-55.4
55.5-63.3
63.4-66.1
66.2-73.5
73.6-82.2
82.3-90.0
Size 4 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
27.1-32.2
32.3-34.0
34.1-36.8
36.9-44.6
44.7-48.4
48.5-53.9
54.0-57.4
57.5-60.0
60.1-69.5
69.6-71.7
71.8-79.9
80.0-92.3
92.4-97.0
97.1-108
109-118
119-131
132-135
Heater
Number
CR 123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.9
44.0-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-105
106-114
115-128
129-131
132-135
Size 5 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
109-118
119-128
129-138
139-155
156-168
169-184
Heater
Number
CR 123
C592A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
185-200
201-221
222-237
238-262
263-270
J4
Heater
Number
CR 123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
F174C
Heater
Number
CR 123
F233B
F243B
F270B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
Heater
Number
CR 123
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Mag Controllers
The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.
WARNING: To maintain overload, short circuit, and ground fault protection, use the following instructions to select heaters and to adjust the Mag-Break trip setting.
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply motor fullload current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.
Use the heater table to verify that the Mag-Break and current limiter rating is correct for the motor full-load current. Then set the Mag-Break trip setting to the recommended value.
If the Mag-Break trips when starting the motor, increase trip setting one step at a time until the motor can be consistently started.
Do not exceed the maximum trip setting shown in the heater table.
Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of heater full-load current multiplied by 1.25.
WARNING: Overload relays with automatic reset may automatically start a motor connected to a 2-wire control circuit. When automatic restarting is not desired, use a 3-wire control circuit.
WARNING: Tripping of the Mag-Break may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and be replaced if damaged.
If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.
Size 0 and 1 (Standard )
C379A
C419A
C466A
C526A
C592A
C630A
C630A
C695A
C196A
C220A
C239A
C268A
C301A
C301A
C326A
C356A
Heater
Number
CR 123
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C137B
C151B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
.65-.74
.75-.84
.85-.92
.93-1.02
1.03-1.10
1.11-1.23
1.24-1.38
1.39-1.49
1.50-1.67
1.68-1.79
1.80-1.98
1.99-2.24
2.25-2.43
2.25-2.43
2.44-2.75
2.76-3.25
3.26-3.43
3.44-4.03
4.04-4.43
4.44-4.94
4.95-5.36
5.37-5.77
5.37-5.77
5.78-6.35
6.36-6.92
6.93-7.99
8.00-8.47
8.48-9.19
9.20-10.0
10.1-10.7
10.8-12.0
10.8-12.0
12.1-12.9
12.1-12.9
13.0-15.1
15.2-16.3
16.4-17.9
Size 1
18.0-19.7
19.8-21.2
21.3-22.3
22.4-23.5
23.6-25.5
23.6-25.5
25.6-27.0
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C303B
C330B
7
7
15
15
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
7
3
3
3
3
TEC &
TECL
Rating
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
15
15
15
30
15
15
15
15
15
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
50
50
1
1
2
2
3
LO
LO
1
2
2
LO
LO
LO
1
1
3
LO
LO
LO
1
2
3
LO
LO
LO
1
1
2
3
LO
LO
LO
1
2
1
1
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
3
4
2
2
LO
LO
1
1
2
2
7
6
5
6
4
4
2
3
8
1
6
7
4
5
7
2
6
6
4
5
3
3
3
4
8
2
4
8
3
7
8
3
5
6
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
.66-.76
.77-.84
.85-.93
.94-1.04
1.05-1.15
1.16-1.27
1.28-1.39
1.40-1.55
1.56-1.73
1.74-1.89
1.90-2.05
2.06-2.28
2.29-2.47
2.29-2.47
2.48-2.79
2.80-3.31
3.32-3.70
3.71-4.06
4.07-4.47
4.48-4.95
4.96-5.49
4.96-5.49
5.50-5.91
5.50-5.91
5.92-6.47
6.48-7.20
7.21-8.22
8.23-8.72
8.73-9.67
9.68-10.4
10.5-11.0
11.1-12.4
11.1-12.4
12.5-13.2
13.3-15.4
15.5-17.1
Size 1
17.2-18.1
18.2-20.0
20.1-21.5
21.6-22.5
22.6-23.9
22.6-23.9
24.0-26.0
24.0-26.0
26.1-27.0
Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)
C419A
C466A
C526A
C592A
C592A
C630A
C630A
C695A
C220A
C239A
C268A
C301A
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
Heater
Number
CR 123
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
C196A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C273B
C303B
C303B
C330B
15
7
15
15
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
3
3
3
TEC &
TECL
Rating
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
15
15
15
30
15
15
15
15
30
30
30
30
50
30
50
50
30
30
30
30
2
LO
3
LO
LO
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
LO
LO
LO
1
1
LO
LO
LO
LO
3
LO
LO
2
2
1
1
LO
LO
LO
LO
2
3
1
2
Rec.
LO
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
LO
LO
LO
LO
1
LO
LO
LO
LO
4
4
2
3
LO
1
1
2
2
2
1
8
6
7
5
5
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
7
2
6
7
4
5
3
3
2
3
4
8
3
8
2
4
6
7
5
5
J5
J
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers
Size 2 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
8.81-9.27
9.28-9.99
10.0-11.1
11.2-12.1
11.2-12.1
12.2-13.0
12.2-13.0
13.1-15.5
15.6-16.8
16.9-18.0
18.1-19.7
19.8-21.6
21.7-23.9
21.7-23.9
24.0-25.5
24.0-25.5
25.6-26.0
25.6-28.2
28.3-31.6
31.7-34.7
34.8-37.8
37.9-40.6
40.7-43.4
Heater
Number
CR 123
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C137B
C151B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C250B
C273B
C273B
C303B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
30
30
30
30
15
30
30
30
TEC &
TECL
Rating
15
15
15
15
30
50
50
50
50
50
30
50
30
50
50
LO
1
2
2
LO
3
LO
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
4
LO
1
1
Rec.
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
2
3
3
LO
6
6
7
2
6
7
5
5
3
4
8
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
3
9
2
8
Size 2 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
9.04-9.61
9.62-10.5
10.6-11.6
11.7-12.5
11.7-12.5
12.6-13.0
12.6-13.6
13.7-16.7
16.8-17.9
18.0-18.7
18.8-20.4
20.5-22.7
22.8-24.7
22.8-24.7
24.8-26.0
24.8-26.3
26.4-29.5
29.6-32.5
32.6-36.7
36.8-41.9
42.0-43.2
43.3-43.4
C250B
C273B
C273B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
Heater
Number
CR 123
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C137B
C151B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
30
30
30
30
15
30
30
30
TEC &
TECL
Rating
15
15
15
15
30
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
50
50
2
3
1
2
3
LO
4
LO
LO
2
3
2
2
4
LO
1
1
Rec.
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
2
3
3
LO
6
7
8
2
7
8
5
6
3
5
9
3
7
9
4
6
9
4
4
2
9
Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
17.8-18.4
18.5-21.1
21.2-22.1
22.2-26.0
26.1-28.0
28.1-31.3
31.4-33.3
33.4-34.3
34.4-40.9
41.0-43.4
43.5-44.7
44.8-51.0
51.1-52.0
52.1-55.4
Heater
Number
CR 123
F233B
F243B
F270B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
50
50
50
50
50
100
100
100
100
TEC &
TECL
Rating
30
30
30
30
50
2
LO
LO
1
1
LO
1
1
1
Rec.
1
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
1
2
3
LO
6
7
7
4
3
4
8
3
4
6
6
4
5
Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) cont.
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
55.5-63.3
63.4-66.1
66.2-73.5
73.6-82.2
82.3-86.9
Heater
Number
CR 123
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
TEC &
TECL
Rating
100
100
100
100
100
2
3
2
2
Rec.
1
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
6
6
7
9
Size 4 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.4
43.5-43.9
44.0-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
70.7-76.3
76.4-86.9
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-102
103-110
111-122
123-131
Heater
Number
CR 123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F914B
F104C
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
150
TEC &
TECL
Rating
50
50
50
50
100
100
150
150
150
150
150
150
1
1
2
4
LO
1
1
2
3
3
LO
1
2
1
1
3
1
2
2
Rec.
1
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
4
7
3
5
6
7
1
5
6
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
3
3
8
2
Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.4
36.8-43.8
43.9-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-86.9
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-105
106-114
115-128
129-130
Heater
Number
CR 123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
TEC &
TECL
Rating
50
50
50
50
100
150
150
150
150
150
150
LO
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
2
3
1
2
2
1
Rec.
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
4
2
2
3
LO
7
2
5
6
7
8
5
6
4
5
3
3
5
6
3
4
2
3
Size 5 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
106-115
116-125
126-135
126-135
136-151
152-164
165-179
180-195
196-215
216-231
232-255
256-270
Heater
Number
CR 123
C592A
C630A
C695A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
TEC &
TECL
Rating
550-1670
550-1670
550-1670
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
1000-3300
3
4
4
LO
1
2
2
Rec.
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
6
3
3
LO
LO
3
3
7
7
6
7
HI
5
6
4
5
J6
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers
Size 0 and 1 (Standard)
2.25-2.43
2.44-2.75
2.76-3.25
3.26-3.43
3.44-4.03
4.04-4.43
4.44-4.94
4.95-5.36
5.37-5.77
5.37-5.77
5.78-6.35
6.36-6.92
6.93-7.99
8.00-8.47
8.48-9.19
9.20-10.0
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
.65-.74
.75-.84
.85-.92
.93-1.02
1.03-1.10
1.11-1.23
1.24-1.38
1.39-1.49
1.50-1.67
1.68-1.79
1.80-1.98
1.99-2.24
10.1-10.7
10.8-12.0
12.1-12.9
13.0-15.1
15.2-16.3
16.4-17.9
C630A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
C466A
C526A
C592A
Heater
Number
CR123
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
C196A
C220A
C239A
C268A
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
15
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SE
Rating
Plug
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
25
25
3
2
2
2
4
LO
LO
LO
3
3
2
2
3
LO
LO
LO
3
4
2
2
3
3
LO
LO
2
3
LO
LO
LO
LO
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
2
5
5
4
5
3
4
2
2
5
6
5
5
5
6
5
4
4
5
3
4
6
3
5
6
4
5
4
4
6
3
Size 1 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
18.0-19.7
19.8-21.2
21.3-22.3
22.4-23.5
23.6-25.5
25.6-27.0
Heater
Number
CR123
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
SE
Rating
Plug
30
30
30
40
40
40
2
3
3
3
3
Rec.
3
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
5
5
5
6
5
Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)
2.29-2.47
2.48-2.79
2.80-3.31
3.32-3.70
3.71-4.06
4.07-4.47
4.48-4.95
4.96-5.49
5.50-5.91
5.50-5.91
5.92-6.47
6.48-7.20
7.21-8.22
8.23-8.72
8.73-9.67
9.68-10.4
10.5-11.0
11.1-12.4
12.5-13.2
13.3-15.4
15.5-17.1
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
.66-.76
.77-.84
.85-.93
.94-1.04
1.05-1.15
1.16-1.27
1.28-1.39
1.40-1.55
1.56-1.73
1.74-1.89
1.90-2.05
2.06-2.28
C630A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
C466A
C526A
C592A
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
Heater
Number
CR123
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
C196A
C220A
C239A
C268A
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
15
20
20
20
20
25
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SE
Rating
Plug
3
3
3
3
Size 1 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
17.2-18.1
18.2-20.0
20.1-21.5
21.6-22.5
22.6-23.9
24.0-26.0
26.1-27.0
Heater
Number
CR123
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
SE
Rating
Plug
25
30
30
30
40
40
40
3
2
2
2
4
LO
LO
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
3
LO
LO
2
2
3
2
2
LO
LO
LO
LO
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
2
5
5
4
5
3
4
2
3
5
4
4
5
3
4
6
3
5
6
4
5
5
5
6
4
5
4
4
6
3
3
2
3
3
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
3 6
3
3
5
5
6
5
5
5
J
J7
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers
Size 2 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
8.81-9.27
9.28-9.99
10.0-11.1
11.2-12.1
12.2-13.0
13.1-15.5
15.6-16.8
16.9-18.0
18.1-19.7
19.8-21.6
21.7-23.9
24.0-25.5
25.6-28.2
28.3-31.6
31.7-34.7
34.8-37.8
37.9-40.6
40.7-43.4
Heater
Number
CR123
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
30
40
40
50
20
25
25
30
SE
Rating
Plug
15
20
20
20
20
50
50
50
60
60
2
2
3
2
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
Rec.
3
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
5
5
4
5
6
5
5
6
6
5
5
5
5
6
5
6
5
Size 2 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
9.04-9.61
9.62-10.5
10.6-11.6
11.7-12.5
12.6-13.6
13.7-16.7
16.8-17.9
18.0-18.7
18.8-20.4
20.5-22.7
22.8-24.7
24.8-26.3
26.4-29.5
29.6-32.5
32.6-36.7
36.8-41.9
42.0-43.2
43.3-43.4
Heater
Number
CR123
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
30
30
40
40
20
20
25
25
SE
Rating
Plug
15
20
20
20
50
50
50
50
60
60
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
6
6
5
5
5
6
Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
17.8-18.4
18.5-21.1
21.2-22.1
22.2-26.0
26.1-28.0
28.1-31.3
31.4-33.3
33.4-34.3
34.4-40.9
41.0-44.7
44.8-51.0
51.1-52.0
52.1-55.4
55.5-63.3
63.4-66.1
66.2-73.5
73.6-82.2
82.3-86.9
Heater
Number
CR123
F233B
F243B
F207B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
70
100
100
100
50
50
50
70
SE
Rating
Plug
30
30
30
40
40
100
100
100
150
150
3
LO
LO
2
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
Rec.
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Max.
5
5
5
5
5
6
4
5
5
5
4
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
Size 4 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.9
44.0-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-102.0
103.0-110.0
111.0-122.0
123.0-131.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.8
43.9-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-105.0
106.0-114.0
115.0-128.0
129.0-130.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
70
100
100
100
100
100
150
150
SE
Rating
Plug
50
50
70
70
150
150
150
150
150
70
100
100
100
100
100
150
150
SE
Rating
Plug
50
50
70
70
150
150
150
150
150
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
3
4
3
3
4
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
6
4
5
5
6
5
5
5
4
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
3
4
3
3
4
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
6
4
5
5
6
5
5
5
4
J8
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers
Size 4 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.9
44.0-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-102.0
103.0-110.0
111.0-122.0
123.0-131.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
70
100
100
100
150
150
150
200
SF
Rating
Plug
70
70
70
70
200
200
200
200
200
LO
LO
2
LO
2
2
3
2
LO
LO
2
2
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
2
2
2
2
5
5
4
4
6
6
4
5
6
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
4
Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.8
43.9-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-105.0
106.0-114.0
115.0-128.0
129.0-130.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
70
100
100
100
150
150
150
200
SF
Rating
Plug
70
70
70
70
200
200
200
200
200
LO
LO
2
LO
2
2
3
2
LO
LO
2
2
2
Mag-Break
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
3
3
2
3
5
5
4
4
6
6
4
5
6
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
4
Size 5 – 300:15 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
106-115
116-125
126-135
136-151
152-164
165-179
180-195
196-215
216-231
232-255
256-270
Heater
Number
CR123
C592A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
SG
Rating
Plug
250
250
250
250
300
300
350
350
400
400
400
2
2
2
2
2
3
Instantaneous
Trip Setting
Rec.
LO
Max.
3
LO
2
2
2
5
4
4
4
5
4
5
4
5
5
Size 6 – 600:5 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
181-197
198-214
215-238
239-258
259-290
291-346
347-387
388-424
Heater
Number
CR123
C220A
C239A
C268A
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
SG
Rating
Plug
400
400
500
500
500
600
600
600
Instantaneous
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
MIN.
2
MIN
MIN
4
4
4
5
2
MIN
2
3
5
5
5
MAX
Size 6 – 600:5 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph, 3 Heater
181-197
198-214
215-238
239-258
259-290
291-346
347-387
388-423
424-467
468-516
517-540
Heater
Number
CR123
C220A
C239A
C268A
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
C466A
C526A
C592A
SK
Rating
Plug
400
400
400
500
500
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
LO
LO
2
LO
2
2
Instantaneous
Trip Setting
Rec.
Max.
LO 4
2
3
LO
2
4
5
4
5
4
5
5
4
4
5
J
J9
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Overload Relays
Electronic Overloads for Circuit Breaker Controllers
Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25
service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.
4
4
3
4
3
3
2
2
NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number
1
1
0.8 to 1.7
1.8 to 3.4
CR324CXD
CR324CXE
1
2
1
1
3.2 to 6.8
6.5 to 13.5
13 to 27
6.5 to 13.5
CR324CXF
CR324CXG
CR324CXH
CR324DXG
5 ➀
5 ➀
5 ➀
6 ➁
6 ➁
13 to 27
25 to 50
17 to 35
35 to 70
65 to 135
17 to 35
35 to 70
65 to 135
35 to 70
65 to 135
130 to 270
130 to 270
260 to 540
CR324DXH
CR324DXJ
CR324FXK
CR324FXL
CR324FXM
CR324FXK
CR324FXL
CR324FXM
CR324GXN
CR324GXP
CR324GXQ
CR324HXS
CR324HXT
➀ 300:15 CT’s
➁ 800:5 CT’s
Breaker Frame & Type
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
G Mag. & Thermal Mag.
G,K Mag. & Thermal Mag.
K Mag. & Thermal Mag
Overload Relays for Compact 6" Starter CL45A310MJ, NEMA Size 1
FLA Range in Amps
0.4-.65
0.65-1.1
1-1.5
1.3-1.9
1.8-2.7
2.5-4.1
4.0-6.3
5.5-8.5
8.0-12
10.0-16
14.5-18
17.5-22
21-26
Class 10 Class 20
Catalog Number Catalog Number
RTN1D
RTN1F
RTN1G
RTN1H
RTN1J
RTNIK
RTNIL
RTNIM
RTNIN
RTNIP
RTNIS
RTNIT
RTNIU
RT12K
RT12L
RT12M
RT12N
RT12P
RT12S
RT12T
RT12U
Breaker Frame & Type
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
E Mag. & Thermal Mag.
J10
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Fused Controllers
The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.
For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to
1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.
Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full-load current multiplied by 1.25.
Provide short-circuit protection in accordance with the
National Electrical Code, except Fuses are not to exceed the value shown in the table.
Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than the maximum RMS symmetrical amperes indicated in the table below, 600-volts maximum, when protected by an appropriate fuse having an interrupting rating not less than the available short-circuit current.
Table 1–Maximum Fuse and Short-Circuit Rating
Class RK Fuse Class J Fuse
NEMA Max.
Size
Clip
Max. RMS
Sym. Amps
Max.
Clip
Max. RMS
Sym. Amps
3
4
1
2
5
30A
60
100
200
400
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
60A
100
200
400
600
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Class K-1, K-5 Fuse
Max.
Clip
Max. RMS
Sym. Amps
Fuse per
Overload
Heater
Table
5,000
5,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
WARNING: Opening of the fuse(s) may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
Size 1
17.2-18.1
18.2-20.0
20.1-21.5
21.6-22.5
22.6-23.9
24.0-26.3
26.4-27.0
Heater
Number
CR123
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
60➀
60➀
60➀
60➀
60➀
60➀
60➀
Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
1.90-2.05
2.06-2.28
2.29-2.47
2.48-2.79
2.80-3.31
3.32-3.70
3.71-4.06
4.07-4.47
4.48-4.95
4.96-5.49
5.50-5.91
5.92-6.47
6.48-7.20
7.21-8.22
8.23-8.72
8.73-9.67
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
.41-.45
.46-.49
.50-.53
.54-.59
.60-.65
.66-.76
.77-.84
.85-.93
.94-1.04
1.05-1.15
1.16-1.27
1.28-1.39
1.40-1.55
1.56-1.73
1.74-1.89
9.68-10.4
10.5-11.0
11.1-12.4
12.5-13.2
13.3-15.4
15.5-17.1
C526A
C592A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C239A
C268A
C301A
C326A
C356A
C379A
C419A
C466A
Heater
Number
CR123
C054A
C060A
C066A
C071A
C078A
C087A
C097A
C109A
C118A
C131A
C148A
C163A
C184A
C196A
C220A
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
C163B
C180B
25
30
30
35➀
15
20
20
25
10
12
15
15
6
6
6
10
3
6
6
6
3
3
3
3
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
35➀
40➀
45➀
50➀
60➀
60➀
Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
5.48-5.85
5.86-6.47
6.48-7.35
7.36-8.06
8.07-9.03
9.04-9.61
9.62-10.5
10.6-11.6
11.7-12.5
12.6-13.6
13.7-16.7
16.8-17.9
18.0-18.7
18.8-20.4
20.5-22.7
22.8-24.7
24.8-26.3
26.4-29.5
29.6-32.5
32.6-36.7
36.8-41.9
42.0-43.2
43.3-45.0
C163B
C180B
C198B
C214B
C228B
C250B
C273B
C303B
C330B
C366B
C400B
C440B
C460B
Heater
Number
CR123
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
60
60
70➀
80➀
80➀
90➀
90➀
100➀
100➀
100➀
100➀
100➀
100➀
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
20
20
35
40
45
50
25
30
30
35
➀ See Table 1 for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.
J
J11
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Overload Heater Tables
Heaters for Fused Controllers
Size 3 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
19.0-19.3
19.4-22.1
22.2-23.4
23.5-27.0
27.1-29.1
29.2-31.8
31.9-33.9
34.0-37.6
37.7-41.9
42.0-47.7
47.8-52.1
52.2-55.8
55.9-59.7
59.8-68.1
68.2-71.5
71.6-78.2
78.3-87.5
87.6-90.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F233B
F243B
F270B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
70
80
80
90
100
110➀
125➀
125➀
150➀
175➀
175➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
Size 3 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
17.8-18.4
18.5-21.1
21.2-22.1
22.2-26.1
26.2-28.0
28.1-31.3
31.4-33.3
33.4-34.3
34.4-40.9
41.0-44.7
44.8-51.0
51.1-52.0
52.1-55.4
55.5-63.3
63.4-66.1
66.2-73.5
73.6-82.2
82.3-90.0
Heater
Number
CR123
F233B
F243B
F270B
F300B
F327B
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
70
80
80
90
100
110➀
125➀
125➀
150➀
150➀
175➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
200➀
J
Size 4 (Standard)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
27.1-32.2
32.3-34.0
34.1-36.8
36.9-44.6
44.7-48.4
48.5-53.9
54.0-57.4
57.5-60.0
60.1-69.5
69.6-71.7
71.8-79.9
80.0-92.3
92.4-97.0
97.1-108
109-118
119-131
132-135
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
110
125
125
150
175
175
200
225➀
225➀
250➀
275➀
300➀
350➀
400➀
400➀
400➀
400➀
➀ See Table 1 (page J-17) for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.
Size 4 (Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
28.8-32.0
32.1-34.2
34.3-36.7
36.8-43.9
44.0-46.6
46.7-52.6
52.7-55.6
55.7-58.7
58.8-67.1
67.2-70.6
70.7-76.3
76.4-88.7
88.8-93.4
93.5-105
106-114
115-128
129-131
132-135
Heater
Number
CR123
F357B
F395B
F430B
F487B
F567B
F614B
F658B
F719B
F772B
F848B
F914B
F104C
F114C
F118C
F133C
F149C
F161C
F174C
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
110
125
125
150
175
175
200
225➀
225➀
250➀
275➀
300➀
350➀
350➀
400➀
400➀
400➀
400➀
Size 5 – 300:15CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)
Motor Full-
Load Amps
3-Ph., 3-Heater
109-118
119-128
129-138
139-155
156-168
169-184
185-200
201-221
222-237
238-262
263-270
Heater
Number
CR123
C592A
C630A
C695A
C778A
C867A
C955A
C104B
C113B
C125B
C137B
C151B
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
Electronic Overload Table for Fusible Controllers
Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25 service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.
4
5 ➀
5 ➀
5 ➀
3
3
4
4
6 ➁
6 ➁
NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps Catalog Number Max. Fuse in Amps
1 0.8 to 1.7
CR324CXD Class R 30 Class J 60
1
1
1
1
1.8 to 3.4
3.2 to 6.8
6.5 to 13.5
13 to 27
CR324CXE
CR324CXF
CR324CXG
CR324CXH
60 100 2
2
2
3
6.5 to 13.5
13 to 27
25 to 50
17 to 35
CR324DXG
CR324DXH
CR324DXJ
CR324FXK 100 200
35 to 70
65 to 135
17 to 35
35 to 70
65 to 135
35 to 70
65 to 135
130 to 270
130 to 270
260 to 540
CR324FXL
CR324FXM
CR324FXK
CR324FXL
CR324FXM
CR324GXN
CR324GXP
CR324GXQ
CR324HXS
CR324HXT
200
400
600
400
600
Class L 1200
➀ 300:15 CT’s
➁ 800:5 CT’s
J12
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Starter Fuse Selection
The following tables are furnished as a guide. Check vendor fuse characteristics before making final selection.
200 and 208 Volts
Size
1
2
3
4
5
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
Hp
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
50
60
75
BMC–Bussman Fuse
CSC–Chase Shawmut Fuse
16.3
25.3
31.3
45.1
591
731
881
120
Typical
FLA
2.3
3.2
3.9
5.3
7.1
10.6
150
174
210
30
30
60
100
100
100
200
200
Switch
Amp
30
30
30
30
30
30
400
400
400
UL Class J
Time Delay No Time DelayBMC CSC
CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip FRN
Time-Delay RK-5
Clip TR
6
8
3
5
30
30
30
30
10
10
15
20
30
30
30
30
2.8
4
5
7
30
30
30
30
3.5
4.5
6.25
8
10
15
25
30
50
60
90
100
125
175
225
250
300
30
30
30
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
400
400
25
30
45
60
90
110
150
175
200
225
300
350
450
30
30
60
60
100
200
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
9
12
20
30
40
60
70
90
100
150
175
200
250
30
30
30
30
60
60
100
100
100
200
200
200
400
125
175
225
225
300
40
60
90
100
12
15
25
30
100
100
200
200
30
30
60
60
Clip
30
30
30
30
30
30
400
400
400
230 Volts
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
14.2
22.0
27.2
39.2
39.2
51.4
63.6
76.6
Typical
FLA
2.0
2.8
3.4
4.6
6.2
9.2
104
130
151
183
240
296
348
468
5
7 1/2
10
15
15
20
25
30
Hp
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
100
100
100
100
30
30
60
60
Switch
Amp
30
30
30
30
30
30
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
100
100
150
200
225
300
350
450
500
–
40
60
60
80
10
15
25
30
UL Class J
Time Delay No Time Delay
CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J Clip
6
8
3
4
30
30
30
30
10
15
15
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
60
60
100
25
30
45
60
90
–
110
150
100
–
200
200
30
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
–
175
200
225
300
350
400
600
600
–
–
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
600
–
–
17.5
25
35
50
–
60
80
100
BMC
FRN
2.5
3.5
4
6.25
8
12
125
150
175
225
300
350
450
500
Time-Delay RK-5
–
60
100
100
30
30
60
60
Clip
30
30
30
30
30
30
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
–
80
100
100
25
30
40
60
TR
3
4
5.6
8
10
15
150
200
225
300
350
450
500
600
–
100
100
100
30
30
60
60
30
30
30
30
CSC
Clip
30
30
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
J13
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Starter Fuse Selection
460 Volts
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
65.0
75.5
91.5
120
148
172
224
295
343
396
453
7.1
11.0
13.6
19.6
25.7
31.8
38.3
52.0
Typical
FLA
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.3
3.1
4.6
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
Hp
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
600
60
60
100
100
30
30
30
60
Switch
Amp
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
80
100
110
150
175
225
250
300
450
500
600
–
20
30
40
50
5
8
10
15
UL Class J
Time Delay No Time Delay
CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP
1.5
2
3
4
30
30
30
30
3
3
6
6
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
60
10
15
25
35
40
50
90
100
60
60
100
100
30
30
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
–
110
125
150
175
225
225
300
350
500
600
–
–
–
200
200
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
600
–
–
–
80
90
110
150
200
225
300
350
400
450
500
9
15
17.5
25
35
40
45
60
BMC
FRS
1.25
1.6
2
2.8
3.5
5
60
60
100
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
600
30
30
60
60
30
30
30
30
Time-Delay K-5
Clip
CSC
TRS
30
30
30
30
1.4
2
2.5
4
20
30
40
50
5
7
10
15
60
75
100
110
150
175
225
250
350
400
500
600
600
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
600
600
60
60
60
100
30
30
30
30
Clip
30
30
30
30
30
30
J
575 Volts
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
Hp
3/4
1
11⁄2
2
3
5
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
8.8
10.9
15.7
20.6
25.4
30.6
41.6
52.0
Typical
FLA
1.1
1.4
1.8
2.5
3.7
5.7
60.4
73.2
96.0
118
138
179
236
274
317
363
60
100
100
100
30
30
60
60
Switch
Amp
30
30
30
30
30
30
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
600
60
80
90
125
150
175
225
300
350
450
500
600
25
35
40
45
6
10
15
15
UL Class J
Time Delay No Time Delay
CSC# AJT CLIP CSC# A4J CLIP
3
4
2
2
30
30
30
30
3
6
6
10
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
60
60
60
15
20
30
35
45
60
80
100
60
60
100
100
30
30
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
110
125
150
175
225
225
300
400
500
600
–
–
200
200
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
600
–
–
35
40
45
60
10
15
20
25
BMC
FRS
1.25
1.6
2.25
2.8
4.5
7
70
90
110
150
175
225
300
350
400
450
60
60
100
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
400
600
30
30
60
60
30
30
30
30
Time-Delay K-5
Clip
CSC
TRS
30
30
30
30
1.6
2
3
4
25
35
40
45
6
9
15
15
60
80
90
125
150
175
225
300
350
450
500
600
60
60
60
100
30
30
30
60
Clip
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
600
J14
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Control Transformer Fusing
600V Type ATMR or Equivalent
XFMR
VA
200-230V
60HZ
60 1
240V
60HZ
380-400V
50HZ
1 3/4
416V
50HZ
6/10
440-480V
60HZ
1/2
575-600V
60HZ
1/2
75 1-1/2 1-1/2 8/10 8/10
100 2 2 1-1/4 1
3/4
1
6/10
3/4
150 3-1/2 3
200 4 4
250 5
300 6
500 6 6
5
6
1-1/2
2
2
6
1-1/2
2
2
6
1-1/2
2
2
3-1/2 3-1/2 2
5
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2
4
Secondary Volts 250V
Type TRM or Equivalent
110-120V
50HZ
6/10
220-240V
50HZ
3/10
8/10
1
1/2
6/10
1-6/10
2
2-8/10
3-2/10
5
8/10
1
1-1/2
1-6/10
2-8/10
Control Fusing for Non-CPT Applications
Type Control
Line to Line
Line to Neutral
Common Control
Separate Source
Fuse Amps (Class CC)
10
10
6
6
VA
60
100
150
200
250
300
500
Typical CPT Ratings (480V/120V Shown)
%R %X
Open Circuit
Secondary Volts
9.05
6.39
5.02
5.09
1.03
1.18
1.01
1.06
131.9
129.4
127.3
126.2
6.81
5.15
5.84
.88
.73
1.45
127.8
126.4
128.7
Heat Loss Considerations
In determining the heat loss of a motor control center for air conditioning requirements, 250 watts per foot of lineup is a reasonable assumption.
Actual heat loss will vary due to section loading and diversity factors. A typical motor control center may operate normally at 60 percent of maximum possible loading.
Fully rated circuit breaker starters with CPT’s, approximate losses are:
Size 1– 27 Watts
Size 2– 57 Watts
Size 3–130 Watts
Size 4–200 Watts
Size 5–300 Watts
Size 6–650 Watts
Heat losses for feeders and mains vary depending on frame size, loading and type of trip with electronic trips having lower losses. The following table provides a general guide for estimating losses assuming 80 percent loading. For critical applications refer to the Company.
Type
Molded Case
Breaker Frame
Insulated Case
Power Break
Frame
SE150
SF250
SG600
SK800
SK1200
800A
1600A
2000A
2500A
Loss (Watts)
15
20
25
40
50
80
210
305
375
Typical losses for transformers:
1kVA, 1-Ph
5 kVA, 1-Ph
75 Watts
190 Watts
9 kVA, 3-Ph 295 Watts
15 kVA, 3-Ph 460 Watts
30 kVA, 3-Ph 1000 Watts
Horizontal and vertical bus losses, when loaded to capacity are approximately 100 watts per section.
Solid State Starters or VFDs will typically generate 3 watts per ampere of load during operation.
J
J15
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Motor Loads
NEMA Contactor Ratings
Description 1
2
Normal Starting Duty HP/KW rating by NEMA Size
2
3
3
7.5
4
–
5
–
6
–
Single Phase
115V
230V
200V
3 7.5
15 – – –
7.5/5.5
10/7.5
25/18.5
40/30 75/55 150/110
230V 7.5/5.5
15/11 30/22 50/37 100/75 200/150
Three Phase 380/415V 10/7.5
25/18.5
50/37 75/55 150/110 300/260
460V
575V
10/7.5
25/18.5
50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260
10/7.5
25/18.5
50/37 100/75 200/150 400/260
Non-Motor Loads
When selecting contactors for non-motor loads, the following load characteristics should be considered:
1. Voltage and maximum continuous current.
2. Maximum peak inrush current and duration.
3. RMS current and duration of maximum current on cyclic loads.
4. Frequency of operation.
5. Maximum interrupting current, voltage, power factor and wave form.
6. Available short-circuit current.
Non-motor load ratings are based on the use of two poles to control single-phase loads and three poles to control three-phase loads.
Capacitor switching, requires special considerations. A discharged capacitor acts essentially like a short circuit, and the inrush current is limited by the impedance connected in series with the capacitor which includes connecting cables.
Therefore, the maximum capacitance which can be switched by a contactor will increase with higher series impedance. Switching more than one capacitor or capacitor bank in close electrical proximity to each other should be avoided as the energized capacitor bank can increase the inrush current to the second bank when it is energized.
Reactors or resistors may be required between the two capacitor banks to limit inrush currents.
NEMA Standards require shunt capacitors to operate satisfactorily at 135 percent of rated KVAR due to manufacturing tolerances and other variations. The higher inrush and steady state currents associated with these capacitors should be taken into consideration.
NEMA Publication ICS2-210 covers non-motor loads.
NEMA Contactor Ratings
Contactor
Maximum
Cont.
Inrush
Size of Amps Current
(Amps
Peak)
2
3
0
1
18
27
45
90
140
288
483
947
4
5
6
135
270
540
1581
3163
6326
Tung
sten➀
Resistive
Lamps
Loads➀
10
15
30
60
120
240
480
18
27
45
90
135
270
540
Transformer Primary Switching (kVA)
Transformers having inrush currents of not more than 20 times FLA
Transformers having inrush currents of over
20 through 40 times FLA
Single-Phase Volts
120 240 480 600
0.6
1.2
1.2
2.4
2.4
4.9
3
6.2
1.8
3.6
Three-Phase Volts
208 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600
2.1
4.3
4.2
8.5
5.2
11
Single-Phase Volts
0.3
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
2.5
1.5
3.1
0.9
1.8
Three-Phase Volts
1.0
2.1
2.1
4.3
2.6
5.3
2.1
4.1
4.1
8.1
6.8
14
27
14
27
54
8.3
16
27
54
10
20
34
68
108 135
6.3
12
20
41
81
7.2
14
23
47
14
28
47
94
18
35
59
117
1.0
2.0
3.4
6.8
94 188 234 14
2.1
4.1
6.8
14
27
4.2
8.1
14
27
54
5.2
10
17
34
68
3.1
6.1
10
20
41
3.6
7.0
12
24
47
7.2
14
23
47
94
8.9
18
29
59
117
➀ 300-volts maximum, Tungsten lamp loads include infrared lamps having Tungsten filaments.
➁ Resistive loads include electric discharge lamps such as fluorescent, mercury, vapor, etc.
J16
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Non-Motor Loads
NEMA Contactor Ratings for Single Capacitor or Capacitor Bank Switching
Size of
Controller
Continuous Three-Phase Rating of Capacitor
Ratings RMS
Maximum Size of Three-Phase Capacitor in kVAR or Available Current➀ in Amperes RMS Sym.
Amperes 3000 5000 10,000 14,000 18,000 22,000
At 230 Volts, 60 Hertz
2 45
3
4
90
135
12
27
40
8
27
40
4
15
40
3
11
30
2
9
24
2
7
20
80
160
80
160
80
160
80
160
80
160
75
160
5
6
270
540
At 460 Volts, 60 Hertz
2 45
5
6
3
4
90
135
270
540
25
53
80
160
320
16
53
80
160
320
8
31
80
160
320
6
23
61
160
320
4
18
49
160
320
4
15
41
149
320
At 575 Volts, 60 Hertz
2 45
3
4
90
135
5
6
270
540
31
67
100
200
400
20
67
100
200
400
10
39
100
200
400
7
29
77
200
400
6
23
61
200
400
5
19
51
189
400
Disconnect minimums: thermal magnetic breakers rated 135%, fused switch rated 165%.
5
6
3
4
00
0
1
2
7
8
9
NEMA Contactor for Heating Loads
NEMA
Size
Continuous
Current
Rating
Amps
9
18
27
45
90
135
270
540
810
1215
2250
50
75
150
300
450
700
1290
2-Pole
1-Ph
575 Volts
3-Pole
3-Ph
5
10
15
25
9
18
25
43
86
130
260
515
775
1200
2200
40
60
120
240
360
540
1020
2-Pole
1-Ph
Maximum kW Ratings➁
460 Volts 230 Volts
3-Pole
3-Ph
2-Pole
1-Ph
3-Pole
3-Ph
4
8
12
20
7
14
20
34
2
4
6
10
3.5
7
10
17
68
105
210
415
625
960
1740
20
30
60
120
180
270
510
34
52
105
210
315
480
880
10
15
30
60
90
135
255
115 Volts
2-Pole
1-Ph
3-Pole
3-Ph
3
5
1
2
1.75
3.5
5
8.5
17
26
52
105
155
240
440
Application of Starters for Heating and Lighting Loads
1. No Tungsten lamp loads, No transformer loads.
2. Contactor loading must meet table above.
3. Overload heaters may be sized for maximum
➂
.
4. Disconnect must be thermal magnetic or fused switch rated per NEC @ 125% of load amps.
➀ Available at capacitor terminals.
➁ Applicable only to resistive loads having inrush currents not exceeding 1.5 times the continuous current rating.
③ Spectra CB will permit deletion of overload heaters for these loads.
J17
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
J
Non-Motor Loads
Application Rated
Maximum kVA of Transformer for Primary Switching (50/60Hz)a
Catalog
Number
CL00
CL01
CL02
CL25
CL04
CL45
CL06
CL07
CL08
CL09
CL10
CK75
CK08
CK09
CK95
CK10
CK11
CK12
Max. Peak
Closing Current
450 Amps
450 Amps
450 Amps
550 Amps
550 Amps
550 Amps
1000 Amps
1000 Amps
1000 Amps
1280 Amps
1280 Amps
1850 Amps
1850 Amps
2500 Amps
3700 Amps
7000 Amps
7000 Amps
8400 Amps
10
17.5
11.4
20
14.2
25
18.5
32
4.2
7.5
5.7
10
7.1
12.5
8.5
15
22.8
40
28.5
50
45.7
80
2.8
5
3.4
6
1.8
3.2
2.2
4.0
120V
0.6
1.1
0.8
1.5
1.2
2.2
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
Phase
1
3
1
3
1
3
14.7
26
17.2
30.3
19.7
34.6
24.6
43.3
5.9
10.4
7.2
13
10
17.3
12.3
21.6
32.0
55.4
39.5
69.3
49.4
86.6
79.2
138.6
3.8
7.0
4.8
8.6
2.0
3.8
3.1
5.5
Inrush = 20 x Normal
208V 240V 480V
1
1.9
1.4
2.6
1.2
2.2
1.7
3.0
1.7
3.1
2.4
4.2
2.5
4.5
3.7
6.5
4.5
8.0
5.7
10
3.5
6.3
5.2
9.1
6.3
11.2
8.0
14.0
6.8
12
8.5
15
11.4
20
14.2
25
17.1
30
20
35
22.8
40
28.5
50
37.1
65
45.7
80
57.1
100
91.4
160
52
91
64
112
80
140
128
224
32
56
40
70
24
42
28
49
9.5
16.8
12
21
16
28
20
35
Maximum Three-Phase kVAR Rating for Switching Capacitors
Catalog 10,000 Amps RMS 22,000 Amp RMS
Number Maximum Available Fault Current Maximum Available Fault Current
CL00
200V
3
230V
3
460V
5
575V
5.7
200V
1.5
230V
1.5
460V
2.5
575V
2.8
CL01
CL02
CL25
CL04
435
6.5
9
12.5
4.5
6.5
9
12.5
9.5
11
15
21
11
12.5
17.5
24
2.2
3.2
4.5
6.2
2.2
3.2
4.5
6.2
4.5
5.5
7.5
10.5
5.5
6.2
8.2
12
CL45
CL06
CL07
CL08
CL09
CL10
CK75
CK08
CK09
CK95
CL10
CL11
CK12
17
22
25
30
40
50
60
70
95
105
135
190
250
17
22
25
30
40
50
60
70
95
105
135
190
250
30
40
45
50
65
80
100
130
165
190
260
325
400
35
50
65
70
95
120
150
175
230
288
370
450
600
8.5
11
12.5
15
20
25
60
70
95
105
135
190
250
8.5
11
12.5
15
20
25
60
70
95
105
135
190
250
15
20
22.5
25
32.5
40
100
130
165
190
260
325
400
230
288
370
450
600
17.5
25
32.5
35
47.5
60
150
175
31.3
55
34.2
60
48.5
85
62.8
110
14.2
25
20
35
22.8
40
28.5
50
85.7
150
97.1
170
160
280
6.4
11.2
7.8
13.7
9.7
17
12
21
600V
2.1
3.8
3.0
5.2
4.4
7.7
5
8.75
5.7
10
7.1
12.5
9.2
16
3.5
6.2
4.2
7.5
2.1
3.7
2.8
5
11.4
20
14.2
25
22.8
40
1.4
2.5
1.7
3
0.9
1.6
1.1
2.0
120V
0.3
0.5
0.4
0.7
0.6
1.1
7.3
13
8.6
15.1
9.8
17.3
12.3
21.6
2.9
5.2
3.6
6.5
5.0
8.6
6.1
10.8
16.0
27.7
19.7
34.6
24.7
43.3
39.6
69.3
1.9
3.5
2.4
4.3
1.0
1.9
1.5
2.7
Inrush = 40 x Normal
208V 240V 480V
0.5
0.9
0.7
1.3
0.6
1.1
0.8
1.5
0.8
1.5
1.2
2.1
1.2
2.2
1.8
3.2
2.2
4.0
2.8
5
3.1
5.6
4.0
7.0
1.7
3.1
2.6
4.5
3.4
6
4.2
7.5
5.7
10
7.1
12.5
8.5
15
10
17.5
11.4
20
14.2
25
18.5
32
22.8
40
28.5
50
45.7
80
40
70
64
112
26
45
32
56
12
21
14
24.5
16
28
20
35
4.7
8.4
6.0
10.5
8.0
14
10
17.5
15.6
27.5
17.1
30
24.2
42.5
31.4
55
7.1
12.5
10
16
11.4
20
14.2
25
42.8
75
48.5
85
80
140
3.2
5.6
3.9
6.8
4.8
8.5
6
10.5
600V
1
1.9
1.5
2.6
2.2
3.8
J18
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Non-Motor Loads
Application Rated
Utilization in Category AC-1, General Use
3-pole Contactors
Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)
40°C
55°C
70°C
A
A
A
CL Contactors
00 01 02 25 04 45 06 07 08 09 10 75 08 09
CK Contactors
95 10 11 12
25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 500 600 650
25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 425 510 546
20 20 25 25 41 44 62 78 81 80 80 130 155 175 270 335 432 468
4-pole Contactors
Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)
40°C
55°C
70°C
A
A
A
CL Contactors CK Contactors
01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 08 09 95 10 11 12
25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 500 550 650
25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 425 462 543
20 25 28 41 52 78 88 80 155 175 270 335 462 468
Horsepower/kilowatt ratings are shown below
CL06
CL07
CL08
CL09
CL10
CK75
CK08
CK09
Catalog General Purpose
Number Ratings
CL00
CL01
25
25
CL02
CL25
CL04
CL45
32
32
54
55
CK95
CK10
CK11
CK12
80
100
110(O) 102 (E)
140 (O) 120 (E)
140 (O) 120 (E)
150
175
200
310
500
600
650(E) 750 (O)
Max. FLA
10
13.8
17.5
22,22,17➀
32A
34,34,27➀
48
62
68
80
104,96,80➀
140
156
192
302
398
480
602
1 Phase-HP A
115V 230V
.5 (9.8)
.75 (13.8)
1.5 (10)
2 (12)
1 (16)
1.5 (20)
2 (24)
3 (34)
3 (17)
3 (17)
5 (28)
5 (28)
3 (34)
5 (56)
5 (56)
7.5 (80)
10 (100)
10 (100)
15 (135)
–
–
–
–
–
7.5 (40)
10 (50)
15 (68)
15 (68)
20 (88)
25 (110)
30 (136)
–
–
–
–
–
200V
3 (11)
3 (11)
5 (17.5)
5 (17.5)
10 (32)
10 (32)
15 (48)
20 (62)
20 (62)
25 (78)
30 (92)
40 (120)
50 (149.5)
60 (169.4)
100 (285)
125 (358)
150 (414)
200 (552)
3 Phase-HP A
230V 460V
3 (9.6)
3 (9.6)
5 (7.6)
7.5 (11)
5 (15.2)
7.5 (22)
10 (28)
10 (28)
10 (14)
15. (21)
20 (27)
25 (34)
15 (42)
20 (54)
25 (68)
30 (80)
40 (104)
50 (130)
60 (145)
75 (192)
100 (248)
150 (360)
200 (480)
250 (602)
30 (40)
40 (52)
50 (65)
60 (77)
75 (96)
100 (124)
125 (156)
150 (180)
250 (302)
300 (361)
400 (477)
500 (590)
575V
7.5 (9)
10 (11)
!5 (17)
15 (17)
25 (27)
25 (27)
40 (41)
50 (52)
60 (62)
75 (77)
75 (77)
125 (125)
125 (125)
150 (144)
300 (289)
400 (382)
500 (472)
600 (574)
Power In
380/400V kW A
4 (9)
5.5 (12)
7.5 (18)
11 (25)
16 (32)
18.5 (40)
22 (50)
30 (65)
37 (80)
45 (95)
55 (105)
75 (154)
90 (185)
132 (250)
160 (310)
220 (420)
280 (550)
375 (700)
J19
J
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Publication References
Construction Equipment and Components
Publication
GEP-1100
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
GET-2779
GEZ-7000
GET-7002
Power Break Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
GET-6211
GEZ-7001
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
GEI-86150
GEK-7310
GEZ-7002
GES-6227
GES-6228
Disconnect Switches
GET-6205
GEZ-7003
Ground Fault Protective Products
GET-2964
GEZ-7003
Panelboards
GET-6592
GEA-11316
Description
Buylog Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products
Application and Selection Guide for Molded Case Circuit Breakers
MCCB Time-Current Curves
Spectra RMS Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Selection and Application
Time-Current Curves
Installation and Operation Instructions
Maintenance Manual
Type AKR Time-Current Curves
Type AKR MicroVersaTrip RMS-9 Time Current Curves
MicroVersaTrip Ground Fault Time-Current Curves
Type HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches, Technical
Type HPC Time-Current Curves
Ground Break Systems
Ground Break Time-Current Curves
“A” series Tech. Specifications
A Series
Stocking Location
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Factory Automation Products
Publication➀
GE Fanuc Programmable Logic Control
GFW-0067
GE Fanuc I/O
GEK-90486
GFA-089
GEI-86150
GFA-150
GFT-298
GFA-180
Description
Automation Solutions Catalog
Genius I/O System User’s Manual
Genius I/O System
Installation and Operation Instructions
Field Control™
VersaMax I/O
VersaMax
Stocking Location
Charlottesville
Charlottesville
Charlottesville
Bloomington
Charlottesville
Charlottesville
Charlottesville
Motor Control Center Equipment
Publication
Spectra Series and 8000-Line MCC
DEA-036
GEF-4628
GEH-4961
Description
Spectra Series Product Brochure
8000-Line Renewal Parts Bulletin
Installation and Maintenance (Instructions)
➀ For more information visit our website at www.gefanuc.com/default2.htm
Stocking Location
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
J20
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Publication References
General Purpose Controls
Publication
GEP-1260
Magnetic Motor Starters
GEA-10928
GEH-5190
GEH-4774
GEH-4806
GEH-4807
GEH-4869
GEH-5198
GEH-5190
GEH-4775
GEH-4806
GEH-4807
GEH-4839
Pilot Devices
GEA-10877
Relays and Timers
GEA-10639
GEH-4115
GEH-4120
GEH-4147
GEH-4139
GEH-6435
DET-069
Variable Speed Drives➀
GEI-100364
GEI-100363
Solid State Starters
DEH-40397
GEH-6533
DEH-40396
DEH-40417
Description
Control Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products
300-Line Magnetic Motor Starters, Descriptive
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 2, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 3, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 4, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 5, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 6, FVNR
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVR and 2-Speed
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 2, FVR and 2-Speed
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 3, FVR and 2-Speed
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 4, FVR and 2-Speed
300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 5, FVR and 2-Speed
CR104P Push-buttons and Pilot Lights
CR122B, CR122BT, Series A Relays
CR120B AC Relays
CR120B Latched Relays
CR122B Time-Delay Relays
CR122BP Time-Delay Relays
Spectra ECM Instructions
Spectra ECM Product Brochure
AF 300P User Guide
AF 300G User Guide
ASTAT–CD Plus User Manual
ASTAT–CD Plus Instructions
ASTAT–IBP Plus User Manual
ASTAT–IBP Plus Instructions
Web Access
➀ G11/P11 Drives — www.ge.com/industrialsystem/drives/catalog/af300g11/index.htm
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Fort Wayne
Fort Wayne
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Stocking Location
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
Bloomington
J21
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
J
Electrical Data
Motor horsepower output may also be calculated as follows:
HP = V x A x Pf x EFF
746
Rules of Thumb (Approximation)
At 1800 RPM, a motor develops a 3 lb. – ft. per HP.
At 1200 RPM, a motor develops 4.5 lb – ft. per HP.
At 460 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 1.25 amp per HP.
At 230 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 2.5 amp per HP.
Conversion Formulas
To find
Amperes when
Horsepower is known
Amperes when
Kilowatts is known
Amperes when
Kva is known
Kilowatts
Kva
Horsepower -
(Output)
KW (alternating current) = KVA x Power Factor
KW (direct current) = V x A x .001
KWH = KW x Hours
HP = KW
Motor Efficiency
Alternating Current Three-Phase
HP x 746
1.73 x V x Eff x fp
Kw x 1000
1.73 x V x pf
Kva x 1000
1.73 x V
1.73 x A x V x pf
1000
1.73 x A x V
1000
1.73 x A x V x Eff x pf
746
Values
V=Volts
A or I = Amperes (amps)
Work/P = Watts/Power
KW=Kilowatts
KwH=Kilowatt Hours
KVA=Kilovolt Amperes
Pf=Power Factor, Table
Ph= Phase Factor, Table
Ohms Law
I=E/R
R=E/I
E=IXR
P=IXE
P=IXIXR
kVAR Calculation When Motor Operating
Characteristics Are Known
If motor HP, full-load power factor (PF) and efficiency (eff) are known, its easy to calculate the correct kVAR necessary to improve PF to any value.
Example: 75HP, 3600 RPN, NEMA B motor with full-load PF of 87% and eff. of 92% corrected to 95%PF
Original PF = .87 Cos: Tan: = .567
Desired PF = .95 = Cos: Tan: = .329
Difference = .238
KW = HPx.746 or 75x.746 = 62
Eff. .902
.238 X 62 = 14.8 kVAR (use 15 kVAR)
Defining the Load
Rotating Motion
Horsepower
HP = T x N
Where: T = Torque (lb-in)
N = Speed (RPM)
Accelerating Torque/Force
T
A
5250
Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)
N = Speed (RPM)
HP = T x N
63,000
= WK
2
x N
308t
Linear Motion
HP = F x V
33,000
Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)
V = Velocity (FPM)
HP = F x V
396,000
Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)
V = Velocity (in/min)
Where: T
A
= Accelerating torque
(lb ft)
Where: F
A
(lb-ft)
= Accelerating Force
WK
2
= Total system inertia W = Weight (lb) that must be accelerated.
This includes motor rotor, speed reducer (if used), and load. (lb-ft
2
)
V = Change in velocity (FPM) t = Time (sec.)
Torque
T = F x R
F
A
= W x V
1933t
Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)
F = Force (lb)
R = Radius (ft)
WK 2 – reflected
Reflected WK
2
= WK
2
of Load
(Reduction Ratio)
2
This is for either belt or gear reductions.
FPM to RPM
RPM = FPM
.262 x (diameter in inches)
J22
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Application Data
Electrical Data
Centrifugal Loads
Flow Rate:
Torque:
Pressure:
Horsepower:
Fans & Blowers:
Pumps:
Where:
Flow
1
= RPM
1
Flow
2
= RPM
2
Torque
1
Torque
2
= RPM
1
= RPM
2
2
Pres
1
Pres
2
= RPM
1
= RPM
2
2
BHP
1
= RPM
1
BHP
2
3
= RPM2
2
BHP = CFM x PSF
3300 x (fan efficiency)
BH = CFM x PIW
6350 x (fan efficiency)
BHP = CFM x PSI
229 x (fan efficiency)
BHP = GPM x TH x (specific gravity)
3960 x (pump efficiency)
BHP = GPM x PSI x (specific gravity)
1713 x (pump efficiency)
BHP = Brake horsepower
PSF = Pounds per square foot
PIW = Pressure in inches of water guage
PSI = Pounds per square inch
GPM = Gallons per minute
TH = Total head (including friction)
Other Useful Formulas
Gear Ratio - Most Favorable
GR = WK
2
+ Tf
2
+ Tf
WKM
2
TM
2
T
M
Where: WK
2
= WK
2 of the load
WK
2
M
= WK
2 of the motor
Tf = Friction torque of the laod
T
M
= Average motor torque during acceleration
If friction torque is low compared to accelerating torque this can be reduced to:
GR = WK
2
WK
2
Duty Cycle Calculations
HP = HP
2
1 t + HP
2
2 t + HP
3 t
2
+ etc
RMS t
1
+ t
2
+ t
3
+ etc
J23
J
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
G
H
I
E
F
A
B
C
D
M
N
O
J
K
L
1AD
Front View
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System
The General Electric Engineering Documentation System will accept a 3-character unit address designation consisting of a combination of letters and/or numbers (such as: 12J, ABC,
A1D, 2AD, etc.). The recommended unit addressing system is illustrated and described in the following paragraphs.
Note: Should customer’s (3-character maximum) unit numbering system differ from the following GE unit addressing system, then both can appear when requested on the
CAD-generated motor control center unit summary drawings issued from the factory.
Benefits
When ordering NEMA Class I or II motor control centers where factory interconnections are required, this system produces a uniform numbering format for engineering documentation.
The GE unit numbering system produces a unique unit address designation. When wiremarkers are specified, it ensures consistency and ease of wire tracing/troubleshooting between factory-wired units and other devices within the motor control center lineup such as programmable control I/O racks.
Number the front view arrangement from left-to-right 1, 2, 3 … or A, B, C … Line off the space required for the top and bottom horizontal wireways. Then line off the interconnecting vertical wireway in each vertical section. Note that some units
(including large starters, transformers, panelboards, etc.) may require full width of section and that no separate vertical wireway door will be adjacent to these units.
Example:
Assume that the top horizontal wireway is to be 12 inches high. In the first section a full-voltage non-reversing NEMA
Size 1 combination starter is to be installed in the first available position below the top horizontal wireway. Assuming conventional unit sizing (FVNR-1 equals 1X or 12-inch unit height), the unit location assignment becomes:
Motor Control Center
Vertical Section
Unit Location
1 A D
General
Typical 3-Character Designation
Motor Control Center number/character
Vertical Section number/character
Unit Location (line number/character)
1 A D
Note: The motor control center number/character assignment may be a number (1, 2,
3, 4, etc.) provided the number of MCC lineups on an order does not exceed 9. If 10 or greater, then the motor control center character should be a letter of the alphabet (A,
B, C, D, etc.). Likewise, the vertical section character should be an alphabetic entry for lineups exceeding 9 sections.
Continue lining off the unit space requirements for various units and future spaces as required until the lineup is complete and all spaces have been addressed. Notice that every unit location has a unique unit location designation. This unit designation will not be repeated again within the order.
Since every motor control center lineup also has a unique panel catalog number, then the unit nameplate and catalog number will never be duplicated.
ML # 0447X0542L01 – 1AD
The outline summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross-references the unit location and the service designation specified for each unit.
Example:
MCC Cat Number
Unit Location
Motor Control Center No. 1
A B C D
A reminder about future spaces: If a 2X future space is to be arranged into two 1X compartments, then the outline sketch must be lined off into 1X compartments with individual unit addresses. This will ensure that the necessary unit doors and shelves will be provided by the factory.
K
K1
K
K2
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System
Mebane CAD documentation system permits the engineer to perform virtually all design functions without the need of traditional drafting tools and associated equipment. This computer-based system is used to translate equipment functional requirements into detailed equipment designs and material lists. These computerized drawings are used in the manufacturing process to increase product assembly accuracy, repeatability and consistency. Standardization of production procedures and methods has been improved such that given devices are consistently located in the same position on or within the equipment. Unit wiring is handled in the same manner, resulting in improved wiring accuracy and productivity.
The following drawing elements are included in the standard documentation package. Customer will receive A-size
(81/2 x 11 inches) prints.
1) Lead Sheet
2) Outline
3) Summary Tables
4) Unit Elementaries
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Section K
1. Lead Sheet – Contains special Customer notes and manufacturing or test instructions.
2. Outline – Presents front view plan drawings showing the physical arrangement of units and associated equipment within the motor control center lineup.
3. Summary Tables – Provides all necessary functional detail of each unit including nameplate inscriptions.
Fig. 1
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
E9000 MCC Unit Numbering System
Fig. 2
FRONT
VIEW
SECT. HEIGHT 90 INCHES
UL SECT. NO.
X=SHIPPING
LENGTH
>=SPLICE
MOD SHEET
SECT. WXD
VERT. BUS A
UL
FVNR
1
AAD
FVNR
1.5
AAF
FVNR
1.5
AAH
FVNR
1.5
AAJ
FVNR
1.5
AAL
FVNR
1.5
AAN
UL
FVNR
1.5
ABD
FVNR
1.5
ABF
FVNR
1.5
ABH
FVNR
1
ABJ
FVNR
1
ABL
FVNR
1
ABN
> <
UL
FDRCB/
ACC
FDRCB/
ACD
FDRCB/
ACE
FDRCB/
ACF
FDRCB/
ACG
FDRCB/
ACH
FDRCB/
ACI
FDRCB/
ACJ
FDRCB/
ACK
FDRCB/
ACL
FDRCB/
ACM
FDRCB/
ACN
UL
INCLINE
600
001 002
1 2 3 4
FRONT
20X20
300
FRONT
20X20
300
FRONT 20X20
300
FRONT
20X20
600/300
ADC
SPACE
ADD
SPACE
ADF
SPACE
ADH
FDRCB/
ADI
FDRCB/
ADJ
SPACE
ADL
SPACE
ADN
Fig. 3
UNIT SUMMARY EVOLUTION SERIES MCC
REQ. NO.
PANEL CAT. NO.
ENG. NAME JBC
FRONT
UNIT
UNIT
MOD
LOC
SH
CUST
UNIT
NO
CAT# 273A7916P3FC
NAMEPLATE
ISSUED 01/16/1996 REV.
REV NO. 0
ELEM CONN.
I
Z
E
D
R
W
S FUNCTION
S
I
Z
E
AAD 6-MILL
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
100
200A
FVNR
1
AAF
100
200A
FVNR
1
AAH
AAJ
AAL
6-MILL
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
6-MILL
FEED END
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
6-MILL
DISCHARGE END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
6-MILL
DISCHARGE END
EXT. LUBE PUMP
100
200A
100
200A
100 200A
FVNR
FVNR
FVNR
1
1
1
AAN
ABD
ABF
ABH
ABJ
RED RUN PTT LT
6-MILL
DISCHARGE END
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
7-MILL
FEED END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
7-MILL
FEED END
EXT. LUBE PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
7-MILL
FEED END
FILTRATION PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
7-MILL
DISCHARGE END
JACKING PUMP
RED RUN PTT LT
100
200A
100
200A
100
200A
100
200A
100 200A
FVNR
FVNR
FVNR
FVNR
FVNR
1
1
1
1
1
HP
KW
K-KW
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
FLA RPM SF
OL
HEATER
CR123
OL
RELAY
TYPE
GE ENERGY
MEBANE, NC USA
CB
SW
1.8
1000 1.150
C220A AMBIENT SELI
DWG. FOR INSTALLATAION
DWG. NO. SH F01A
CONT. ON SH F01B
3
TRIP
FUSE/
CLIP
FUSES
BY
TOTAL
AUX
INILK
0
0
3 0
NOT LABELED
UL
UL
CSA
SC
LABEL LABEL
MARKER
157
CPT
VA
150
CATALOG
NUMBER
IA52-102437
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000 1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000 1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
2.4
1000
1.150
C301A AMBIENT SELI
1.8
1000
1.150
C220A AMBIENT SELI
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
UL
3 0
UL
3 0
UL
3
0
UL
3
0
UL
3
0
UL
3
0
UL
3
0
UL
3
0
UL
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
150
150
150
150
150
IA52-102438
150
IA52-102438
150
IA52-102438
150
IA52-102439
IA52-102439
IA52-102438
IA52-102438
IA52-102438
150
IA52-102437
K3
K
K
K4
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
Paint Finish
Indoor Equipment
The standard Mebane paint system consists of the following two processes.
Phase I–Cleaning
In a 7-stage spray washer, steel parts are cleaned and sprayed in the controlled cleaning solutions.
Stage
1–Cleaning
2–Rinse
3–Iron Phosphate
4–Rinse
5–Non Chrome Sealer
6–Rinse
7–Deionized Rinse
Temperature
115-120°
105-118°
90-105°
Ambient
Ambient
Ambient
Ambient
Chemical Solution(s)
Ferro Clean GE
None
Secure Low Foam
None
Non Chrome Final Seal
None
None
Packaging and Storage
Domestic Packaging
Normally a motor control center Lineup is shipped in groups of three vertical sections for ease of handling. Each shipping split is mounted on a hardwood skid to facilitate moving by rollers or fork-lift truck. Lifting eyes are also provided for moving by crane. Shipping blocks are placed on the face of the sections to protect handles and devices. The shipping splits are wrapped in clear stretch polyfilm to protect the equipment from the usual dust and dirt encountered during shipment. Necessary bus splice bars are included for connecting the shipping splits together.
Cleaned steel parts enter a drying oven at 300-350°F. The preceding operating parameters have been determined to produce an Iron Phosphate coating of a minimum of 150 milligrams per square foot to meet MIL Spec. TT-C-490.
Phase II–Painting by Electro-static Powder Process
Primed metal parts are electrostatically coated with a powder paint consisting of the following:
670-011 ANSI-61 Polyester Paint (Light Gray)
Metal parts will enter drying oven at 375-400°F and remain for 20 minutes. The standard color is ANSI-61 light gray with a gloss of 60±5, and a thickness of 1.5 mils. This system will withstand a minimum of 1000 hour humidity test, plus 1000 hours salt spray test.
Export Crating
The sections are bolted to a skid with a solid floor. The equipment is then enclosed in a 3/8" plywood crate with 2 x 4 reinforcing at the top and corners. Three 1 1/4" steel bands are placed horizontally around the crate for additional reinforcing.
All equipment should be protected against moisture and temperature extremes during shipment and storage. See
Environmental Considerations in Section A (General). For prolonged shipping periods where export crating is involved, it is recommended the equipment space heaters (when specified) be wired for connecting to an external power source while in transit, to minimize condensation.
Storage
If it is necessary to store the equipment for any length of time, the following precautions should be taken:
1. Uncrate equipment.
2. Store in a clean, dry area at moderate temperature. Cover with a suitable canvas or heavy-duty plastic cover to prevent entrance of foreign material.
3. If equipment must be stored in cool or damp areas, not only should the equipment be completely covered, but heat should be provided to prevent condensation of moisture in the equipment. Energize space heaters (if furnished in the equipment) or place a standard 120-volt lamp rated
75 watts inside the bottom of each vertical section.
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection
General
The following summary description defines the standard factory tests and inspections performed during manufacture.
All GE motor control center equipment is tested and inspected for conformance with NEMA ICS 18-2001. Production tests and inspections encompass the verification of physical configuration of assembly and workmanship, the mechanical adjustments of parts and components, and the sequencing and functional operations of the control systems. These tests and inspections are performed on manufactured products to verify conformance of the equipment to a previously qualified design. The tests do not include type testing or other destructive tests on equipment to be shipped to a customer. Any additional factory tests beyond those listed in the following paragraphs must be referred to Mebane to verify availability of test facilities and qualified manpower. Additional testing beyond the scope of the following standard commercial tests will affect normal shipment schedules.
Continuity Tests – Control Wiring and Power Cables
The correctness of the individual circuit wiring contained in each assembly and the assembly wiring interfaces shall be verified as in accordance with the connection diagram, wiring table, or elementary drawing. The continuity of each circuit shall be checked.
Functional Operations Test
All equipments shall be subjected to an operational test. The test shall verify the functional operation of the control and power circuits and related components, devices and subassemblies-modules under simulated operating conditions
(excluding loading of the power circuits).
Devices
All devices, including subassemblies-modules, shall be operated, set and checked for their functional characteristics in accordance with the instructions for each and any additional characteristics peculiar to a device:
• Pick-up
• Drop-out
• Contact wipe
• Amperes
• In-rush current
• Time-delay
Production Tests
The following list of inspection activities shall be performed to assure proper and correct materials, workmanship and for any damage conditions in accordance with the manufacturing documentation and drawings:
• Components, parts and material
• Physical condition of components, parts, wire insulation
• Location and orientation of components and parts
• Finish–plating–painting
• Wire/cable type, size, insulating and clamping support
• Wire terminations, insulation removal and crimping of terminals
• Tightness of electrical connections and torque of bus bar bolts
• Wire markers and terminal markers (where specified)
• Labeling of components, parts, etc.
• Tightness torque of assembly bolts and hardware
• Welds (spot only)
• Mechanical clearance
• Electrical clearance (potential hazards)
Mechanical Operations Test
Mechanical operating tests shall be performed to insure proper functioning of operating mechanisms and interchangeability.
a. The operation of shutters, mechanical interlocks, circuitbreaker-door interlocks, operating handles, trip mechanisms, solenoid armature travels, contact wipes, electromechanical interlocks, physical clearances for mechanical and electrical isolation including any additional mechanically related operating functions shall be verified.
b. The interchangeability of removable units designed to be interchangeable shall be verified as well as the rejection functions of non-interchangeable units.
Contactors must pick-up and hold-in at or below the following percentage or rated coil voltage:
Device Type
DC
AC
DC
DC
Voltage Source
DC
AC
AC with rectifier
AC with rectifier
Pick-up (Percentage)
63
85➀
70 with holding resistor
75 with holding and pick-up resistor
➀ If a control power transformer is used, apply 90 percent voltage to primary of transformer.
Sequence and Timing Circuits
Assemblies and systems involving sequential operation of devices and time delays shall be tested to assure that the devices in the sequence function properly and in the order intended.
Polarity – Phase-sensitive Circuits
The polarity of direct-current circuits and phase connections of alternating-current circuits shall be verified by application of power and measurement of the relative polarities and phase sequence.
Grounding
The grounding circuits and buses shall be verified.
K
K5
K
K6
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Drawings/Tests
Standard Commercial Tests and Inspection
High Potential – Insulation Tests
Control Wiring Insulation Tests
A dielectric test (hi-pot) shall be performed on circuit wiring to confirm the insulation resistance to withstand breakdown to a selected test voltage. The test voltage – amplitude and waveshape, method of application and duration of time applied – shall be specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001.
Option – Insulation Resistance (Megger) tests
Insulation resistance tests measure the amount of circuit resistance to current leakage. This test is performed when this resistance measurement is desired and so specified. A nominal charge will be assessed.
The test voltage and minimum insulation resistance shall be selected as specified by the contract. Standard test values are: a. 500 volts DC with 10 megohms minimum b. 1000 volts DC with 1 megohm minimum
Power Cable Insulation and Isolation Test
Power cables and buses shall be tested, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for insulation breakdown resistance and circuit isolation as specified in NEMA ICS 18-2001.
Note: These test conditions are as specified for newly constructed equipment and performed in a clean, temperature- and humidity-controlled factory environment.
The test voltages include the standard test voltage (two times rated plus 1000), times 120 percent (for one-second application).
Rated Circuit Voltage
AC or DC
120
240
480/600
High Potential
Test Voltage
1500
1800
2700
Duration of Test
1 second
1 second
1 second
The frequency of the test voltage shall not be less than the rated frequency of the equipment tested and shall be essentially sinusoidal in wave shape.
Note: Consideration shall be made for low-voltage devices, semiconductors, meters, instruments, transformers, grounding circuits, etc., in preparation for the dielectric tests.
Example of standard test report available on request for a nominal charge.
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 1-4
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
Stab
(3)
L3
(5)
(2)
L2
(6)
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
(1)
L1
(5)
M
(6)
K3
(3)
(4)
K2
(1)
(2)
K1
(1)
(2)
H1
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
H2
(H2)
(5)
OL
(6)
K6
(3)
K5
(4)
(1)
(2)
K4
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
No Pilot Devices
3
(A)
M
(B) (7)
OL
(8)
2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
2
(3)
START
(10)
3
(A)
M
(B) (7)
OL
(8)
2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1A
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
On/Off Switch
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(H-O-A Only)
2
1A
1
X2
T3
T2
T1
50
5
4
3
61
TB
60
51
(15)
M
(16)
50 51
(13)
M
(14)
60 61
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Red Ind. Light
2
(12)
M
(11)
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Red/Green Ind. Lights
2
(12)
M
(11)
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
1
(13)
M
(14)
4
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
Red Ind. Light
2
(3)
START
(10)
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(12)
M
(11) (1)
R
(2)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
Red/Green Ind. Lights
2
(3)
START
(10)
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(12)
M
(11) (1)
R
(2)
M
(13)
(14)
4
(5)
G
(6)
L1
L
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 1-4
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
Stab
(3)
L3
(5)
(2)
L2
(6)
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
(1)
L1
(5)
M
(6)
K3
(3)
(4)
K2
(1)
(2)
K1
(1)
(2)
H1
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
H2
(H2)
L2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1A
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red Light
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(1)
R
(2)
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
1A
1
(13)
M
(14)
4
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red/Green Lights
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW
Red Light
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
1A
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
(13)
M
(14)
4
1A
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW
Red/Green Light
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
(5)
OL
(6)
K6
(3)
K5
(4)
(1)
(2)
K4
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
(H-O-A Only)
2
1A
1
X2
T3
T2
T1
50
5
4
3
61
TB
60
51
(15)
M
(16)
50 51
(13)
M
(14)
60 61
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
ASW
(1B) (X1)
XB X1
To Remote
Control Source
X2
1A
5 2
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
1A
1
X2
3
2
5
4
X1
TB
61
60
51
50
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 5-6
Typical Circuit Diagrams
(1)
CR
(2)
OL
S-5 S-6
L1 L2 L3
(5) (6)
L3
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
L2
(1)
LSW
(2)
L1
K3
K2
K1
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
(5)
M
(6)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2)
K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
(A)
M
(B)
H2
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
L1 L2 L3
L3
L2
L1
(5) (6)
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K3
K2
K1
H1
(2)
2FU
(1)
K1 K2
(1)
OL
20
(2)
23
(3)
21
(5)
22
(4)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(1)
M
(6)
(4)
(2)
(3)
2FU
(4)
(1)
(2)
3CT
(1)
2CT
(2)
(1)
(2)
ICT
GND
(3)
CR
(4)
(A)
M
(B)
41
41
(1)
2FU
(2)
H1
(H1) (H2)
H2
(4)
2FU
(3)
(1)
2FU
(2)
(H1)
(H2)
(4)
2FU
(3)
H2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
No Pilot Devices
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
2
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
2
(9)
START
(10)
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1A
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
1A
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off Switch
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
(13)
M
(14)
4
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
(H-O-A Only)
T3
3
2
5
4
61
60
51
50
1A
1
X2
TB
T2
MOTOR
T1
X1 (X1)
X1 (X1)
(X2)
GND
X2
Red Ind. Light
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
2
(X2)
GND
X2
Red/Green Ind. Lights
2
(12)
M
(11)
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
Red Ind. Light
2
(9)
START
(10)
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(12)
M
(11)
(1)
R
(2)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
Red/Green Ind. Lights
2
(9)
START
(10)
3
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(12)
M
(11)
(1)
R
(2)
(15)
M
(16)
50 51
(13)
M
(14)
60 61
M
(13)
(14) (5)
G
(6)
L3
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR Size 5-6
Typical Circuit Diagrams
S-5 S-6
L1 L2 L3
(5) (6)
L3
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
L2
(1)
LSW
(2)
K3
K2
L1
K1
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
CR
(1) (2)
41
(5)
M
(6)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2)
OL
K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
(A)
M
(B)
H2
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
L1 L2 L3
L3
L2
L1
(5) (6)
CB
(3)
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K3
K2
K1
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
CR
(3)
(4)
K2
(1)
OL
20
(2)
23
(3)
21
(5)
22
(4)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(1)
M
(6)
(4)
(2)
(3)
3FU
(4)
(1)
(2)
3CT
(1)
(1)
(2)
2CT
(2)
ICT
GND
(A)
M
(B)
41
(1)
2FU
(2)
H1
(H1) (H2)
H2
(4)
2FU
(3)
(1)
2FU
(2)
(H1)
(H2) (4)
2FU
(3)
H2
(H-O-A Only)
T3
3
2
5
4
61
60
51
50
1A
1
X2
TB
T2
MOTOR
T1
(15)
M
(16)
50 51
(13)
M
(14)
60 61
L
L4
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1A
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red Light
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
CR
(B)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
40
(1)
(7)
OL
(8)
R
(2)
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
1A
1
M
(13)
(14)
4
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand-Off-Auto-SW
Red/Green Lights
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW Red Light
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14)
1A x=Closed(MC)
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
(13)
M
(14)
4
1A
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW
Red/Green Lights
3
(11)
M
(12)
2
(A)
CR
(B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR with Voltage Indicator Module
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L5
L
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVR Size 1-4
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
Stab
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5)
(6)
K3
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K2
(5)
R
(6)
(5)
F
(6)
(3) (4)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
K1
H1
(1)
(2)
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
H2
(H2)
(5)
K6
OL
(6)
(3)
K5
(4)
(1)
K4
(2)
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
No Pilot Devices
3
(12)
①
R
(11)
F
(A) (B)
6 40
(7)
OL
(8)
①
8
(14)
R
(13
9
①
5
①
(12)
F
(11) (A)
R
(B)
7
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Fwd/Rev/Stop PB
(8)
FWD
(6)
(12)
R
(11)
F
(A) (B)
3 6 40
(7)
OL
(8)
8
(14)
F
(13)
(21)
REV
(22)
5
F
(12) (11)
7
R
(A) (B)
(14)
R
9
(13)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
1A
(13)
SW
R O F
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Rev-Off-Fwd SW
(15)
X=Closed (MC)
(16)
3
(12)
R
(11)
F
(A) (B)
6 40
(7)
OL
(8)
(13)
F
(14)
8
5
F
(12) (11)
7
R
(A) (B)
9
①
Polarity sensitive (all options).
1A
1
X2
T3
5
3
9
8
T2
T1
TB
(17)
F
(18)
50 51
(17)
R
(18)
52 53
(15)
F
(16)
60 61
(15)
R
(16)
62 63
(2)
IFU
(1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Amber/Red/Green/
Ind. Lights
3
(12)
R
(11)
F
(A) (B)
6 40
(7)
OL
(8)
(14)
8
F
(13)
(1)
R
(2)
(14)
R
9
(13)
5
(12)
F
(11) (A)
R
(B)
7
(17)
A
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
1
16
(2)
IFU
(1)
13
X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Rev/Fwd/Stop PB
Amber/Red/Green Lights
(13)
1
STOP
(14)
1A
(8)
FWD
(6)
(12)
3
R
(11)
F
(A) (B)
6 40
(7)
OL
(8)
(11)
R
(12)
8
(14)
F
(13)
(21)
REV
(22)
5
F
(12) (11)
R
(A) (B)
7
(14)
R
9
(13)
(17)
A
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
16
(2)
IFU
(1)
16
13
X1 (X1)
SW
1A
(13)
R O F
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Rev-Off-Fwd SW
Amber/Red/Green Light
(15)
X=Closed (MC)
(16)
3
(12)
R
(11)
6
F
(A) (B)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
(14)
F
(13)
8
(1)
R
(2)
5
F
(12) (11)
7
R
(A) (B)
(14)
R
(13)
9
(17)
A
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
13
L6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
RVAT Size 2-6
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Size 2, 3-65, 80% Taps
Size 4, 5, 6-50, 65, 80% Taps
L1 L2 L3
*
L3
*
L2
*
L1
(5)
(6)
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
K3
K2
(1)
LSW
(2)
K1
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
IS
(5) (6)
R
(5)
(6)
(3) (4)
FB
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
FA
(1) (2) optional
Power Factor Capacitor
AT
(FC)
(3C)
(FB) (3B)
(FA) (3A)
(1C)
(2C)
(0C)
0C
(1B)
(2B)
(0B)
0B
(4)
2S
(3)
(1A)
(2A)
(0A)
(1)
2S
(2)
0A
(6)
2S
(5)
K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
H2
(C)
TR
(NO)
Inst.
43
(5)
TO
TR
(3)
44
(13)
1S
(14)
45
(A)
2S
(B)
(A)
1S
(B)
(13)
R
46
(14)
(5)
TC
TR
(1)
47
(13)
2S
(14)
48
(A)
R
(B)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(1)
2FU
(2)
(H1)
(H2)
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
GND
X2
Start/Stop PB's
Red/Green Ind. Lights
(4)
(13)
1
STOP
(14)
1A
2
(3)
START
(10)
(11)
IS
(12)
L1
TR
L2
3
TDAE
40
(10 Sec.)
(7)
OL
(8)
39
(1)
OTT
(2)
(1)
R
(2)
R
(11)
(12)
(5)
G
(6)
(15)
R
(16)
4
(2)
IFU
(1)
1A
(15)
R
(16)
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
GND
X2
Hand – Off – Auto SW
Red/Green Lights
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
(15)
4
(2)
IFU
(1) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
T
L1
TR
L2
3
TDAE
40
(10 Sec.)
IS
(11)
(12)
(7)
OL
(8)
39
(1)
R
(2)
(1)
OTT
(2)
R
(11)
(12)
(5)
G
(6)
1 X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Hand – Off – Auto SW
Red Light
(13)
SW
Hand Auto
OFF
(14)
1A
(15) x=Closed(MC)
(16)
5
3
L1
TR
L2
TDAE
40
(10 Sec.)
IS
(11) (12)
(7)
OL
(8)
39
(1)
OTT
(2)
(1)
R
(2)
R
(11) (12)
2FU
(3)
OL
Size 5 and 6 CT Operated
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
(H-O-A Only)
Size 2-4
1A
1
X2
T3
T2
T1
3
2
5
4
53
52
51
50
TB
* Stab-in up to 5
(15)
R
(16)
50 51
(21)
R
(22)
52 53
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off Switch
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14) x=Closed(MC)
1A
L1
TR
L2
3
TDAE
(10 Sec.)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
39
OTT
(11) (12)
(12)
(12)
IS
(11)
R
(11)
2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14)
1A x=Closed(MC)
(15)
R
(16)
4
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW
Red/Green Lights
L1
TR
L2
3
TDAE
(10 Sec.)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
39
OTT
(11) (12)
(11)
(11)
IS
(12)
2
R
(12)
(1)
R
(2)
(5)
G
(6)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
SSW
Off On
(14)
1A x=Closed(MC)
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
GND
X2
On/Off SW
Red Light
L1
TR
L2
3
TDAE
(10 Sec.)
40
(7)
OL
(8)
39
(11)
OTT
(12)
(11)
(11)
IS
(12)
R
(12)
2
(1)
R
(2)
L7
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
2S2W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L
L8
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
X1 (X1)
SW
F S O A
1A
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Fast - Slow- Auto-SW
AMB/Red/Grn Ind.
3
FS
(12) (11) (A)
SS
6
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(14)
SS
(13)
8
(1)
R
(2)
(15)
(25)
(16)
(26)
5
(11)
IS
(12)
FS
(A) (B)
7
(14)
FS
(13)
9
(17)
R
(18)
(27)
(15)
SS
(16) (15)
(16)
FS
(16) x=Closed(MC)
(13)
(28)
(9)
G
(10)
1A
1
X2
T13
5
3
9
8
T12
T11
T3
T2
T1
TB
1
Note: See GEM-1000A
L1 L2 L3
(5)
SS
SOL
(6) (5) (6)
K6
(3) (4) (3) (4)
K5
(1) (2)
K4
(1) (2)
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5)
(6)
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K3
K2
K1
(5)
FS
(6)
(5)
K9
(1) (2)
2FU
H1
(3)
(H1)
(4)
H2
(H2)
(3)
(1)
(4) (3)
K8
(2)
K7
(1)
FOL
(6)
(4)
(2)
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
X1
(X1)
T2
T3
T1
T13
T12
T11
MOTOR
(X2)
X2
GND
1
SS
(13) (14)
8
No Pilot Devices
3
(12)
1
FS
(11)(A)
6
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
1
FS
(13) (14)
9
5
SS
(12) (11)
7
(A)
FS
(B)
(13)
(2)
IFU
(1)
STOP
(14)
1A
X1
(X1) (X2)
GND
X2
Fast/Slow/Stop PB
(5)
SLOW
(6)
3
(12)
FS
(11)(A)
6
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
SS
(13) (14)
8
(21)
FAST
(22)
5
SS
(12) (11) (A)
FS
(B)
7
(13)
FS
(14)
9
(17)
50
(15)
62
FS
FS
SS
SS
(18)
51
(15) (16)
60 61
(17) (18)
52 53
(16)
63
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
X1
(X1) (X2)
GND
X2
(15)
(25)
(16)
(26)
14
Amb/Red/Grn Ind.
Lights
3
(12)
FS
(11)(A)
SS
6
(B)
40
SOL
(7) (8)
FOL
(7) (8)
39
(1)
A
(2) (13)
SS
(14)
8
FS
(13) (14)
9
5
SS
(12) (11)
7
(A)
FS
(B)
(17)
R
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
1
SS FS
(15) (16)(15) (16)
16
(2)
IFU
(1)
13
X1 (X1)
1A
(13)
SW
F S O A
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
Fast-Slow-Off-Auto
SW
3
FS
(12) (11) (A)
SS
6
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(14)
SS
(13)
8
5
(14)
FS
(13)
9
7
(A)
FS
(B)
(27) (28) x=Closed (MC)
(2)
IFU
(1)
(13)
(15)
SS
STOP
(16)
(14)
1A
(15)
(16)
FS
(16)
X1 (X1)
(13)
(X2)
GND
X2
Fast/Slow/Stop PBs
Amb/Red/Grn Lights
(5)
SLOW
(6)
3
FS
(12) (11)
6
(A)
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8) (7)
FOL
(8)
SS
(13) (14)
8
(1)
A
(2)
(21)
FAST
(22)
5
SS
(12)
(11)
7
(A)
FS
(B)
FS
(13) (14)
3
(17)
R
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
2S1W-C.T., V.T., C.H. Size 1-4
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Note: See GEM-1000A
Constant HP
SS
SOL
(5) (6) (5) (6)
K6
(3) (4) (3) (4)
K5
(1) (2)
K4
(1) (2)
(7) (8)
T4
L1 L2 L3
(9) (10)
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5) (6)
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
K3
K2
K1
(1) (3)
2FU
H1
(2)
(H1)
(4)
H2
(H2)
(5)
FS
(6) (5)
FOL
(6)
K9
(3)
(4)
(1)
(4)
(3)
K8
(2)
K7
(1) (2)
(2)
IFU
(1)
1
1
(13)
(2)
STOP
IFU
(14)
1A
(1)
X1
X1
(X1)
(X1)
(X2)
X2
GND
1
(13)
SS
(14)
8
1
5
SS
(12) (11)
7
(A)
FS
(B)
1
FS
(13) (14)
9
No Pilot Devices
3
(12)
1
FS
(11)(A)
6
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(X2)
GND
X2
Fast/Slow/Stop PB's
AMB/Red/Grn Lights
(5)
SLOW
(6) (12)
FS
(11)(A)
3 6
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
(7)
FOL
(8)
(13)
SS
(14)
8
(1)
A
(2)
(21)
FAST
(22)
5
SS
(12) (11) (A)
FS
7
(B)
(13)
FS
(14)
9
(17)
R
(18)
(9)
G
(10)
1
(15)
SS
(16) (15)
FS
(16)
16
(2)
IFU
(1)
13
X1 (X1)
1A
(13)
SW
F S O A
(14)
(X2)
GND
X2
(15) (16)
Fast - Slow- Off -
Auto-SW
3
FS
(12) (11)
6
(A)
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(14)
SS
(13)
8
5
(12)
SS
(11)
7
FS
(A) (B)
(14)
FS
(13)
9
(25)
(27) x=Closed(MC)
1
Polarity sensitive (all options).
(26)
14
(28)
L9
T1
T5
T2
T4
T3
T6
MOTOR
L1 L2 L3
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
Constant or
Variable Torque
(1)
L1
(5) (6)
(3)
CB
OR
(4)
(1)
LSW
(2)
(5)
FS
FOL
(6) (5) (6)
K6
(3) (4) (3) (4)
K5
K3
(1) (2)
K4
(1) (2)
(7) (8)
T3
T2
(9) (10)
T1
(5)
SS
(6) (5)
SOL
(6)
K9
(4)
K2
K1
(1) (3)
2FU
H1
(2)
(H1)
(4)
H2
(H2)
(3)
(1)
(4) (3)
K8
(2)
K7
(1) (2)
T6
T3
T4
T5
T2
T1
MOTOR
FS
(17) (18)
50 51
FS
(15) (16)
60 61
SS
(17) (18)
52 53
(15)
SS
(16)
62 63
1A
1
X2
T6
5
3
9
8
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
TB
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
1 X1
(X1) (X2)
X2
GND
Amb/Red/Grn Ind.
Lights
3
1
(12)
FS
(11)(A)
SS
6
(B)
40
SOL
(7)
(8)
FOL
(7)
(8)
39
1
SS
(13) (14)
8
(1)
A
(2)
5
1
SS
(12) (11)
7
(A)
FS
(B)
1
FS
(13) (14)
9
SS FS
(15) (16) (15) (16)
16
(2)
IFU
(1)
13
X1 (X1)
(13)
SW
F S O A
1A
(14)
(X2)
GND
(17)
R
(9)
(18)
G
(10)
X2
3
FS
(12) (11)
6
(A)
SS
Fast-Slow-Off-Auto SW
AMB/Red/Grn Ind.
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(14)
SS
(13)
8
(1)
A
(2)
(15)
(25)
(16)
(26)
14
5
(14)
FS
(13)
9
7
FS
(A) (B)
R
(17) (18)
(27) (28) x=Closed (MC)
SS FS
(15) (16) (15) (16)
16 13
(2)
IFU
(1)
1 X1 (X1) (X2)
GND
X2
(9)
G
(10)
Fast/Slow/Stop PB
(13)
STOP
(14)
1A
(5)
SLOW
(6)
3
FS
(12) (11)
6
(A)
SS
(B)
40
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
(13)
SS
(14)
8
(21)
FAST
(22)
5
SS
(12)
(11)
7
FS
(A) (B)
FS
(13)
(14)
3
L9
L
L
L10
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
2S2W with MM200
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
2S-PW Size 1-5
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5)
(6)
K3
(3)
(1)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(2)
K2
K1
M2
(5)
(6)
K9
OL2
(5)
(6)
(3) (4)
K8
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
K7
(1) (2)
(5)
M1
(6)
K6
(5)
OL1
(6)
(3) (4)
K5
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
K4
(1) (2)
Size 5 CT Operated Overload
T7
T3
T8
T2
T9
T1
MOTOR
For 9 Leads - WYE
Connect Term. 4.5.6
together at motor
Terminal Box
For 9 Leads - Delta
Connect Term. 4 & 8, 5 & 9,
6 & 7 together in three separate pairs at motor terminal box
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
(13)
TR
(14)
43
(67)
TR
TC
(68)
44
K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
(A)
M1
(B)
(A)
M2
(B)
H2
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(1)
2FU
(2)
H1A
(H1)
X1 (X1)
T
(X2)
(H2)
H2A
(4)
2FU
(3)
X2
Gnd
T8
T7
T3
T2
T1
1A
1
X2
T9
3
2
7
4
61
60
51
50
TB
SW
(13)
Off On
PB
(14)
1A
X-Closed (MC)
JPR
(13)
M2
(14)
4
3
(A1)
TR
(A2)
40
(7)
OL1
(8)
38
(7)
OL2
(8)
(11)
M1
(12)
(11)
M2
(12)
2
(1)
R
(2)
PB
7
(5)
G
(6)
PB
50
(21)
M2
(22)
51
60
(15)
M2
(16)
61
L11
L
L
L12
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Wye-Delta Open Transition
WYE - Delta
Open Transition per GEM – 2034E
Fig. 16
L1 L2 L3
STAB
(3)
L3
(5) (6)
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(3)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(1)
(2)
K3
K2
K1
H1
(13)
CR
(14)
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
44
K2
2M
(1) (2)
K9
(2)
S
(1)
K10
(3) (4)
K8
(4) (3)
(5) (6)
K7
(6) (5)
(5)
1M
(6)
K6
(5)
1OL
(6)
(3)
(4)
K5
(3)
(1)
(2)
K4
(1)
(4)
(2)
Size 5CT Operated
(3)
3FU
(4)
H2
(A)
1M
(B)
T6
T4
T5
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
1
(2)
IFU
(1)
(55)
TD
TR
(67)
TC
TR
(56)
(68)
46
(A1)
TR
(A2)
(A)
TDAE
S
(10 sec.)
(B)
45
S
(11)
(12)
47
(A)
2M
(B)
(1)
2FU
(2)
H1A
(H1) (H2)
(4)
2FU
H2A
(3)
T
X1
(X1) (X2)
Gnd
X2
61
60
(H-O-A only) 5
4
1A
1
3
2
X2
TB
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
(13)
Stop
PB
(14)
1A JPR
(9)
2
Start
(10)
PB
3
(A1)
CR
(A2)
40
(7)
1OL
(8)
(7)
2OL
(8)
39
(12)
1M
(11)
60
(13)
1M
(14)
61
NOTE: Control circuit options similar to the FVNR Size 5
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Wye-Delta Open Transition
2M
(1)
(2)
WYE - Delta
Closed Transition per GEM – 2034E
Fig. 16
(3) (4)
(5) (6)
(R1)
RC
K11
(R4)
K7
(2)
2S
(1)
K12
(R2)
RC
(R5)
K8
(4)
(3)
(R3)
RC
K13
(R6)
K9
(6) (5)
L1 L2
L3
STAB
(3)
L3
(5)
(6)
K3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(3)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(1)
(2)
K2
K1
(5)
1M
(6)
K6
(3)
(4)
K5
(1) (2)
K4
(2)
IS
(1)
K10
(4)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(5)
1OL
(6)
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
Size 5CT Operated
T5
T3
T2
T4
T1
T6
1
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1
K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
(13)
CR
(14)
41
(13)
1S
(14)
2S
(13)
(14)
42
44
2M
(11)
(12)
43
(A)
1S
(A)
1M
(B)
(B)
(15)
1M
(16)
(2)
IFU
(1)
(67)
TR
(68)
TC
46
(1)
2FU
(2)
H1A
(H1)
X1
(X1)
T
1S
(11) (12)
45
(A1)
(A)
TR
(A2)
TDAE
(10 sec.)
2M
(B)
(15)
2M
(16)
(A)
2S
(B)
47
(H2)
(4)
2FU
H2A
(3)
(X2)
Gnd
H2
X2
61
60
(H-O-A only) 5
4
1A
1
3
2
X2
TB
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
(13)
Stop
PB
(14)
1A JPR
(9)
2
Start
(10)
PB
3
(A1)
CR
(A2)
40
(7)
1OL
(8) (7)
2OL
(8)
39
(12)
1M
(11)
60
(13)
1M
(14)
61
NOTE: Control circuit options similar to the FVNR Size 5
L13
L
L
L14
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Distribution Transformers
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Single-Phase
480/120-240V
Single-Phase
240/120V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
STAB
L3
(5)
L2
(6)
(3)
(1)
CB
OR
LSW
(2)
L1
(H1)
(X4) (X3)
T
(H2) (H3) (H4)
(X2)
GND
(X1)
STAB
L3
(5)
(3)
L2
L1
(1)
(6)
CB
OR
LSW
(2)
(H1)
(X4) (X3)
T
(H2) (H3) (H4)
(X2) (X1)
GND
L1 L2
L3
Three-Phase
480/208-120V
STAB
L3
L2
(5)
(6)
(3)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(1)
(2)
L1
K1
K3
K2
T1
(H2)
(H3)
(H1)
(H4)
(H1)
(H2)
(H3)
T2
(H4)
(H4)
(H3) (H2)
T3
(H1)
K4
(X1)
(X3)
T1
(X4)
(X2)
N
(X1)
(X2)
(X4)
(X3)
T2
GND
T3
(X4)
(X2)
(X3) (X1)
K5
K6
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Single-Phase Panelboard
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1
L2
L3
MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)
STAB
Feeder & Transformer Unit
480V/120-240V
GND
BUS
Panelboard Unit
A
1
A
3
A
5
A
7
A
9
A
11
(L1)
(N)
(L2)
A
A
A
A
A
A
8
10
12
2
4
6
L15
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Three-Phase Panelboard
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1
L2
L3
MCC Bus (if power is furnished from bus)
STAB
Feeder & Transformer Unit
T2
T1
T3
T1
T2
N
Gnd Bus
T3
480V/120-240V
L
L16
N
Gnd (if required)
A
A
CB
A
A
Panelboard Unit
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
FVNR with PLC
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2 L3
1
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(2)
1FU
(1)
(5) (6)
(5)
M
(6)
K3
(3)
(1)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(2)
K2
(3)
(4)
X1
K1
(1)
(2)
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
(H2)
T
(1) (2)
(X1) (X2)
Gnd
X2
(5)
OL
(6)
K6
(3)
K5
(4)
(1)
K4
(2)
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
[ Output ]
3
(A)
M
(B)
40
OL
(7) (8)
2
M
(12) (11)
FVR with PLC
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2
L3
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5) (6)
K3
(3)
(1)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(2)
K2
K1
(1)
(2)
(H1)
(3)
2FU
(4)
R
(5) (6)
(5)
F
(6)
(3) (4)
K6
(5)
OL
(6)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
K5
(4)
(1)
(2)
(H2)
K4
(1) (2)
(2)
1FU
(1)
T
1
X1
(X1) (X2)
X2
Gnd
[ Input ]
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
➀
Polarity sensitive.
[ Output ]
[ Output ]
8
(14)
➀
F
(13)
5
[ Input ]
➀
F
(12)
(11) (A)
R
(B)
7
9
➀
(14)
R
(13)
➀
3
(12)
R
(11)
(A)
6
F
(B)
40
[ Input ]
OL
(7) (8)
X2
T3
T2
T1
2
1
4
3
TB
1
X2
T3
T2
T1
5
3
9
8
TB
L17
L
L
L18
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
RVNR-AT with PLC
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L1 L2
L3
Starting Autotransformer
1
2
3
Taps
1
Line Volts
50%
0
F
2
3
65%
90%
Size 4
STAB
(3)
(2)
(1)
L3
L2
L1
(5) (6)
K3
CB
(3)
OR
LSW
(1)
(4)
(2)
K2
K1
Autotransformer
Connection
Size 4 - Tap 2
(5)
(3)
(1)
R
(5)
1S
(6)
FC (FC) (3C)
(6)
AT
(1C) (9C) 0C
(2C)
(3)
(4)
(4)
FB (FB) (3B)
(1B) (9B)
(2B)
(4)
2S
(3)
0B
(1)
(2)
(2)
FA (FA) (3A)
(1A)(2A)
(2A)
(1) 2S
(2)
0A
K6
(6)
(5)
2S
K5
K4
(5)
(3)
(1)
OL
(6)
(4)
(2)
TR
(13) (14)
43
Inst.
H1
(2)
3FU
(1)
K1 K2
(3)
3FU
(4)
H2
(65)
TR
(66) (13)
1S
(14)
TO 44 45
(A)
2S
(B)
(A)
1S
(B)
R
(13) (14)
46
(57)
TC
TR
(58)
47
(13)
2S
(14)
48
(A)
R
(B)
1
(2)
1FU
(1)
X1
(H1)
(X1)
(H2)
T
(X2)
Gnd
X2
T3
T2
T1
MOTOR
1
X2
3
2
T3
T2
T1
TB
[ Output ]
2
(11)
1S
(12)
(11)
R
(12)
3
(A1)
TR
(A2)
OL
(7) (8)
TDAE
40
(10 sec)
(1)
OTT
(2)
39
[ Input ]
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
2S2W with PLC
Typical Circuit Diagrams
2S2W
Ref GEN 1000A Fig 5
L1 L2
L3
1
(2)
STAB
(3)
L3
(2)
L2
(1)
L1
(5)
(6)
K3
(3)
(1)
CB
OR
LSW
(4)
(2)
K2
K1
1FU
(1)
2FU
(H1)
X1
(X1)
T
(H2)
(X2)
K9
SOL
(5) (6)
(3) (4)
K8
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
K7
(1) (2)
(5)
FS
(6)
K6
(5)
FOL
(6)
(3)
(4)
K5
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
K4
(1) (2)
X2
Gnd
T1
T13
T2
T12
T3
T11
MOTOR
1
X2
5
3
T13
9
8
T12
T11
T3
T2
T1
TB
[ Output ]
[ Output ]
➀
(14)
SS
(13)
8
3
➀
(11)
FS
(12)
(A)
6
SS
(B)
4Ø
(7)
SOL
(8)
39
(7)
FOL
(8)
[ Input ]
5
➀
(11)
SS
(12) (A)
7
FS
(B)
(14)
➀
FS
(13)
9
[ Input ]
➀
Polarity sensitive.
L19
L
L
L20
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT XT
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT XT Bypass
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L21
L
L
L22
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT XT Bypass Emergency Bypass
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L23
L
L
L24
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT XT Isolation Bypass Emergency Bypass
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT BP
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L25
L
L
L26
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
ASTAT BP Isolation
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
Adjustable Speed Drives
AF-600 FP & AF-650 GP Drives
L1 L2 L3
STAB
[3]
L3
[2]
L2
[5]
[3]
CB
[6]
K3
[4]
K2
[1]
L1
[1] [2]
K1
[E104A]
[A1]
[A2]
[B1]
REA
[B2]
R S
[C1]
[C3]
T
AF6
4–20mA
OR
0–10VDC
REMOTE
[91]
[L1]
[92]
[L2]
[93]
[L3]
RED
BLK
C1
11
GND
SHLD
[54]
[55]
[53]
[50]
AF-600FP / AF-650GP
[88]
[89]
DC
Bus
[98]
[97]
[96]
[99]
RUN
[14] [13]
CM FWD
[95]
GND
RELAY 2
(RUN)
[06]
[05]
[04]
[18]
[START]
[18]
[REVERSE]
[+24V OUT]
[12]
[+24V OUT]
[13]
[20]
[03] 71
[02] 72
[01] 70
4
1
[27]
[COAST/LOW]
[29]
[JOG]
[32]
[33]
Analog
Output
4-20mA
[39]
[42]
RS-485
Interface
[68]
[69]
[61]
Brake
Resistor
[82]
[81]
W
V
U
LFTR
[C1] [C2]
[B1] [B2]
[A1] [A2]
T3
T2
T1
SETTINGS
F01 – [2] ANALOG INPUT 54
F02 – [0] LINKED TO HAND/AUTO
E24 RELAY 1 – [9] ALARM
E24 RELAY 2 – [5] RUNNING
E01 – [8] START
E03 – [0] NO OPERATION
MOTOR
1
K1
[1]
K2
[3]
[2]
1FU
[1]
H1
[2]
[4]
H2
[H1] [H2]
T
X1 [X1] [X2] X2
GND
JPR 18
5
3
RUN
[A1] [A2]
JPRX2
72
71
70
21
20
18
5
X2
X2
3
1
11
C1
TB DTB
AF6
[RUN]
[04] [05]
4
RUNX
[13] [14]
20
RUNX
[21] [22]
Note: See Section K for more circuits.
21
FAN2
[1] [2]
DRCNN
[MLE] [FML]
FAN1
[1] [2]
RUNX
[A1] [A2]
DRCNN
[MLE] [FML]
L27
L
L
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
High-Resistance Ground
Typical Circuit Diagrams
System Normal
Gnd Fault Alarm
Display Cable
Neutral Voltage
Neutral Ground
Neutral Current
Neutral Ground
GND
Future
14
12
13
AS
15
Pulse
Relay
External
Horn
Com Reset
Silence
External Control
13
Ctrl Power
Line Com
GND
13
PX
G
14
T1 35
37 T2
T3 36
TB12
31
40
F1
F6
10
11
30 32
F7
33
34
F2
32
11
F4
24
TB15
NGR
12
SW1
TB14
19
L1
L2
L3
TB1
TB2
TB3
32
F3
TR
TO 240-600V
SOURCE
TEST RESISTOR
SYMBOL
AS
CPT
F(X)
GND
NGR
PB1
PX
SW1
TR
T(X)
UVR
DESCRIPTION
ARC SUPPRESSOR
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER
LINE FUSE
GROUND BUS
NEUTRAL GRD RESISTOR
TEST PUSHBUTTON
PULSING CONTACTOR
DISCONNECT SWITCH
TEST RELAY
TRANSFORMER
UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY
GND
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
TEST RESISTOR
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER
17
UVR
G
14
Operator Interface
UVR
UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY
18
SYSTEM TEST
PB1
16
TR
1.
NOTES
ALL INTERNAL CONTROL WIRING TO BE 600V,
#14 AWG TERMINATED W/PREINSULATED SHANK
RING & COMPRESSION TERMINAL. RESISTOR WIRING
TO BE #8 TEFLON WIRE. EQUIPMENT & DEVICE
GROUND WIRE SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY
TERMINATED ON THE GROUND BUS.
15
16
SYSTEM TEST
PB1
18
CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS
240-600V(L-L)
(50 OR 60 Hz)
GROUND FAULT
ALARM CONTACTS
(SYSTEM NORMAL)
TO GROUND BUS
TO TEST RESISTOR
TO RESISTOR (PULSE LEVEL)
TO RESISTOR(FAULT LEVEL)
NO
COM
NC
TB
3
4
5
6
2
1
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
SW1-L1
SW1-L2
SW1-L3
52
50
24
51
GND
GND
19
PX-L1
TERMINAL
STRIP
12
PX-T1
TB17
12
10
F1
31
G
PULSING CONTACTOR
NGR
1-7A
TOP VIEW
TOP BANK
17 1/2"
LC660
15 3/4"
LC300
LC660
N1
LC300
TEST
LC300
GND
3"
3"
2"
(4) 7/8" X
5/8" DIA. SLOTS
N6
BOTTOM BANK
17 1/2"
15 3/4"
N2
LC440
LC88
LC63
LC75
N5
N3
LC210
LC132
LC75
N7
LC75
N4
LC75 LC75
GND
3"
3"
2"
(4) 7/8" X
5/8" DIA. SLOTS
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW
1-10A
PX
F1
2.5A
3.5A
24
TB15
F6
2.5A
3.5A
L1
L1
L2
L2
SW1
L3
L3
10 11 32
DISCONNECT SWITCH
11
F6
40
32 32 32 11
F7
.8A
F2
3.5A
F3
.8A
F4
30 33 20 34
FUSES
FUSES
F7
2.5A
3.5A
19
20
2 4
6 8
3
7
TR
0
1
16
G
14
31
T1
(240-600/120V)
H1
X1
H2
H3
X2
H4
37
35
13
G
CPT
14
40
T2
(240-600/120V)
H1
X1
H2
H3
X2
H4
35
36
2.
DASHED CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE BY CUSTOMER.
T3
(240-600/120V)
30
H1
X1 36
H2
H3
X2 37
14 H4
33
34
17
6 5 4 3
7 8 1 2
GND 13
UVR
14
6"
12"
12"
2 BANKS, EACH 17 1/2
(1) 10 COILS/BANK. (1) 5 COILS/BANK. 2727-5P
ENDFRAMES. TURN FLANGES IN. TERMINALS UP.
FURNISH JUMPERS.
L28
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
MM200
Typical Circuit Diagrams
L29
L
L
L30
Evolution Series E9000* Motor Control Centers
Typical Circuits
MM300
Typical Circuit Diagrams
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Specifications
Specification for Motor Control Centers
600 Volts and Below
1.0 General
This specification covers low voltage motor control centers with combination starter units.
permit the installation of field wiring and shall isolate this wiring from the adjacent unit. No terminal blocks shall be located in the vertical wireway. Cable tie supports shall be furnished in the vertical wireway to hold cable and wiring in place. The vertical wiring trough shall be covered by a removable hinged door. [A low-level signal raceway shall be provided.]
1.1 Standards
The motor control centers shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ICS 2-3 and UL Standard 845. Vertical sections and individual units shall be UL Labeled where possible.
3.0 Incoming Power/ Main Protective Device
Incoming power to the motor control center shall be [cable]
[bus duct]. [Incoming power cables shall enter the [top] [bottom] of the motor control center.] [Incoming cables shall be of the size and number shown on the plans.] [Incoming bus duct shall enter the top of the motor control center and shall have a current rating as shown on the plans.]
1.2 Service
Each motor control center shall be suitable for use on a
_______ volt, three phase, _____ wire, ______ Hertz power system having a short circuit availability of _____________ amperes RMS symmetrical.
The motor control center main protective device shall be a
[molded case circuit breaker] [insulated case circuit breaker]
[fused switch]. The main device shall be of the ampere rating shown on the plans and shall have an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit current.
1.3 Wiring
Wiring shall be NEMA Class [ I ] [ II ], Type [ A ] [ BD ] [ BT ]
[ C ]. Where Type C wiring is required, the master terminal blocks shall be located at the [top] [bottom] of the vertical section. Combination starter units shall be wired out to split type terminal blocks for easy removal of the starter unit without disturbing either factory or field installed wiring. All control terminal boards shall be accessible from the front.
4.0 Bus System
2.0 Construction
Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA Type [1- Gasketed] [2] [12 ].
Indoor enclosures shall be suitable for front mounting. Outdoor enclosures when specified, shall be NEMA [3R Non-Walk-In] or [3R Walk-in]. The motor control center shall be seismic rated for UBC/CBC Zone 4.
4.1 Main Horizontal Bus
Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous horizontal bus with a current rating of [600] [800] [1200] [1600] [2000]
[2500] amperes. The main bus shall be [tin-plated .0003 inch thick] [standard silver-plated .0002 inch thick] [heavy silverplated .0005 inch thick] copper. The main bus shall be braced for [65,000][100,000] amperes RMS symmetrical. The main bus shall be isolated by barriers from wire troughs, starters, and other areas. There shall be double bolt connections on main bus joints and splice connections. Main bus splicing between shipping splits shall be accomplished from the front with no structural disassembly. The main bus shall be fully rated and arranged for future extension.
Each motor control center shall consist of the required number of vertical sections of heavy gauge sheet steel bolted together to form a rigid self-supporting assembly. A removable lifting angle shall be mounted to the motor control center at the top. Removable bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections and shall extend the width of the lineup.
4.2 Vertical Bus
The vertical bus in each section shall be rated [300] [600]
[850]*amperes and shall be [tin-plated] [silver-plated].
*(1200A Main bus or greater)
Motor control center vertical sections shall be nominally 90inch high and 20-inch deep. Alternate section heights shall be 78" or 66". Alternate section widths shall be 24-inches or
30-inches wide when required.
2.1 Horizontal Wireway
Each vertical section shall contain a minimum 12-inch high top horizontal wireway and a 6” bottom wireway. When loads exit the bottom a 12” bottom wireway shall be provided. The horizontal wireway shall be covered by a removable hinged door.
The vertical bus shall be braced for [65KAIC] [100KAIC]. The vertical bus shall have a flame-retardant polyester-glass insulation / isolation system. This system shall insulate the vertical bus front and rear. In addition, the barrier shall isolate each phase bus. Openings in the vertical bus insulation/isolation system shall permit the entry of unit stabs. Unused openings shall have plugs or covers to prevent the entry of foreign objects. [The openings in the vertical bus used for starter connections shall be covered by an automatic shutter mechanism. The shutters shall automatically cover the openings when the starter is removed.]
2.2 Vertical Wiring Trough
A separate vertical wiring trough shall be furnished in each vertical section adjacent to plug-in unit. The wire trough shall
The vertical bus bracing AIC rating shall be the same as the main horizontal bus.
M1
M
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Specifications
M
4.3 Ground Bus
A copper ground bus shall extend the full width of the motor control center. The ground bus shall be rated [300] [600] amperes. The ground bus shall be drilled and lugs furnished as specified. [There shall be a vertical copper ground bus in each section. This ground bus shall be accessible to a bus stab mounted in the unit compartment area and arranged so that the unit ground stab engages before the power stabs engage the vertical bus]. [A motor load ground lug shall be mounted in the unit and used for terminating the ground of multi-conductor cables.] disengaged from the vertical bus and no power can enter the unit.
Combination starter units specified with Type B or C wiring shall be supplied with split-type terminal blocks. These terminal blocks shall be mounted in front of the unit and shall allow the removal of the unit without disconnecting any of the control wiring. Combination starter units up to size 5 shall be plug-in construction and shall be capable of being removed without disconnecting any control leads from their terminal blocks.
4.4 Neutral Bus
A neutral bus shall be furnished when shown on the plans.
The neutral bus shall be [300] [600] [800] [1000] [1200] [1250].
The neutral bus shall [be in the incoming section only]
[extend the full-width] of the motor control center. When a neutral bus is specified, bottom plates shall be furnished.
Lugs of the proper ampacity shall be furnished.
5.0 Units
Combination motor controller and feeder units shall employ
[molded case circuit breakers] [fusible switches with clips for
J or R type fuses] for branch circuit protection. Circuit breaker disconnects for combination motor starters shall be [thermalmagnetic] [magnetic only].
Overload relays shall be: {select one}
[Bimetallic, ambient compensated]
[Bimetallic, non-ambient compensated]
[Solid-state, ambient insensitive, self powered, adjustable
FLA, adjustable phase unbalance, phase loss protection, and selectable overload class (10, 20, 30) with 2% accuracy and repeatability, built-in thermal memory to prevent hot motor starts, isolated 1NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts]
[Advanced microprocessor based motor protection, Dip switch selectable Phase loss protection/Phase Unbalance, adjustable FLA, Selectable overload class (10, 20, 30)]
[Ground fault protection]
Provisions to Communicate over the following Protocol:
[DeviceNet] [Modbus RTU]
All combination starter and feeder units of plug-in construction shall utilize a positive guidance system to insure positive connection of the unit stabs to the section vertical bus.
Insertion and removal of each unit shall not require the use of special tools. Unit shelves shall be of a lift out design.
Connection from the power stabs to the unit disconnect shall be a direct connection. Each circuit breaker starter unit size 1 through size 5 shall be of plug-in construction. Each circuit breaker feeder 600A or less shall be plug-in.
Each unit compartment shall be equipped with a flange-formed pan type door. The door shall be mounted on the vertical section with removable hinges.
The following minimum information shall be available over the Network.
• Metering (Average Phase Current in Amps, Control Voltage,
Motor Run Time)
• Starter Status and Configuration Notification (Run,
Overload, Ground Fault, Phase Unbalance, Commanded
Trip, Class setting)
• Information (Voltage, Internal failure, 100% Motor Load
Warning)
• Remote Control (On, Off, Trip, Reset)
[Provide a Display Module for accessing at the unit all Network data] [Door mounted] [Hand held using phone jack on the door].
Each unit shall be equipped with an operating handle. The handle shall be connected to the disconnect operator using a direct drive and requiring no adjustment of linkage. The handle shall be mechanically interlocked with the door, preventing door opening with disconnect closed. The interlock shall also prevent disconnect being closed with the door open and prevent the unit from being removed or installed with disconnect ON.
The interlock shall be capable of being defeated, allowing the door to be opened with disconnect closed or disconnect closed with the door open. The unit handle shall have provision for padlock ing in the off position. On circuit breaker units the handle shall have a “tripped” position in addition to OFF/ON.
Each unit shall be capable of being padlocked in a partially withdrawn position. In this position, the unit power stabs are
Control power for starter units shall be from: {select one}
[Individual control power transformers furnished in each starter unit. One secondary lead shall be furnished with a fuse and the other lead shall be grounded. Control power primary fuses are required].
[Line voltage. Control circuits on all starter units with line voltage control power shall be provided with current limiting fuses mounted in both legs of the control circuit].
[Separate source (common control)] Two wired terminal points shall be provided. One leg shall be wired through a normally open auxiliary contact in each disconnect and a control power fuse rated 1 amp shall be provided.]
M2
Evolution Series E9000 Motor Control Centers
Specifications
Starter units shall be provided with the following auxiliary devices:
[auxiliary starter interlocks, ______ N/O, ______N/C].
[control / timing relays (as shown on the drawings)].
[door mounted pilot devices: Start-stop pushbutton, H-O-A selector switch, Indicating lights (quantity and color)].
Miscellaneous Units
The following units shall be included in the motor control center(s) as indicated on the drawings:
[Lighting and Power transformers]
[Lighting panelboards]
[Power metering and associated instrument transformers, where required]
[Power factor correction capacitors]
[Reduced Voltage Solid State]
[Variable Frequency Drives]
[PLC’s]
M3
M
Imagination at work
GE
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT 06062 www.geindustrial.com
* Indicates a trademark of the General Electric Company and/or its subsidiaries.
Information provided is subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions, and GE makes no warranty or guarantee, express or implied, that such performance will be obtained under end-use conditions.
DET-291F 0615
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project